9301 lines
365 KiB
Text
9301 lines
365 KiB
Text
The pkgsrc guide
|
|
|
|
Documentation on the NetBSD packages system
|
|
|
|
Alistair Crooks
|
|
|
|
<agc@NetBSD.org>
|
|
|
|
Hubert Feyrer
|
|
|
|
<hubertf@NetBSD.org>
|
|
|
|
The pkgsrc Developers
|
|
|
|
Copyright 1994-2007 The NetBSD Foundation, Inc
|
|
|
|
$NetBSD: pkgsrc.xml,v 1.26 2007/09/18 08:17:21 rillig Exp $
|
|
|
|
Abstract
|
|
|
|
pkgsrc is a centralized package management system for Unix-like operating
|
|
systems. This guide provides information for users and developers of pkgsrc. It
|
|
covers installation of binary and source packages, creation of binary and
|
|
source packages and a high-level overview about the infrastructure.
|
|
|
|
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
|
|
|
|
Table of Contents
|
|
|
|
1. What is pkgsrc?
|
|
|
|
1.1. Introduction
|
|
|
|
1.1.1. Why pkgsrc?
|
|
1.1.2. Supported platforms
|
|
|
|
1.2. Overview
|
|
1.3. Terminology
|
|
|
|
1.3.1. Roles involved in pkgsrc
|
|
|
|
1.4. Typography
|
|
|
|
I. The pkgsrc user's guide
|
|
|
|
2. Where to get pkgsrc and how to keep it up-to-date
|
|
|
|
2.1. Getting pkgsrc for the first time
|
|
|
|
2.1.1. As tar file
|
|
2.1.2. Via SUP
|
|
2.1.3. Via anonymous CVS
|
|
|
|
2.2. Keeping pkgsrc up-to-date
|
|
|
|
2.2.1. Via tar files
|
|
2.2.2. Via CVS
|
|
|
|
3. Using pkgsrc on systems other than NetBSD
|
|
|
|
3.1. Binary distribution
|
|
3.2. Bootstrapping pkgsrc
|
|
3.3. Platform-specific notes
|
|
|
|
3.3.1. Darwin (Mac OS X)
|
|
3.3.2. FreeBSD
|
|
3.3.3. Interix
|
|
3.3.4. IRIX
|
|
3.3.5. Linux
|
|
3.3.6. OpenBSD
|
|
3.3.7. Solaris
|
|
|
|
4. Using pkgsrc
|
|
|
|
4.1. Using binary packages
|
|
|
|
4.1.1. Finding binary packages
|
|
4.1.2. Installing binary packages
|
|
4.1.3. Deinstalling packages
|
|
4.1.4. Getting information about installed packages
|
|
4.1.5. Checking for security vulnerabilities in installed packages
|
|
4.1.6. Finding if newer versions of your installed packages are in
|
|
pkgsrc
|
|
4.1.7. Other administrative functions
|
|
4.1.8. A word of warning
|
|
|
|
4.2. Building packages from source
|
|
|
|
4.2.1. Requirements
|
|
4.2.2. Fetching distfiles
|
|
4.2.3. How to build and install
|
|
|
|
5. Configuring pkgsrc
|
|
|
|
5.1. General configuration
|
|
5.2. Variables affecting the build process
|
|
5.3. Variables affecting the installation process
|
|
5.4. Selecting and configuring the compiler
|
|
|
|
5.4.1. Selecting the compiler
|
|
5.4.2. Additional flags to the compiler (CFLAGS)
|
|
5.4.3. Additional flags to the linker (LDFLAGS)
|
|
|
|
5.5. Developer/advanced settings
|
|
5.6. Selecting Build Options
|
|
|
|
6. Creating binary packages
|
|
|
|
6.1. Building a single binary package
|
|
6.2. Settings for creation of binary packages
|
|
|
|
7. Creating binary packages for everything in pkgsrc (bulk builds)
|
|
|
|
7.1. Think first, build later
|
|
7.2. Requirements of a bulk build
|
|
7.3. Running an old-style bulk build
|
|
|
|
7.3.1. Configuration
|
|
7.3.2. Other environmental considerations
|
|
7.3.3. Operation
|
|
7.3.4. What it does
|
|
7.3.5. Disk space requirements
|
|
7.3.6. Setting up a sandbox for chrooted builds
|
|
7.3.7. Building a partial set of packages
|
|
7.3.8. Uploading results of a bulk build
|
|
|
|
7.4. Running a pbulk-style bulk build
|
|
|
|
7.4.1. Preparation
|
|
7.4.2. Configuration
|
|
|
|
7.5. Creating a multiple CD-ROM packages collection
|
|
|
|
7.5.1. Example of cdpack
|
|
|
|
8. Directory layout of the installed files
|
|
|
|
8.1. File system layout in ${LOCALBASE}
|
|
8.2. File system layout in ${VARBASE}
|
|
|
|
9. Frequently Asked Questions
|
|
|
|
9.1. Are there any mailing lists for pkg-related discussion?
|
|
9.2. Where's the pkgviews documentation?
|
|
9.3. Utilities for package management (pkgtools)
|
|
9.4. How to use pkgsrc as non-root
|
|
9.5. How to resume transfers when fetching distfiles?
|
|
9.6. How can I install/use modular X.org from pkgsrc?
|
|
9.7. How to fetch files from behind a firewall
|
|
9.8. How do I tell make fetch to do passive FTP?
|
|
9.9. How to fetch all distfiles at once
|
|
9.10. What does Don't know how to make /usr/share/tmac/tmac.andoc mean?
|
|
9.11. What does Could not find bsd.own.mk mean?
|
|
9.12. Using 'sudo' with pkgsrc
|
|
9.13. How do I change the location of configuration files?
|
|
9.14. Automated security checks
|
|
9.15. Why do some packages ignore my CFLAGS?
|
|
9.16. A package does not build. What shall I do?
|
|
9.17. What does Makefile appears to contain unresolved cvs/rcs/???
|
|
merge conflicts mean?
|
|
|
|
II. The pkgsrc developer's guide
|
|
|
|
10. Creating a new pkgsrc package from scratch
|
|
|
|
10.1. Common types of packages
|
|
|
|
10.1.1. Perl modules
|
|
10.1.2. KDE applications
|
|
10.1.3. Python modules and programs
|
|
|
|
10.2. Examples
|
|
|
|
10.2.1. How the www/nvu package came into pkgsrc
|
|
|
|
11. Package components - files, directories and contents
|
|
|
|
11.1. Makefile
|
|
11.2. distinfo
|
|
11.3. patches/*
|
|
|
|
11.3.1. Structure of a single patch file
|
|
11.3.2. Creating patch files
|
|
11.3.3. Sources where the patch files come from
|
|
11.3.4. Patching guidelines
|
|
11.3.5. Feedback to the author
|
|
|
|
11.4. Other mandatory files
|
|
11.5. Optional files
|
|
|
|
11.5.1. Files affecting the binary package
|
|
11.5.2. Files affecting the build process
|
|
11.5.3. Files affecting nothing at all
|
|
|
|
11.6. work*
|
|
11.7. files/*
|
|
|
|
12. Programming in Makefiles
|
|
|
|
12.1. Caveats
|
|
12.2. Makefile variables
|
|
|
|
12.2.1. Naming conventions
|
|
|
|
12.3. Code snippets
|
|
|
|
12.3.1. Adding things to a list
|
|
12.3.2. Converting an internal list into an external list
|
|
12.3.3. Passing variables to a shell command
|
|
12.3.4. Quoting guideline
|
|
12.3.5. Workaround for a bug in BSD Make
|
|
|
|
13. PLIST issues
|
|
|
|
13.1. RCS ID
|
|
13.2. Semi-automatic PLIST generation
|
|
13.3. Tweaking output of make print-PLIST
|
|
13.4. Variable substitution in PLIST
|
|
13.5. Man page compression
|
|
13.6. Changing PLIST source with PLIST_SRC
|
|
13.7. Platform-specific and differing PLISTs
|
|
13.8. Sharing directories between packages
|
|
|
|
14. Buildlink methodology
|
|
|
|
14.1. Converting packages to use buildlink3
|
|
14.2. Writing buildlink3.mk files
|
|
|
|
14.2.1. Anatomy of a buildlink3.mk file
|
|
14.2.2. Updating BUILDLINK_API_DEPENDS.pkg in buildlink3.mk files
|
|
|
|
14.3. Writing builtin.mk files
|
|
|
|
14.3.1. Anatomy of a builtin.mk file
|
|
14.3.2. Global preferences for native or pkgsrc software
|
|
|
|
15. The pkginstall framework
|
|
|
|
15.1. Files and directories outside the installation prefix
|
|
|
|
15.1.1. Directory manipulation
|
|
15.1.2. File manipulation
|
|
|
|
15.2. Configuration files
|
|
|
|
15.2.1. How PKG_SYSCONFDIR is set
|
|
15.2.2. Telling the software where configuration files are
|
|
15.2.3. Patching installations
|
|
15.2.4. Disabling handling of configuration files
|
|
|
|
15.3. System startup scripts
|
|
|
|
15.3.1. Disabling handling of system startup scripts
|
|
|
|
15.4. System users and groups
|
|
15.5. System shells
|
|
|
|
15.5.1. Disabling shell registration
|
|
|
|
15.6. Fonts
|
|
|
|
15.6.1. Disabling automatic update of the fonts databases
|
|
|
|
16. Options handling
|
|
|
|
16.1. Global default options
|
|
16.2. Converting packages to use bsd.options.mk
|
|
16.3. Option Names
|
|
16.4. Determining the options of dependencies
|
|
|
|
17. The build process
|
|
|
|
17.1. Introduction
|
|
17.2. Program location
|
|
17.3. Directories used during the build process
|
|
17.4. Running a phase
|
|
17.5. The fetch phase
|
|
|
|
17.5.1. What to fetch and where to get it from
|
|
17.5.2. How are the files fetched?
|
|
|
|
17.6. The checksum phase
|
|
17.7. The extract phase
|
|
17.8. The patch phase
|
|
17.9. The tools phase
|
|
17.10. The wrapper phase
|
|
17.11. The configure phase
|
|
17.12. The build phase
|
|
17.13. The test phase
|
|
17.14. The install phase
|
|
17.15. The package phase
|
|
17.16. Cleaning up
|
|
17.17. Other helpful targets
|
|
|
|
18. Tools needed for building or running
|
|
|
|
18.1. Tools for pkgsrc builds
|
|
18.2. Tools needed by packages
|
|
18.3. Tools provided by platforms
|
|
18.4. Questions regarding the tools
|
|
|
|
19. Making your package work
|
|
|
|
19.1. General operation
|
|
|
|
19.1.1. Portability of packages
|
|
19.1.2. How to pull in user-settable variables from ???
|
|
19.1.3. User interaction
|
|
19.1.4. Handling licenses
|
|
19.1.5. Restricted packages
|
|
19.1.6. Handling dependencies
|
|
19.1.7. Handling conflicts with other packages
|
|
19.1.8. Packages that cannot or should not be built
|
|
19.1.9. Packages which should not be deleted, once installed
|
|
19.1.10. Handling packages with security problems
|
|
19.1.11. How to handle incrementing versions when fixing an
|
|
existing package
|
|
19.1.12. Substituting variable text in the package files (the SUBST
|
|
framework)
|
|
|
|
19.2. Fixing problems in the fetch phase
|
|
|
|
19.2.1. Packages whose distfiles aren't available for plain
|
|
downloading
|
|
19.2.2. How to handle modified distfiles with the 'old' name
|
|
|
|
19.3. Fixing problems in the configure phase
|
|
|
|
19.3.1. Shared libraries - libtool
|
|
19.3.2. Using libtool on GNU packages that already support libtool
|
|
19.3.3. GNU Autoconf/Automake
|
|
|
|
19.4. Programming languages
|
|
|
|
19.4.1. C, C++, and Fortran
|
|
19.4.2. Java
|
|
19.4.3. Packages containing perl scripts
|
|
19.4.4. Other programming languages
|
|
|
|
19.5. Fixing problems in the build phase
|
|
|
|
19.5.1. Compiling C and C++ code conditionally
|
|
19.5.2. How to handle compiler bugs
|
|
19.5.3. Undefined reference to ...
|
|
19.5.4. Running out of memory
|
|
|
|
19.6. Fixing problems in the install phase
|
|
|
|
19.6.1. Creating needed directories
|
|
19.6.2. Where to install documentation
|
|
19.6.3. Installing highscore files
|
|
19.6.4. Adding DESTDIR support to packages
|
|
19.6.5. Packages with hardcoded paths to other interpreters
|
|
19.6.6. Packages installing perl modules
|
|
19.6.7. Packages installing info files
|
|
19.6.8. Packages installing man pages
|
|
19.6.9. Packages installing GConf data files
|
|
19.6.10. Packages installing scrollkeeper/rarian data files
|
|
19.6.11. Packages installing X11 fonts
|
|
19.6.12. Packages installing GTK2 modules
|
|
19.6.13. Packages installing SGML or XML data
|
|
19.6.14. Packages installing extensions to the MIME database
|
|
19.6.15. Packages using intltool
|
|
19.6.16. Packages installing startup scripts
|
|
19.6.17. Packages installing TeX modules
|
|
19.6.18. Packages supporting running binaries in emulation
|
|
19.6.19. Packages installing hicolor theme icons
|
|
19.6.20. Packages installing desktop files
|
|
|
|
19.7. Marking packages as having problems
|
|
|
|
20. Debugging
|
|
21. Submitting and Committing
|
|
|
|
21.1. Submitting binary packages
|
|
21.2. Submitting source packages (for non-NetBSD-developers)
|
|
21.3. General notes when adding, updating, or removing packages
|
|
21.4. Committing: Importing a package into CVS
|
|
21.5. Updating a package to a newer version
|
|
21.6. Moving a package in pkgsrc
|
|
|
|
22. Frequently Asked Questions
|
|
23. GNOME packaging and porting
|
|
|
|
23.1. Meta packages
|
|
23.2. Packaging a GNOME application
|
|
23.3. Updating GNOME to a newer version
|
|
23.4. Patching guidelines
|
|
|
|
III. The pkgsrc infrastructure internals
|
|
|
|
24. Design of the pkgsrc infrastructure
|
|
|
|
24.1. The meaning of variable definitions
|
|
24.2. Avoiding problems before they arise
|
|
24.3. Variable evaluation
|
|
|
|
24.3.1. At load time
|
|
24.3.2. At runtime
|
|
|
|
24.4. How can variables be specified?
|
|
24.5. Designing interfaces for Makefile fragments
|
|
|
|
24.5.1. Procedures with parameters
|
|
24.5.2. Actions taken on behalf of parameters
|
|
|
|
24.6. The order in which files are loaded
|
|
|
|
24.6.1. The order in bsd.prefs.mk
|
|
24.6.2. The order in bsd.pkg.mk
|
|
|
|
25. Regression tests
|
|
|
|
25.1. The regression tests framework
|
|
25.2. Running the regression tests
|
|
25.3. Adding a new regression test
|
|
|
|
25.3.1. Overridable functions
|
|
25.3.2. Helper functions
|
|
|
|
26. Porting pkgsrc
|
|
|
|
26.1. Porting pkgsrc to a new operating system
|
|
26.2. Adding support for a new compiler
|
|
|
|
A. A simple example package: bison
|
|
|
|
A.1. files
|
|
|
|
A.1.1. Makefile
|
|
A.1.2. DESCR
|
|
A.1.3. PLIST
|
|
A.1.4. Checking a package with pkglint
|
|
|
|
A.2. Steps for building, installing, packaging
|
|
|
|
B. Build logs
|
|
|
|
B.1. Building figlet
|
|
B.2. Packaging figlet
|
|
|
|
C. Directory layout of the pkgsrc FTP server
|
|
|
|
C.1. bootstrap-pkgsrc: Bootstrap kits
|
|
C.2. distfiles: The distributed source files
|
|
C.3. iso: Currently empty
|
|
C.4. misc: Miscellaneous things
|
|
C.5. packages: Binary packages
|
|
C.6. reports: Bulk build reports
|
|
C.7. current, pkgsrc-200xQy: source packages
|
|
|
|
D. Editing guidelines for the pkgsrc guide
|
|
|
|
D.1. Make targets
|
|
D.2. Procedure
|
|
|
|
List of Tables
|
|
|
|
1.1. Platforms supported by pkgsrc
|
|
11.1. Patching examples
|
|
23.1. PLIST handling for GNOME packages
|
|
|
|
Chapter 1. What is pkgsrc?
|
|
|
|
Table of Contents
|
|
|
|
1.1. Introduction
|
|
|
|
1.1.1. Why pkgsrc?
|
|
1.1.2. Supported platforms
|
|
|
|
1.2. Overview
|
|
1.3. Terminology
|
|
|
|
1.3.1. Roles involved in pkgsrc
|
|
|
|
1.4. Typography
|
|
|
|
1.1. Introduction
|
|
|
|
There is a lot of software freely available for Unix-based systems, which is
|
|
usually available in form of the source code. Before such software can be used,
|
|
it needs to be configured to the local system, compiled and installed, and this
|
|
is exactly what The NetBSD Packages Collection (pkgsrc) does. pkgsrc also has
|
|
some basic commands to handle binary packages, so that not every user has to
|
|
build the packages for himself, which is a time-costly task.
|
|
|
|
pkgsrc currently contains several thousand packages, including:
|
|
|
|
* www/apache - The Apache web server
|
|
|
|
* www/firefox - The Firefox web browser
|
|
|
|
* meta-pkgs/gnome - The GNOME Desktop Environment
|
|
|
|
* meta-pkgs/kde3 - The K Desktop Environment
|
|
|
|
...just to name a few.
|
|
|
|
pkgsrc has built-in support for handling varying dependencies, such as pthreads
|
|
and X11, and extended features such as IPv6 support on a range of platforms.
|
|
|
|
1.1.1. Why pkgsrc?
|
|
|
|
pkgsrc provides the following key features:
|
|
|
|
* Easy building of software from source as well as the creation and
|
|
installation of binary packages. The source and latest patches are
|
|
retrieved from a master or mirror download site, checksum verified, then
|
|
built on your system. Support for binary-only distributions is available
|
|
for both native platforms and NetBSD emulated platforms.
|
|
|
|
* All packages are installed in a consistent directory tree, including
|
|
binaries, libraries, man pages and other documentation.
|
|
|
|
* Package dependencies, including when performing package updates, are
|
|
handled automatically. The configuration files of various packages are
|
|
handled automatically during updates, so local changes are preserved.
|
|
|
|
* Like NetBSD, pkgsrc is designed with portability in mind and consists of
|
|
highly portable code. This allows the greatest speed of development when
|
|
porting to new a platform. This portability also ensures that pkgsrc is
|
|
consistent across all platforms.
|
|
|
|
* The installation prefix, acceptable software licenses, international
|
|
encryption requirements and build-time options for a large number of
|
|
packages are all set in a simple, central configuration file.
|
|
|
|
* The entire source (not including the distribution files) is freely
|
|
available under a BSD license, so you may extend and adapt pkgsrc to your
|
|
needs. Support for local packages and patches is available right out of the
|
|
box, so you can configure it specifically for your environment.
|
|
|
|
The following principles are basic to pkgsrc:
|
|
|
|
* "It should only work if it's right." ? That means, if a package contains
|
|
bugs, it's better to find them and to complain about them rather than to
|
|
just install the package and hope that it works. There are numerous checks
|
|
in pkgsrc that try to find such bugs: Static analysis tools (pkgtools/
|
|
pkglint), build-time checks (portability of shell scripts), and
|
|
post-installation checks (installed files, references to shared libraries,
|
|
script interpreters).
|
|
|
|
* "If it works, it should work everywhere" ? Like NetBSD has been ported to
|
|
many hardware architectures, pkgsrc has been ported to many operating
|
|
systems. Care is taken that packages behave the same on all platforms.
|
|
|
|
1.1.2. Supported platforms
|
|
|
|
pkgsrc consists of both a source distribution and a binary distribution for
|
|
these operating systems. After retrieving the required source or binaries, you
|
|
can be up and running with pkgsrc in just minutes!
|
|
|
|
pkgsrc was derived from FreeBSD's ports system, and initially developed for
|
|
NetBSD only. Since then, pkgsrc has grown a lot, and now supports the following
|
|
platforms:
|
|
|
|
Table 1.1. Platforms supported by pkgsrc
|
|
|
|
+----------------------------------------------------------------+
|
|
| Platform |Date Support Added|
|
|
|---------------------------------------------+------------------|
|
|
|NetBSD | Aug 1997 |
|
|
|---------------------------------------------+------------------|
|
|
|Solaris | Mar 1999 |
|
|
|---------------------------------------------+------------------|
|
|
|Linux | Jun 1999 |
|
|
|---------------------------------------------+------------------|
|
|
|Darwin (Mac OS X) | Oct 2001 |
|
|
|---------------------------------------------+------------------|
|
|
|FreeBSD | Nov 2002 |
|
|
|---------------------------------------------+------------------|
|
|
|OpenBSD | Nov 2002 |
|
|
|---------------------------------------------+------------------|
|
|
|IRIX | Dec 2002 |
|
|
|---------------------------------------------+------------------|
|
|
|BSD/OS | Dec 2003 |
|
|
|---------------------------------------------+------------------|
|
|
|AIX | Dec 2003 |
|
|
|---------------------------------------------+------------------|
|
|
|Interix (Microsoft Windows Services for Unix)| Mar 2004 |
|
|
|---------------------------------------------+------------------|
|
|
|DragonFlyBSD | Oct 2004 |
|
|
|---------------------------------------------+------------------|
|
|
|OSF/1 | Nov 2004 |
|
|
|---------------------------------------------+------------------|
|
|
|HP-UX | Apr 2007 |
|
|
+----------------------------------------------------------------+
|
|
|
|
|
|
1.2. Overview
|
|
|
|
This document is divided into three parts. The first, The pkgsrc user's guide,
|
|
describes how one can use one of the packages in the Package Collection, either
|
|
by installing a precompiled binary package, or by building one's own copy using
|
|
the NetBSD package system. The second part, The pkgsrc developer's guide,
|
|
explains how to prepare a package so it can be easily built by other NetBSD
|
|
users without knowing about the package's building details. The third part, The
|
|
pkgsrc infrastructure internals is intended for those who want to understand
|
|
how pkgsrc is implemented.
|
|
|
|
This document is available in various formats: HTML, PDF, PS, TXT.
|
|
|
|
1.3. Terminology
|
|
|
|
There has been a lot of talk about "ports", "packages", etc. so far. Here is a
|
|
description of all the terminology used within this document.
|
|
|
|
Package
|
|
|
|
A set of files and building instructions that describe what's necessary to
|
|
build a certain piece of software using pkgsrc. Packages are traditionally
|
|
stored under /usr/pkgsrc.
|
|
|
|
The NetBSD package system
|
|
|
|
This is the former name of "pkgsrc". It is part of the NetBSD operating
|
|
system and can be bootstrapped to run on non-NetBSD operating systems as
|
|
well. It handles building (compiling), installing, and removing of
|
|
packages.
|
|
|
|
Distfile
|
|
|
|
This term describes the file or files that are provided by the author of
|
|
the piece of software to distribute his work. All the changes necessary to
|
|
build on NetBSD are reflected in the corresponding package. Usually the
|
|
distfile is in the form of a compressed tar-archive, but other types are
|
|
possible, too. Distfiles are usually stored below /usr/pkgsrc/distfiles.
|
|
|
|
Port
|
|
|
|
This is the term used by FreeBSD and OpenBSD people for what we call a
|
|
package. In NetBSD terminology, "port" refers to a different architecture.
|
|
|
|
Precompiled/binary package
|
|
|
|
A set of binaries built with pkgsrc from a distfile and stuffed together in
|
|
a single .tgz file so it can be installed on machines of the same machine
|
|
architecture without the need to recompile. Packages are usually generated
|
|
in /usr/pkgsrc/packages; there is also an archive on ftp.NetBSD.org.
|
|
|
|
Sometimes, this is referred to by the term "package" too, especially in the
|
|
context of precompiled packages.
|
|
|
|
Program
|
|
|
|
The piece of software to be installed which will be constructed from all
|
|
the files in the distfile by the actions defined in the corresponding
|
|
package.
|
|
|
|
1.3.1. Roles involved in pkgsrc
|
|
|
|
pkgsrc users
|
|
|
|
The pkgsrc users are people who use the packages provided by pkgsrc.
|
|
Typically they are system administrators. The people using the software
|
|
that is inside the packages (maybe called "end users") are not covered by
|
|
the pkgsrc guide.
|
|
|
|
There are two kinds of pkgsrc users: Some only want to install pre-built
|
|
binary packages. Others build the pkgsrc packages from source, either for
|
|
installing them directly or for building binary packages themselves. For
|
|
pkgsrc users Part I, "The pkgsrc user's guide" should provide all necessary
|
|
documentation.
|
|
|
|
package maintainers
|
|
|
|
A package maintainer creates packages as described in Part II, "The pkgsrc
|
|
developer's guide".
|
|
|
|
infrastructure developers
|
|
|
|
These people are involved in all those files that live in the mk/ directory
|
|
and below. Only these people should need to read through Part III, "The
|
|
pkgsrc infrastructure internals", though others might be curious, too.
|
|
|
|
1.4. Typography
|
|
|
|
When giving examples for commands, shell prompts are used to show if the
|
|
command should/can be issued as root, or if "normal" user privileges are
|
|
sufficient. We use a # for root's shell prompt, and a % for users' shell
|
|
prompt, assuming they use the C-shell or tcsh.
|
|
|
|
Part I. The pkgsrc user's guide
|
|
|
|
Table of Contents
|
|
|
|
2. Where to get pkgsrc and how to keep it up-to-date
|
|
|
|
2.1. Getting pkgsrc for the first time
|
|
|
|
2.1.1. As tar file
|
|
2.1.2. Via SUP
|
|
2.1.3. Via anonymous CVS
|
|
|
|
2.2. Keeping pkgsrc up-to-date
|
|
|
|
2.2.1. Via tar files
|
|
2.2.2. Via CVS
|
|
|
|
3. Using pkgsrc on systems other than NetBSD
|
|
|
|
3.1. Binary distribution
|
|
3.2. Bootstrapping pkgsrc
|
|
3.3. Platform-specific notes
|
|
|
|
3.3.1. Darwin (Mac OS X)
|
|
3.3.2. FreeBSD
|
|
3.3.3. Interix
|
|
3.3.4. IRIX
|
|
3.3.5. Linux
|
|
3.3.6. OpenBSD
|
|
3.3.7. Solaris
|
|
|
|
4. Using pkgsrc
|
|
|
|
4.1. Using binary packages
|
|
|
|
4.1.1. Finding binary packages
|
|
4.1.2. Installing binary packages
|
|
4.1.3. Deinstalling packages
|
|
4.1.4. Getting information about installed packages
|
|
4.1.5. Checking for security vulnerabilities in installed packages
|
|
4.1.6. Finding if newer versions of your installed packages are in
|
|
pkgsrc
|
|
4.1.7. Other administrative functions
|
|
4.1.8. A word of warning
|
|
|
|
4.2. Building packages from source
|
|
|
|
4.2.1. Requirements
|
|
4.2.2. Fetching distfiles
|
|
4.2.3. How to build and install
|
|
|
|
5. Configuring pkgsrc
|
|
|
|
5.1. General configuration
|
|
5.2. Variables affecting the build process
|
|
5.3. Variables affecting the installation process
|
|
5.4. Selecting and configuring the compiler
|
|
|
|
5.4.1. Selecting the compiler
|
|
5.4.2. Additional flags to the compiler (CFLAGS)
|
|
5.4.3. Additional flags to the linker (LDFLAGS)
|
|
|
|
5.5. Developer/advanced settings
|
|
5.6. Selecting Build Options
|
|
|
|
6. Creating binary packages
|
|
|
|
6.1. Building a single binary package
|
|
6.2. Settings for creation of binary packages
|
|
|
|
7. Creating binary packages for everything in pkgsrc (bulk builds)
|
|
|
|
7.1. Think first, build later
|
|
7.2. Requirements of a bulk build
|
|
7.3. Running an old-style bulk build
|
|
|
|
7.3.1. Configuration
|
|
7.3.2. Other environmental considerations
|
|
7.3.3. Operation
|
|
7.3.4. What it does
|
|
7.3.5. Disk space requirements
|
|
7.3.6. Setting up a sandbox for chrooted builds
|
|
7.3.7. Building a partial set of packages
|
|
7.3.8. Uploading results of a bulk build
|
|
|
|
7.4. Running a pbulk-style bulk build
|
|
|
|
7.4.1. Preparation
|
|
7.4.2. Configuration
|
|
|
|
7.5. Creating a multiple CD-ROM packages collection
|
|
|
|
7.5.1. Example of cdpack
|
|
|
|
8. Directory layout of the installed files
|
|
|
|
8.1. File system layout in ${LOCALBASE}
|
|
8.2. File system layout in ${VARBASE}
|
|
|
|
9. Frequently Asked Questions
|
|
|
|
9.1. Are there any mailing lists for pkg-related discussion?
|
|
9.2. Where's the pkgviews documentation?
|
|
9.3. Utilities for package management (pkgtools)
|
|
9.4. How to use pkgsrc as non-root
|
|
9.5. How to resume transfers when fetching distfiles?
|
|
9.6. How can I install/use modular X.org from pkgsrc?
|
|
9.7. How to fetch files from behind a firewall
|
|
9.8. How do I tell make fetch to do passive FTP?
|
|
9.9. How to fetch all distfiles at once
|
|
9.10. What does Don't know how to make /usr/share/tmac/tmac.andoc mean?
|
|
9.11. What does Could not find bsd.own.mk mean?
|
|
9.12. Using 'sudo' with pkgsrc
|
|
9.13. How do I change the location of configuration files?
|
|
9.14. Automated security checks
|
|
9.15. Why do some packages ignore my CFLAGS?
|
|
9.16. A package does not build. What shall I do?
|
|
9.17. What does Makefile appears to contain unresolved cvs/rcs/??? merge
|
|
conflicts mean?
|
|
|
|
Chapter 2. Where to get pkgsrc and how to keep it up-to-date
|
|
|
|
Table of Contents
|
|
|
|
2.1. Getting pkgsrc for the first time
|
|
|
|
2.1.1. As tar file
|
|
2.1.2. Via SUP
|
|
2.1.3. Via anonymous CVS
|
|
|
|
2.2. Keeping pkgsrc up-to-date
|
|
|
|
2.2.1. Via tar files
|
|
2.2.2. Via CVS
|
|
|
|
Before you download and extract the files, you need to decide where you want to
|
|
extract them. When using pkgsrc as root user, pkgsrc is usually installed in /
|
|
usr/pkgsrc. You are though free to install the sources and binary packages
|
|
wherever you want in your filesystem, provided that the pathname does not
|
|
contain white-space or other characters that are interpreted specially by the
|
|
shell and some other programs. A safe bet is to use only letters, digits,
|
|
underscores and dashes.
|
|
|
|
2.1. Getting pkgsrc for the first time
|
|
|
|
Before you download any pkgsrc files, you should decide whether you want the
|
|
current branch or the stable branch. The latter is forked on a quarterly basis
|
|
from the current branch and only gets modified for security updates. The names
|
|
of the stable branches are built from the year and the quarter, for example
|
|
2007Q4.
|
|
|
|
The second step is to decide how you want to download pkgsrc. You can get it as
|
|
a tar file, via SUP, or via CVS. All three ways are described here.
|
|
|
|
2.1.1. As tar file
|
|
|
|
The primary download location for all pkgsrc files is ftp://ftp.NetBSD.org/pub/
|
|
pkgsrc/. There are a number of subdirectories for different purposes, which are
|
|
described in detail in Appendix C, Directory layout of the pkgsrc FTP server.
|
|
|
|
The tar file for the current branch is in the directory current and is called
|
|
pkgsrc.tar.gz. It is autogenerated daily.
|
|
|
|
The tar file for the stable branch 2007Q4 is in the directory pkgsrc-2007Q4 and
|
|
is also called pkgsrc-2007Q4.tar.gz.
|
|
|
|
To download a pkgsrc stable tarball, run:
|
|
|
|
$ ftp ftp://ftp.NetBSD.org/pub/pkgsrc/pkgsrc-200xQy/pkgsrc-200xQy.tar.gz
|
|
|
|
Where pkgsrc-200xQy is the stable branch to be downloaded, for example,
|
|
"pkgsrc-2007Q4".
|
|
|
|
Then, extract it with:
|
|
|
|
$ tar -xzf pkgsrc-200xQy.tar.gz -C /usr
|
|
|
|
This will create the directory pkgsrc/ in /usr/ and all the package source will
|
|
be stored under /usr/pkgsrc/.
|
|
|
|
To download pkgsrc-current, run:
|
|
|
|
$ ftp ftp://ftp.NetBSD.org/pub/pkgsrc/current/pkgsrc.tar.gz
|
|
|
|
2.1.2. Via SUP
|
|
|
|
As an alternative to the tar file, you can get pkgsrc via the Software Update
|
|
Protocol, SUP. To do so, make sure your supfile has a line
|
|
|
|
release=pkgsrc
|
|
|
|
in it, see the examples in /usr/share/examples/supfiles, and that the /usr/
|
|
pkgsrc directory exists. Then, simply run:
|
|
|
|
$ sup -v /path/to/your/supfile.
|
|
|
|
2.1.3. Via anonymous CVS
|
|
|
|
To do an initial (full) checkout of pkgsrc, you first have to set some
|
|
environment variables. For the C-Shell, type:
|
|
|
|
% setenv CVSROOT anoncvs@anoncvs.NetBSD.org:/cvsroot
|
|
% setenv CVS_RSH ssh
|
|
|
|
Or, the same for the bourne shell:
|
|
|
|
$ export CVSROOT="anoncvs@anoncvs.NetBSD.org:/cvsroot"
|
|
$ export CVS_RSH="ssh"
|
|
|
|
By default, CVS doesn't do things like most people would expect it to do. But
|
|
there is a way to convince CVS, by creating a file called .cvsrc in your home
|
|
directory and saving the following lines to it. This file will save you lots of
|
|
headache and some bug reports, so we strongly recommend it. You can find an
|
|
explanation of this file in the CVS documentation.
|
|
|
|
# recommended CVS configuration file from the pkgsrc guide
|
|
checkout -P
|
|
update -dP
|
|
release -d
|
|
diff -upN
|
|
cvs -q -z3
|
|
rdiff -u
|
|
|
|
To fetch a specific pkgsrc stable branch from scratch, run:
|
|
|
|
$ cd /usr
|
|
$ cvs checkout -r pkgsrc-200xQy -P pkgsrc
|
|
|
|
Where pkgsrc-200xQy is the stable branch to be checked out, for example,
|
|
"pkgsrc-2007Q4"
|
|
|
|
This will create the directory pkgsrc/ in your /usr/ directory and all the
|
|
package source will be stored under /usr/pkgsrc/.
|
|
|
|
To fetch the pkgsrc current branch, run:
|
|
|
|
$ cd /usr
|
|
$ cvs checkout -P pkgsrc
|
|
|
|
2.2. Keeping pkgsrc up-to-date
|
|
|
|
The preferred way to keep pkgsrc up-to-date is via CVS (which also works if you
|
|
have first installed it via a tar file). It saves bandwidth and hard disk
|
|
activity, compared to downloading the tar file again.
|
|
|
|
2.2.1. Via tar files
|
|
|
|
Warning
|
|
|
|
When updating from a tar file, you first need to completely remove the old
|
|
pkgsrc directory. Otherwise those files that have been removed from pkgsrc in
|
|
the mean time will not be removed on your local disk, resulting in
|
|
inconsistencies. When removing the old files, any changes that you have done to
|
|
the pkgsrc files will be lost after updating. Therefore updating via CVS is
|
|
strongly recommended.
|
|
|
|
Note that by default the distfiles and the binary packages are saved in the
|
|
pkgsrc tree, so don't forget to rescue them before updating. You can also
|
|
configure pkgsrc to use other than the default directories by setting the
|
|
DISTDIR and PACKAGES variables. See Chapter 5, Configuring pkgsrc for the
|
|
details.
|
|
|
|
To update pkgsrc from a tar file, download the tar file as explained above.
|
|
Then, make sure that you have not made any changes to the files in the pkgsrc
|
|
directory. Remove the pkgsrc directory and extract the new tar file. Done.
|
|
|
|
2.2.2. Via CVS
|
|
|
|
To update pkgsrc via CVS, make sure the environment variable CVS_RSH is set as
|
|
above. Then, change to the pkgsrc directory and run cvs:
|
|
|
|
$ cd /usr/pkgsrc
|
|
$ cvs update -dP
|
|
|
|
2.2.2.1. Switching between different pkgsrc branches
|
|
|
|
When updating pkgsrc, the CVS program keeps track of the branch you selected.
|
|
But if you, for whatever reason, want to switch from the stable branch to the
|
|
current one, you can do it by adding the option "-A" after the "update"
|
|
keyword. To switch from the current branch back to the stable branch, add the
|
|
"-rpkgsrc-2007Q4" option.
|
|
|
|
2.2.2.2. What happens to my changes when updating?
|
|
|
|
When you update pkgsrc, the CVS program will only touch those files that are
|
|
registered in the CVS repository. That means that any packages that you created
|
|
on your own will stay unmodified. If you change files that are managed by CVS,
|
|
later updates will try to merge your changes with those that have been done by
|
|
others. See the CVS manual, chapter "update" for details.
|
|
|
|
Chapter 3. Using pkgsrc on systems other than NetBSD
|
|
|
|
Table of Contents
|
|
|
|
3.1. Binary distribution
|
|
3.2. Bootstrapping pkgsrc
|
|
3.3. Platform-specific notes
|
|
|
|
3.3.1. Darwin (Mac OS X)
|
|
3.3.2. FreeBSD
|
|
3.3.3. Interix
|
|
3.3.4. IRIX
|
|
3.3.5. Linux
|
|
3.3.6. OpenBSD
|
|
3.3.7. Solaris
|
|
|
|
3.1. Binary distribution
|
|
|
|
See Section 4.1, "Using binary packages".
|
|
|
|
3.2. Bootstrapping pkgsrc
|
|
|
|
Installing the bootstrap kit from source should be as simple as:
|
|
|
|
# env CVS_RSH=ssh cvs -d anoncvs@anoncvs.NetBSD.org:/cvsroot checkout pkgsrc
|
|
# cd pkgsrc/bootstrap
|
|
# ./bootstrap
|
|
|
|
|
|
See Chapter 2, Where to get pkgsrc and how to keep it up-to-date for other ways
|
|
to get pkgsrc before bootstrapping. The given bootstrap command will use the
|
|
defaults of /usr/pkg for the prefix where programs will be installed in, and /
|
|
var/db/pkg for the package database directory where pkgsrc will do its internal
|
|
bookkeeping. However, these can also be set using command-line arguments.
|
|
|
|
Note
|
|
|
|
The bootstrap installs a bmake tool. Use this bmake when building via pkgsrc.
|
|
For examples in this guide, use bmake instead of "make".
|
|
|
|
3.3. Platform-specific notes
|
|
|
|
Here are some platform-specific notes you should be aware of.
|
|
|
|
3.3.1. Darwin (Mac OS X)
|
|
|
|
Darwin 5.x and up are supported. There are two methods of using pkgsrc on Mac
|
|
OS X, by using a disk image, or a UFS or HFSX partition.
|
|
|
|
Before you start, you will need to download and install the Mac OS X Developer
|
|
Tools from Apple's Developer Connection. See http://developer.apple.com/macosx/
|
|
for details. Also, make sure you install X11 for Mac OS X and the X11 SDK from
|
|
http://www.apple.com/macosx/x11/download/ if you intend to build packages that
|
|
use the X11 Window System.
|
|
|
|
If you already have a UFS or HFSX partition, or have a spare partition that you
|
|
can format as UFS or HFSX, it is recommended to use that instead of the disk
|
|
image. It'll be somewhat faster and will mount automatically at boot time,
|
|
where you must manually mount a disk image.
|
|
|
|
Note
|
|
|
|
You cannot use an ordinary HFS+ file system for pkgsrc, because pkgsrc
|
|
currently requires the file system to be case-sensitive. You can, however, use
|
|
a case-sensitive HFS+ (aka HFSX) file system as found in Darwin 7.0 and newer.
|
|
|
|
3.3.1.1. Using a disk image
|
|
|
|
Create the disk image:
|
|
|
|
# cd pkgsrc/bootstrap
|
|
# ./darwindiskimage create ~/Documents/NetBSD 1024 # megabytes - season to taste
|
|
# ./darwindiskimage mount ~/Documents/NetBSD
|
|
# sudo chown `id -u`:`id -g` /Volumes/NetBSD
|
|
|
|
Note
|
|
|
|
darwindiskimage will mount the filesystem nosuid, which will cause problems for
|
|
packages that depend on setgid. In the case of UFS, it will also mount the
|
|
filesystem asynchronous, which is somewhat dangerous according to the mount(8)
|
|
man page. In the case of HFSX, it will disable journaling.
|
|
|
|
Allow suid:
|
|
|
|
# sudo mount -u -o suid /Volumes/NetBSD
|
|
|
|
Changing the build directory:
|
|
|
|
After bootstrapping you need to change the default package build directory to
|
|
somewhere outside the disk image so it doesn't get filled up in the process of
|
|
building packages. Add something like that to mk.conf.
|
|
|
|
WRKOBJDIR?= /tmp/pkgsrc # build here instead of in pkgsrc
|
|
|
|
|
|
3.3.1.2. Using a UFS or HFSX partition
|
|
|
|
By default, /usr will be on your root file system, normally HFS+. It is
|
|
possible to use the default prefix of /usr/pkg by symlinking /usr/pkg to a
|
|
directory on a UFS or HFSX file system. Obviously, another symlink is required
|
|
if you want to place the package database directory outside the prefix. e.g.
|
|
|
|
# ./bootstrap --pkgdbdir /usr/pkg/pkgdb
|
|
|
|
If you created your partitions at the time of installing Mac OS X and formatted
|
|
the target partition as UFS or HFSX, it should automatically mount on /Volumes/
|
|
<volume name> when the machine boots. If you are (re)formatting a partition as
|
|
UFS or HFSX, you need to ensure that the partition map correctly reflects
|
|
"Apple_UFS" or "Apple_HFSX" and not "Apple_HFS".
|
|
|
|
The problem is that none of the disk tools will let you touch a disk that is
|
|
booted from. You can unmount the partition, but even if you newfs it, the
|
|
partition type will be incorrect and the automounter won't mount it. It can be
|
|
mounted manually, but it won't appear in Finder.
|
|
|
|
You'll need to boot off of the OS X Installation (User) CD. When the
|
|
Installation program starts, go up to the menu and select Disk Utility. Now,
|
|
you will be able to select the partition you want to be UFS or HFSX, and Format
|
|
it Apple UFS or HFSX. Quit the Disk Utility, quit the installer which will
|
|
reboot your machine. The new UFS or HFSX file system will appear in Finder.
|
|
|
|
Be aware that the permissions on the new file system will be writable by root
|
|
only.
|
|
|
|
This note is as of 10.2 (Jaguar) and applies to earlier versions. Hopefully
|
|
Apple will fix Disk Utility in 10.3 (Panther).
|
|
|
|
3.3.2. FreeBSD
|
|
|
|
FreeBSD 4.7 and 5.0 have been tested and are supported, other versions may
|
|
work.
|
|
|
|
Care should be taken so that the tools that this kit installs do not conflict
|
|
with the FreeBSD userland tools. There are several steps:
|
|
|
|
1. FreeBSD stores its ports pkg database in /var/db/pkg. It is therefore
|
|
recommended that you choose a different location (e.g. /usr/pkgdb) by using
|
|
the --pkgdbdir option to the bootstrap script.
|
|
|
|
2. If you do not intend to use the FreeBSD ports tools, it's probably a good
|
|
idea to move them out of the way to avoid confusion, e.g.
|
|
|
|
# cd /usr/sbin
|
|
# mv pkg_add pkg_add.orig
|
|
# mv pkg_create pkg_create.orig
|
|
# mv pkg_delete pkg_delete.orig
|
|
# mv pkg_info pkg_info.orig
|
|
|
|
|
|
3. An example mk.conf file will be placed in /etc/mk.conf.example file when
|
|
you use the bootstrap script.
|
|
|
|
3.3.3. Interix
|
|
|
|
Interix is a POSIX-compatible subsystem for the Windows NT kernel, providing a
|
|
Unix-like environment with a tighter kernel integration than available with
|
|
Cygwin. It is part of the Windows Services for Unix package, available for free
|
|
for any licensed copy of Windows 2000, XP (not including XP Home), or 2003. SFU
|
|
can be downloaded from http://www.microsoft.com/windows/sfu/.
|
|
|
|
Services for Unix 3.5 has been tested. 3.0 or 3.1 may work, but are not
|
|
officially supported. (The main difference in 3.0/3.1 is lack of pthreads, but
|
|
other parts of libc may also be lacking.)
|
|
|
|
Services for Unix Applications (aka SUA) is an integrated component of Windows
|
|
Server 2003 R2 and Windows Vista. As of this writing, SUA's Interix 5.x
|
|
subsystem has not yet been tested with pkgsrc.
|
|
|
|
3.3.3.1. When installing Interix/SFU
|
|
|
|
At an absolute minimum, the following packages must be installed from the
|
|
Windows Services for Unix 3.5 distribution in order to use pkgsrc:
|
|
|
|
* Utilities -> Base Utilities
|
|
|
|
* Interix GNU Components -> (all)
|
|
|
|
* Remote Connectivity
|
|
|
|
* Interix SDK
|
|
|
|
When using pkgsrc on Interix, DO NOT install the Utilities subcomponent "UNIX
|
|
Perl". That is Perl 5.6 without shared module support, installed to /usr/local,
|
|
and will only cause confusion. Instead, install Perl 5.8 from pkgsrc (or from a
|
|
binary package).
|
|
|
|
The Remote Connectivity subcomponent "Windows Remote Shell Service" does not
|
|
need to be installed, but Remote Connectivity itself should be installed in
|
|
order to have a working inetd.
|
|
|
|
During installation you may be asked whether to enable setuid behavior for
|
|
Interix programs, and whether to make pathnames default to case-sensitive.
|
|
Setuid should be enabled, and case-sensitivity MUST be enabled. (Without
|
|
case-sensitivity, a large number of packages including perl will not build.)
|
|
|
|
NOTE: Newer Windows service packs change the way binary execution works (via
|
|
the Data Execution Prevention feature). In order to use pkgsrc and other
|
|
gcc-compiled binaries reliably, a hotfix containing POSIX.EXE, PSXDLL.DLL,
|
|
PSXRUN.EXE, and PSXSS.EXE (899522 or newer) must be installed. Hotfixes are
|
|
available from Microsoft through a support contract; however, Debian Interix
|
|
Port has made most Interix hotfixes available for personal use from http://
|
|
www.debian-interix.net/hotfixes/.
|
|
|
|
In addition to the hotfix noted above, it may be necessary to disable Data
|
|
Execution Prevention entirely to make Interix functional. This may happen only
|
|
with certain types of CPUs; the cause is not fully understood at this time. If
|
|
gcc or other applications still segfault repeatedly after installing one of the
|
|
hotfixes note above, the following option can be added to the appropriate
|
|
"boot.ini" line on the Windows boot drive: /NoExecute=AlwaysOff (WARNING, this
|
|
will disable DEP completely, which may be a security risk if applications are
|
|
often run as a user in the Administrators group!)
|
|
|
|
3.3.3.2. What to do if Interix/SFU is already installed
|
|
|
|
If SFU is already installed and you wish to alter these settings to work with
|
|
pkgsrc, note the following things.
|
|
|
|
* To uninstall UNIX Perl, use Add/Remove Programs, select Microsoft Windows
|
|
Services for UNIX, then click Change. In the installer, choose Add or
|
|
Remove, then uncheck Utilities->UNIX Perl.
|
|
|
|
* To enable case-sensitivity for the file system, run REGEDIT.EXE, and change
|
|
the following registry key:
|
|
|
|
HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE\SYSTEM\CurrentControlSet\Control\Session Manager\kernel
|
|
|
|
Set the DWORD value "obcaseinsensitive" to 0; then reboot.
|
|
|
|
* To enable setuid binaries (optional), run REGEDIT.EXE, and change the
|
|
following registry key:
|
|
|
|
HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE\SOFTWARE\Microsoft\Services for UNIX
|
|
|
|
Set the DWORD value "EnableSetuidBinaries" to 1; then reboot.
|
|
|
|
3.3.3.3. Important notes for using pkgsrc
|
|
|
|
The package manager (either the pkgsrc "su" user, or the user running
|
|
"pkg_add") must be a member of the local Administrators group. Such a user must
|
|
also be used to run the bootstrap. This is slightly relaxed from the normal
|
|
pkgsrc requirement of "root".
|
|
|
|
The package manager should use a umask of 002. "make install" will
|
|
automatically complain if this is not the case. This ensures that directories
|
|
written in /var/db/pkg are Administrators-group writeable.
|
|
|
|
The popular Interix binary packages from http://www.interopsystems.com/ use an
|
|
older version of pkgsrc's pkg_* tools. Ideally, these should NOT be used in
|
|
conjunction with pkgsrc. If you choose to use them at the same time as the
|
|
pkgsrc packages, ensure that you use the proper pkg_* tools for each type of
|
|
binary package.
|
|
|
|
The TERM setting used for DOS-type console windows (including those invoked by
|
|
the csh and ksh startup shortcuts) is "interix". Most systems don't have a
|
|
termcap/terminfo entry for it, but the following .termcap entry provides
|
|
adequate emulation in most cases:
|
|
|
|
interix:kP=\E[S:kN=\E[T:kH=\E[U:dc@:DC@:tc=pcansi:
|
|
|
|
|
|
3.3.3.4. Limitations of the Interix platform
|
|
|
|
Though Interix suffices as a familiar and flexible substitute for a full
|
|
Unix-like platform, it has some drawbacks that should be noted for those
|
|
desiring to make the most of Interix.
|
|
|
|
* X11:
|
|
|
|
Interix comes with the standard set of X11R6 client libraries, and can run
|
|
X11 based applications, but it does not come with an X server. Some options
|
|
are StarNet X-Win32, Hummingbird Exceed (available in a trimmed version for
|
|
Interix from Interop Systems as the Interop X Server), and the free X11
|
|
server included with Cygwin.
|
|
|
|
* X11 acceleration:
|
|
|
|
Because Interix runs in a completely different NT subsystem from Win32
|
|
applications, it does not currently support various X11 protocol extensions
|
|
for acceleration (such as MIT-SHM or DGA). Most interactive applications to
|
|
a local X server will run reasonably fast, but full motion video and other
|
|
graphics intensive applications may require a faster-than-expected CPU.
|
|
|
|
* Audio:
|
|
|
|
Interix has no native support for audio output. For audio support, pkgsrc
|
|
uses the esound client/server audio system on Interix. Unlike on most
|
|
platforms, the audio/esound package does not contain the esd server
|
|
component. To output audio via an Interix host, the emulators/cygwin_esound
|
|
package must also be installed.
|
|
|
|
* CD/DVDs, USB, and SCSI:
|
|
|
|
Direct device access is not currently supported in Interix, so it is not
|
|
currently possible to access CD/DVD drives, USB devices, or SCSI devices
|
|
through non-filesystem means. Among other things, this makes it impossible
|
|
to use Interix directly for CD/DVD burning.
|
|
|
|
* Tape drives:
|
|
|
|
Due to the same limitations as for CD-ROMs and SCSI devices, tape drives
|
|
are also not directly accessible in Interix. However, support is in work to
|
|
make tape drive access possible by using Cygwin as a bridge (similarly to
|
|
audio bridged via Cygwin's esound server).
|
|
|
|
3.3.3.5. Known issues for pkgsrc on Interix
|
|
|
|
It is not necessary, in general, to have a "root" user on the Windows system;
|
|
any member of the local Administrators group will suffice. However, some
|
|
packages currently assume that the user named "root" is the privileged user. To
|
|
accommodate these, you may create such a user; make sure it is in the local
|
|
group Administrators (or your language equivalent).
|
|
|
|
pkg_add creates directories of mode 0755, not 0775, in $PKG_DBDIR. For the time
|
|
being, install packages as the local Administrator (or your language
|
|
equivalent), or run the following command after installing a package to work
|
|
around the issue:
|
|
|
|
# chmod -R g+w $PKG_DBDIR
|
|
|
|
|
|
3.3.4. IRIX
|
|
|
|
You will need a working C compiler, either gcc or SGI's MIPS and MIPSpro
|
|
compiler (cc/c89). Please set the CC environment variable according to your
|
|
preference. If you do not have a license for the MIPSpro compiler suite, you
|
|
can download a gcc tardist file from http://freeware.sgi.com/.
|
|
|
|
Please note that you will need IRIX 6.5.17 or higher, as this is the earliest
|
|
version of IRIX providing support for if_indextoname(3), if_nametoindex(3),
|
|
etc.
|
|
|
|
At this point in time, pkgsrc only supports one ABI at a time. That is, you
|
|
cannot switch between the old 32-bit ABI, the new 32-bit ABI and the 64-bit
|
|
ABI. If you start out using "abi=n32", that's what all your packages will be
|
|
built with.
|
|
|
|
Therefore, please make sure that you have no conflicting CFLAGS in your
|
|
environment or the mk.conf. Particularly, make sure that you do not try to link
|
|
n32 object files with lib64 or vice versa. Check your /etc/compiler.defaults!
|
|
|
|
If you have the actual pkgsrc tree mounted via NFS from a different host,
|
|
please make sure to set WRKOBJDIR to a local directory, as it appears that IRIX
|
|
linker occasionally runs into issues when trying to link over a network-mounted
|
|
file system.
|
|
|
|
The bootstrapping process should set all the right options for programs such as
|
|
imake(1), but you may want to set some options depending on your local setup.
|
|
Please see pkgsrc/mk/defaults/mk.conf and, of course, your compiler's man pages
|
|
for details.
|
|
|
|
If you are using SGI's MIPSPro compiler, please set
|
|
|
|
PKGSRC_COMPILER= mipspro
|
|
|
|
|
|
in mk.conf. Otherwise, pkgsrc will assume you are using gcc and may end up
|
|
passing invalid flags to the compiler. Note that bootstrap should create an
|
|
appropriate mk.conf.example by default.
|
|
|
|
If you have both the MIPSPro compiler chain installed as well as gcc, but want
|
|
to make sure that MIPSPro is used, please set your PATH to not include the
|
|
location of gcc (often /usr/freeware/bin), and (important) pass the
|
|
'--preserve-path' flag.
|
|
|
|
3.3.5. Linux
|
|
|
|
Some versions of Linux (for example Debian GNU/Linux) need either libtermcap or
|
|
libcurses (libncurses). Installing the distributions libncurses-dev package (or
|
|
equivalent) should fix the problem.
|
|
|
|
pkgsrc supports both gcc (GNU Compiler Collection) and icc (Intel C++
|
|
Compiler). gcc is the default. icc 8.0 and 8.1 on i386 have been tested.
|
|
|
|
To bootstrap using icc, assuming the default icc installation directory:
|
|
|
|
env CC=/opt/intel_cc_80/bin/icc LDFLAGS=-static-libcxa \
|
|
ac_cv___attribute__=yes ./bootstrap
|
|
|
|
|
|
Note
|
|
|
|
icc 8.1 needs the `-i-static' argument instead of -static-libcxa.
|
|
|
|
icc supports __attribute__, but the GNU configure test uses a nested function,
|
|
which icc does not support. #undef'ing __attribute__ has the unfortunate
|
|
side-effect of breaking many of the Linux header files, which cannot be
|
|
compiled properly without __attribute__. The test must be overridden so that
|
|
__attribute__ is assumed supported by the compiler.
|
|
|
|
After bootstrapping, you should set PKGSRC_COMPILER in mk.conf:
|
|
|
|
PKGSRC_COMPILER= icc
|
|
|
|
|
|
The default installation directory for icc is /opt/intel_cc_80, which is also
|
|
the pkgsrc default. If you have installed it into a different directory, set
|
|
ICCBASE in mk.conf:
|
|
|
|
ICCBASE= /opt/icc
|
|
|
|
|
|
pkgsrc uses the static linking method of the runtime libraries provided by icc,
|
|
so binaries can be run on other systems which do not have the shared libraries
|
|
installed.
|
|
|
|
Libtool, however, extracts a list of libraries from the ld(1) command run when
|
|
linking a C++ shared library and records it, throwing away the -Bstatic and
|
|
-Bdynamic options interspersed between the libraries. This means that
|
|
libtool-linked C++ shared libraries will have a runtime dependency on the icc
|
|
libraries until this is fixed in libtool.
|
|
|
|
3.3.6. OpenBSD
|
|
|
|
OpenBSD 3.0 and 3.2 are tested and supported.
|
|
|
|
Care should be taken so that the tools that this kit installs do not conflict
|
|
with the OpenBSD userland tools. There are several steps:
|
|
|
|
1. OpenBSD stores its ports pkg database in /var/db/pkg. It is therefore
|
|
recommended that you choose a different location (e.g. /usr/pkgdb) by using
|
|
the --pkgdbdir option to the bootstrap script.
|
|
|
|
2. If you do not intend to use the OpenBSD ports tools, it's probably a good
|
|
idea to move them out of the way to avoid confusion, e.g.
|
|
|
|
# cd /usr/sbin
|
|
# mv pkg_add pkg_add.orig
|
|
# mv pkg_create pkg_create.orig
|
|
# mv pkg_delete pkg_delete.orig
|
|
# mv pkg_info pkg_info.orig
|
|
|
|
|
|
3. An example mk.conf file will be placed in /etc/mk.conf.example file when
|
|
you use the bootstrap script. OpenBSD's make program uses mk.conf as well.
|
|
You can work around this by enclosing all the pkgsrc-specific parts of the
|
|
file with:
|
|
|
|
.ifdef BSD_PKG_MK
|
|
# pkgsrc stuff, e.g. insert defaults/mk.conf or similar here
|
|
.else
|
|
# OpenBSD stuff
|
|
.endif
|
|
|
|
|
|
3.3.7. Solaris
|
|
|
|
Solaris 2.6 through 9 are supported on both x86 and sparc. You will need a
|
|
working C compiler. Both gcc 2.95.3 and Sun WorkShop 5 have been tested.
|
|
|
|
The following packages are required on Solaris 8 for the bootstrap process and
|
|
to build packages.
|
|
|
|
* SUNWsprot
|
|
|
|
* SUNWarc
|
|
|
|
* SUNWbtool
|
|
|
|
* SUNWtoo
|
|
|
|
* SUNWlibm
|
|
|
|
Please note that the use of GNU binutils on Solaris is not supported, as of
|
|
June 2006.
|
|
|
|
Whichever compiler you use, please ensure the compiler tools and your $prefix
|
|
are in your PATH. This includes /usr/ccs/{bin,lib} and e.g. /usr/pkg/
|
|
{bin,sbin}.
|
|
|
|
3.3.7.1. If you are using gcc
|
|
|
|
It makes life much simpler if you only use the same gcc consistently for
|
|
building all packages.
|
|
|
|
It is recommended that an external gcc be used only for bootstrapping, then
|
|
either build gcc from lang/gcc or install a binary gcc package, then remove gcc
|
|
used during bootstrapping.
|
|
|
|
Binary packages of gcc can be found through http://www.sunfreeware.com/.
|
|
|
|
3.3.7.2. If you are using Sun WorkShop
|
|
|
|
You will need at least the following packages installed (from WorkShop 5.0)
|
|
|
|
* SPROcc - Sun WorkShop Compiler C 5.0
|
|
|
|
* SPROcpl - Sun WorkShop Compiler C++ 5.0
|
|
|
|
* SPROild - Sun WorkShop Incremental Linker
|
|
|
|
* SPROlang - Sun WorkShop Compilers common components
|
|
|
|
You should set the following variables in your mk.conf file:
|
|
|
|
CC= cc
|
|
CXX= CC
|
|
CPP= cc -E
|
|
CXXCPP= CC -E
|
|
|
|
Note
|
|
|
|
The CPP setting might break some packages that use the C preprocessor for
|
|
processing things other than C source code.
|
|
|
|
3.3.7.3. Building 64-bit binaries with SunPro
|
|
|
|
To build 64-bit packages, you just need to have the following lines in your
|
|
mk.conf file:
|
|
|
|
PKGSRC_COMPILER= sunpro
|
|
ABI= 64
|
|
|
|
Note
|
|
|
|
This setting has been tested for the SPARC architecture. Intel and AMD machines
|
|
need some more work.
|
|
|
|
3.3.7.4. Common problems
|
|
|
|
Sometimes, when using libtool, /bin/ksh crashes with a segmentation fault. The
|
|
workaround is to use another shell for the configure scripts, for example by
|
|
installing shells/bash and adding the following lines to your mk.conf:
|
|
|
|
CONFIG_SHELL= ${LOCALBASE}/bin/bash
|
|
WRAPPER_SHELL= ${LOCALBASE}/bin/bash
|
|
|
|
|
|
Then, rebuild the devel/libtool-base package.
|
|
|
|
Chapter 4. Using pkgsrc
|
|
|
|
Table of Contents
|
|
|
|
4.1. Using binary packages
|
|
|
|
4.1.1. Finding binary packages
|
|
4.1.2. Installing binary packages
|
|
4.1.3. Deinstalling packages
|
|
4.1.4. Getting information about installed packages
|
|
4.1.5. Checking for security vulnerabilities in installed packages
|
|
4.1.6. Finding if newer versions of your installed packages are in pkgsrc
|
|
4.1.7. Other administrative functions
|
|
4.1.8. A word of warning
|
|
|
|
4.2. Building packages from source
|
|
|
|
4.2.1. Requirements
|
|
4.2.2. Fetching distfiles
|
|
4.2.3. How to build and install
|
|
|
|
Basically, there are two ways of using pkgsrc. The first is to only install the
|
|
package tools and to use binary packages that someone else has prepared. This
|
|
is the "pkg" in pkgsrc. The second way is to install the "src" of pkgsrc, too.
|
|
Then you are able to build your own packages, and you can still use binary
|
|
packages from someone else.
|
|
|
|
4.1. Using binary packages
|
|
|
|
On the ftp.NetBSD.org server and its mirrors, there are collections of binary
|
|
packages, ready to be installed. These binary packages have been built using
|
|
the default settings for the directories, that is:
|
|
|
|
* /usr/pkg for LOCALBASE, where most of the files are installed,
|
|
|
|
* /usr/pkg/etc for configuration files,
|
|
|
|
* /var for VARBASE, where those files are installed that may change after
|
|
installation.
|
|
|
|
If you cannot use these directories for whatever reasons (maybe because you're
|
|
not root), you cannot use these binary packages, but have to build the packages
|
|
yourself, which is explained in Section 3.2, "Bootstrapping pkgsrc".
|
|
|
|
4.1.1. Finding binary packages
|
|
|
|
To install binary packages, you first need to know from where to get them. The
|
|
first place where you should look is on the main pkgsrc FTP server in the
|
|
directory /pub/pkgsrc/packages.
|
|
|
|
This directory contains binary packages for multiple platforms. First, select
|
|
your operating system. (Ignore the directories with version numbers attached to
|
|
it, they just exist for legacy reasons.) Then, select your hardware
|
|
architecture, and in the third step, the OS version and the "version" of
|
|
pkgsrc.
|
|
|
|
In this directory, you often find a file called bootstrap.tar.gz which contains
|
|
the package management tools. If the file is missing, it is likely that your
|
|
operating system already provides those tools. Download the file and extract it
|
|
in the / directory. It will create the directories /usr/pkg (containing the
|
|
tools for managing binary packages) and /var/db/pkg (the database of installed
|
|
packages).
|
|
|
|
4.1.2. Installing binary packages
|
|
|
|
In the directory from the last section, there is a subdirectory called All,
|
|
which contains all the binary packages that are available for the platform,
|
|
excluding those that may not be distributed via FTP or CDROM (depending on
|
|
which medium you are using), and the ones that have vulnerabilities and
|
|
therefore are considered insecure to install without thinking before.
|
|
|
|
To install packages directly from an FTP or HTTP server, run the following
|
|
commands in a Bourne-compatible shell (be sure to su to root first):
|
|
|
|
# PATH="/usr/pkg/sbin:$PATH"
|
|
# PKG_PATH="ftp://ftp.NetBSD.org/pub/pkgsrc/packages/OPSYS/ARCH/VERSIONS/All"
|
|
# export PATH PKG_PATH
|
|
|
|
Instead of URLs, you can also use local paths, for example if you are
|
|
installing from a set of CDROMs, DVDs or an NFS-mounted repository. If you want
|
|
to install packages from multiple sources, you can separate them by a semicolon
|
|
in PKG_PATH.
|
|
|
|
After these preparations, installing a package is very easy:
|
|
|
|
# pkg_add openoffice2
|
|
# pkg_add kde-3.5.7
|
|
# pkg_add ap2-php5-*
|
|
|
|
Note that any prerequisite packages needed to run the package in question will
|
|
be installed, too, assuming they are present where you install from.
|
|
|
|
As mentioned above, packages for which vulnerabilities get known are not stored
|
|
in the All subdirectory. They don't get deleted since that could be very
|
|
frustrating if many other packages depend on it. Instead, they are moved to the
|
|
vulnerable subdirectory. So you may need to add this directory to the PKG_PATH
|
|
variable. However, you should run audit-packages regularly, especially after
|
|
installing new packages, and verify that the vulnerabilities are acceptable for
|
|
your configuration.
|
|
|
|
After you've installed packages, be sure to have /usr/pkg/bin and /usr/pkg/sbin
|
|
in your PATH so you can actually start the just installed program.
|
|
|
|
4.1.3. Deinstalling packages
|
|
|
|
To deinstall a package, it does not matter whether it was installed from source
|
|
code or from a binary package. The pkg_delete command does not know it anyway.
|
|
To delete a package, you can just run pkg_delete package-name. The package name
|
|
can be given with or without version number. Wildcards can also be used to
|
|
deinstall a set of packages, for example *emacs*. Be sure to include them in
|
|
quotes, so that the shell does not expand them before pkg_delete sees them.
|
|
|
|
The -r option is very powerful: it removes all the packages that require the
|
|
package in question and then removes the package itself. For example:
|
|
|
|
# pkg_delete -r jpeg
|
|
|
|
|
|
will remove jpeg and all the packages that used it; this allows upgrading the
|
|
jpeg package.
|
|
|
|
4.1.4. Getting information about installed packages
|
|
|
|
The pkg_info shows information about installed packages or binary package
|
|
files.
|
|
|
|
4.1.5. Checking for security vulnerabilities in installed packages
|
|
|
|
The NetBSD Security-Officer and Packages Groups maintain a list of known
|
|
security vulnerabilities to packages which are (or have been) included in
|
|
pkgsrc. The list is available from the NetBSD FTP site at ftp://ftp.NetBSD.org/
|
|
pub/pkgsrc/distfiles/vulnerabilities.
|
|
|
|
Through security/audit-packages, this list can be downloaded automatically, and
|
|
a security audit of all packages installed on a system can take place.
|
|
|
|
There are two components to security/audit-packages. The first component,
|
|
"download-vulnerability-list", is for downloading the list of vulnerabilities
|
|
from the NetBSD FTP site. The second component, "audit-packages", checks to see
|
|
if any of your installed packages are vulnerable. If a package is vulnerable,
|
|
you will see output similar to the following:
|
|
|
|
Package samba-2.0.9 has a local-root-shell vulnerability, see
|
|
http://www.samba.org/samba/whatsnew/macroexploit.html
|
|
|
|
One can set up security/audit-packages to download the vulnerabilities file
|
|
daily, and include a package audit in the daily security script. Details on
|
|
this are located in the MESSAGE file for security/audit-packages.
|
|
|
|
4.1.6. Finding if newer versions of your installed packages are in pkgsrc
|
|
|
|
Install pkgtools/lintpkgsrc and run lintpkgsrc with the "-i" argument to check
|
|
if your packages are up-to-date, e.g.
|
|
|
|
% lintpkgsrc -i
|
|
...
|
|
Version mismatch: 'tcsh' 6.09.00 vs 6.10.00
|
|
|
|
|
|
You can then use make update to update the package on your system and rebuild
|
|
any dependencies.
|
|
|
|
4.1.7. Other administrative functions
|
|
|
|
The pkg_admin executes various administrative functions on the package system.
|
|
|
|
4.1.8. A word of warning
|
|
|
|
Please pay very careful attention to the warnings expressed in the pkg_add(1)
|
|
manual page about the inherent dangers of installing binary packages which you
|
|
did not create yourself, and the security holes that can be introduced onto
|
|
your system by indiscriminate adding of such files.
|
|
|
|
The same warning of course applies to every package you install from source
|
|
when you haven't completely read and understood the source code of the package,
|
|
the compiler that is used to build the package and all the other tools that are
|
|
involved.
|
|
|
|
4.2. Building packages from source
|
|
|
|
After obtaining pkgsrc, the pkgsrc directory now contains a set of packages,
|
|
organized into categories. You can browse the online index of packages, or run
|
|
make readme from the pkgsrc directory to build local README.html files for all
|
|
packages, viewable with any web browser such as www/lynx or www/firefox.
|
|
|
|
The default prefix for installed packages is /usr/pkg. If you wish to change
|
|
this, you should do so by setting LOCALBASE in mk.conf. You should not try to
|
|
use multiple different LOCALBASE definitions on the same system (inside a
|
|
chroot is an exception).
|
|
|
|
The rest of this chapter assumes that the package is already in pkgsrc. If it
|
|
is not, see Part II, "The pkgsrc developer's guide" for instructions how to
|
|
create your own packages.
|
|
|
|
4.2.1. Requirements
|
|
|
|
To build packages from source, you need a working C compiler. On NetBSD, you
|
|
need to install the "comp" and the "text" distribution sets. If you want to
|
|
build X11-related packages, the "xbase" and "xcomp" distribution sets are
|
|
required, too.
|
|
|
|
4.2.2. Fetching distfiles
|
|
|
|
The first step for building a package is downloading the distfiles (i.e. the
|
|
unmodified source). If they have not yet been downloaded, pkgsrc will fetch
|
|
them automatically.
|
|
|
|
If you have all files that you need in the distfiles directory, you don't need
|
|
to connect. If the distfiles are on CD-ROM, you can mount the CD-ROM on /cdrom
|
|
and add:
|
|
|
|
DISTDIR=/cdrom/pkgsrc/distfiles
|
|
|
|
to your mk.conf.
|
|
|
|
By default a list of distribution sites will be randomly intermixed to prevent
|
|
huge load on servers which holding popular packages (for example,
|
|
SourceForge.net mirrors). Thus, every time when you need to fetch yet another
|
|
distfile all the mirrors will be tried in new (random) order. You can turn this
|
|
feature off by setting MASTER_SORT_RANDOM=NO (for PKG_DEVELOPERs it's already
|
|
disabled).
|
|
|
|
You can overwrite some of the major distribution sites to fit to sites that are
|
|
close to your own. By setting one or two variables you can modify the order in
|
|
which the master sites are accessed. MASTER_SORT contains a whitespace
|
|
delimited list of domain suffixes. MASTER_SORT_REGEX is even more flexible, it
|
|
contains a whitespace delimited list of regular expressions. It has higher
|
|
priority than MASTER_SORT. Have a look at pkgsrc/mk/defaults/mk.conf to find
|
|
some examples. This may save some of your bandwidth and time.
|
|
|
|
You can change these settings either in your shell's environment, or, if you
|
|
want to keep the settings, by editing the mk.conf file, and adding the
|
|
definitions there.
|
|
|
|
If a package depends on many other packages (such as meta-pkgs/kde3), the build
|
|
process may alternate between periods of downloading source, and compiling. To
|
|
ensure you have all the source downloaded initially you can run the command:
|
|
|
|
% make fetch-list | sh
|
|
|
|
which will output and run a set of shell commands to fetch the necessary files
|
|
into the distfiles directory. You can also choose to download the files
|
|
manually.
|
|
|
|
4.2.3. How to build and install
|
|
|
|
Once the software has downloaded, any patches will be applied, then it will be
|
|
compiled for you. This may take some time depending on your computer, and how
|
|
many other packages the software depends on and their compile time.
|
|
|
|
Note
|
|
|
|
If using bootstrap or pkgsrc on a non-NetBSD system, use the pkgsrc bmake
|
|
command instead of "make" in the examples in this guide.
|
|
|
|
For example, type
|
|
|
|
% cd misc/figlet
|
|
% make
|
|
|
|
|
|
at the shell prompt to build the various components of the package.
|
|
|
|
The next stage is to actually install the newly compiled program onto your
|
|
system. Do this by entering:
|
|
|
|
% make install
|
|
|
|
|
|
while you are still in the directory for whatever package you are installing.
|
|
|
|
Installing the package on your system may require you to be root. However,
|
|
pkgsrc has a just-in-time-su feature, which allows you to only become root for
|
|
the actual installation step.
|
|
|
|
That's it, the software should now be installed and setup for use. You can now
|
|
enter:
|
|
|
|
% make clean
|
|
|
|
|
|
to remove the compiled files in the work directory, as you shouldn't need them
|
|
any more. If other packages were also added to your system (dependencies) to
|
|
allow your program to compile, you can tidy these up also with the command:
|
|
|
|
% make clean-depends
|
|
|
|
|
|
Taking the figlet utility as an example, we can install it on our system by
|
|
building as shown in Appendix B, Build logs.
|
|
|
|
The program is installed under the default root of the packages tree - /usr/
|
|
pkg. Should this not conform to your tastes, set the LOCALBASE variable in your
|
|
environment, and it will use that value as the root of your packages tree. So,
|
|
to use /usr/local, set LOCALBASE=/usr/local in your environment. Please note
|
|
that you should use a directory which is dedicated to packages and not shared
|
|
with other programs (i.e., do not try and use LOCALBASE=/usr). Also, you should
|
|
not try to add any of your own files or directories (such as src/, obj/, or
|
|
pkgsrc/) below the LOCALBASE tree. This is to prevent possible conflicts
|
|
between programs and other files installed by the package system and whatever
|
|
else may have been installed there.
|
|
|
|
Some packages look in mk.conf to alter some configuration options at build
|
|
time. Have a look at pkgsrc/mk/defaults/mk.conf to get an overview of what will
|
|
be set there by default. Environment variables such as LOCALBASE can be set in
|
|
mk.conf to save having to remember to set them each time you want to use
|
|
pkgsrc.
|
|
|
|
Occasionally, people want to "look under the covers" to see what is going on
|
|
when a package is building or being installed. This may be for debugging
|
|
purposes, or out of simple curiosity. A number of utility values have been
|
|
added to help with this.
|
|
|
|
1. If you invoke the make(1) command with PKG_DEBUG_LEVEL=2, then a huge
|
|
amount of information will be displayed. For example,
|
|
|
|
make patch PKG_DEBUG_LEVEL=2
|
|
|
|
will show all the commands that are invoked, up to and including the
|
|
"patch" stage.
|
|
|
|
2. If you want to know the value of a certain make(1) definition, then the
|
|
VARNAME definition should be used, in conjunction with the show-var target.
|
|
e.g. to show the expansion of the make(1) variable LOCALBASE:
|
|
|
|
% make show-var VARNAME=LOCALBASE
|
|
/usr/pkg
|
|
%
|
|
|
|
|
|
If you want to install a binary package that you've either created yourself
|
|
(see next section), that you put into pkgsrc/packages manually or that is
|
|
located on a remote FTP server, you can use the "bin-install" target. This
|
|
target will install a binary package - if available - via pkg_add(1), else do a
|
|
make package. The list of remote FTP sites searched is kept in the variable
|
|
BINPKG_SITES, which defaults to ftp.NetBSD.org. Any flags that should be added
|
|
to pkg_add(1) can be put into BIN_INSTALL_FLAGS. See pkgsrc/mk/defaults/mk.conf
|
|
for more details.
|
|
|
|
A final word of warning: If you set up a system that has a non-standard setting
|
|
for LOCALBASE, be sure to set that before any packages are installed, as you
|
|
cannot use several directories for the same purpose. Doing so will result in
|
|
pkgsrc not being able to properly detect your installed packages, and fail
|
|
miserably. Note also that precompiled binary packages are usually built with
|
|
the default LOCALBASE of /usr/pkg, and that you should not install any if you
|
|
use a non-standard LOCALBASE.
|
|
|
|
Chapter 5. Configuring pkgsrc
|
|
|
|
Table of Contents
|
|
|
|
5.1. General configuration
|
|
5.2. Variables affecting the build process
|
|
5.3. Variables affecting the installation process
|
|
5.4. Selecting and configuring the compiler
|
|
|
|
5.4.1. Selecting the compiler
|
|
5.4.2. Additional flags to the compiler (CFLAGS)
|
|
5.4.3. Additional flags to the linker (LDFLAGS)
|
|
|
|
5.5. Developer/advanced settings
|
|
5.6. Selecting Build Options
|
|
|
|
The whole pkgsrc system is configured in a single file, usually called mk.conf.
|
|
In which directory pkgsrc looks for that file depends on the installation. On
|
|
NetBSD, when you use make(1) from the base system, it is in the directory /etc
|
|
/. In all other cases the default location is ${PREFIX}/etc/, depending on
|
|
where you told the bootstrap program to install the binary packages.
|
|
|
|
During the bootstrap, an example configuration file is created. To use that,
|
|
you have to create the directory ${PREFIX}/etc and copy the example file there.
|
|
|
|
The format of the configuration file is that of the usual BSD-style Makefiles.
|
|
The whole pkgsrc configuration is done by setting variables in this file. Note
|
|
that you can define all kinds of variables, and no special error checking (for
|
|
example for spelling mistakes) takes place, so you have to try it out to see if
|
|
it works.
|
|
|
|
5.1. General configuration
|
|
|
|
In this section, you can find some variables that apply to all pkgsrc packages.
|
|
A complete list of the variables that can be configured by the user is
|
|
available in mk/defaults/mk.conf, together with some comments that describe
|
|
each variable's intent.
|
|
|
|
* LOCALBASE: Where packages will be installed. The default is /usr/pkg. Do
|
|
not mix binary packages with different LOCALBASEs!
|
|
|
|
* CROSSBASE: Where "cross" category packages will be installed. The default
|
|
is ${LOCALBASE}/cross.
|
|
|
|
* X11BASE: Where X11 is installed on the system. The default is /usr/X11R6.
|
|
|
|
* DISTDIR: Where to store the downloaded copies of the original source
|
|
distributions used for building pkgsrc packages. The default is $
|
|
{PKGSRCDIR}/distfiles.
|
|
|
|
* PKG_DBDIR: Where the database about installed packages is stored. The
|
|
default is /var/db/pkg.
|
|
|
|
* MASTER_SITE_OVERRIDE: If set, override the packages' MASTER_SITES with this
|
|
value.
|
|
|
|
* MASTER_SITE_BACKUP: Backup location(s) for distribution files and patch
|
|
files if not found locally or in ${MASTER_SITES} or ${PATCH_SITES}
|
|
respectively. The defaults are ftp://ftp.NetBSD.org/pub/NetBSD/packages/
|
|
distfiles/${DIST_SUBDIR}/ and ftp://ftp.freebsd.org/pub/FreeBSD/distfiles/$
|
|
{DIST_SUBDIR}/.
|
|
|
|
* BINPKG_SITES: List of sites carrying binary pkgs. rel and arch are replaced
|
|
with OS release ("2.0", etc.) and architecture ("mipsel", etc.).
|
|
|
|
* ACCEPTABLE_LICENSES: List of acceptable licenses. Whenever you try to build
|
|
a package whose license is not in this list, you will get an error message
|
|
that includes instructions on how to change this variable.
|
|
|
|
5.2. Variables affecting the build process
|
|
|
|
XXX
|
|
|
|
* PACKAGES: The top level directory for the binary packages. The default is $
|
|
{PKGSRCDIR}/packages.
|
|
|
|
* WRKOBJDIR: The top level directory where, if defined, the separate working
|
|
directories will get created, and symbolically linked to from ${WRKDIR}
|
|
(see below). This is useful for building packages on several architectures,
|
|
then ${PKGSRCDIR} can be NFS-mounted while ${WRKOBJDIR} is local to every
|
|
architecture. (It should be noted that PKGSRCDIR should not be set by the
|
|
user ? it is an internal definition which refers to the root of the pkgsrc
|
|
tree. It is possible to have many pkgsrc tree instances.)
|
|
|
|
* LOCALPATCHES: Directory for local patches that aren't part of pkgsrc. See
|
|
Section 11.3, "patches/*" for more information.
|
|
|
|
* PKGMAKECONF: Location of the mk.conf file used by a package's BSD-style
|
|
Makefile. If this is not set, MAKECONF is set to /dev/null to avoid picking
|
|
up settings used by builds in /usr/src.
|
|
|
|
* DEPENDS_TARGET: By default, dependencies are only installed, and no binary
|
|
package is created for them. You can set this variable to package to
|
|
automatically create binary packages after installing dependencies.
|
|
|
|
5.3. Variables affecting the installation process
|
|
|
|
A growing number of packages support installation into a subdirectory of
|
|
WRKDIR. This allows a package to be built, before the actual filesystem is
|
|
touched. DESTDIR support exists in two variations:
|
|
|
|
* Basic DESTDIR support means that the package installation and packaging is
|
|
still run as root.
|
|
|
|
* Full DESTDIR support can run the complete build, installation and packaging
|
|
as normal user. Root privileges are only needed to add packages.
|
|
|
|
To use the DESTDIR support, set either USE_DESTDIR=yes to use the basic support
|
|
for packages that offer it or USE_DESTDIR=full to get the full support with
|
|
fallback to basic support. USE_DESTDIR=full needs pkgtools/pkg_install version
|
|
20070802 (or newer). It might become the default DESTDIR support later.
|
|
|
|
DESTDIR support changes the behaviour of various targets slightly. To install a
|
|
package after building it, use package-install. package and install don't do
|
|
that any longer. package-install can be used as DEPENDS_TARGET. bin-install
|
|
will ask for the root password to install the package and fail, package-install
|
|
will ask again.
|
|
|
|
With basic DESTDIR support, make clean needs to be run as root.
|
|
|
|
Considering the foo/bar package, DESTDIR full support can be tested using the
|
|
following commands
|
|
|
|
$ id
|
|
uid=1000(myusername) gid=100(users) groups=100(users),0(wheel)
|
|
$ mkdir $HOME/packages
|
|
$ cd $PKGSRCDIR/foo/bar
|
|
|
|
Verify DESTDIR full support, no root privileges should be needed
|
|
|
|
$ make USE_DESTDIR=full install
|
|
|
|
Create a package without root privileges
|
|
|
|
$ make USE_DESTDIR=full PACKAGES=$HOME/packages package
|
|
|
|
For the following command, you must be able to gain root privileges using su(1)
|
|
|
|
$ make USE_DESTDIR=full PACKAGES=$HOME/packages package-install
|
|
|
|
Then, as a simple user
|
|
|
|
$ make clean
|
|
|
|
5.4. Selecting and configuring the compiler
|
|
|
|
5.4.1. Selecting the compiler
|
|
|
|
By default, pkgsrc will use GCC to build packages. This may be overridden by
|
|
setting the following variables in /etc/mk.conf:
|
|
|
|
PKGSRC_COMPILER:
|
|
|
|
This is a list of values specifying the chain of compilers to invoke when
|
|
building packages. Valid values are:
|
|
|
|
* distcc: distributed C/C++ (chainable)
|
|
|
|
* ccache: compiler cache (chainable)
|
|
|
|
* gcc: GNU C/C++ Compiler
|
|
|
|
* mipspro: Silicon Graphics, Inc. MIPSpro (n32/n64)
|
|
|
|
* mipspro: Silicon Graphics, Inc. MIPSpro (o32)
|
|
|
|
* sunpro: Sun Microsystems, Inc. WorkShip/Forte/Sun ONE Studio
|
|
|
|
The default is "gcc". You can use ccache and/or distcc with an appropriate
|
|
PKGSRC_COMPILER setting, e.g. "ccache gcc". This variable should always be
|
|
terminated with a value for a real compiler. Note that only one real
|
|
compiler should be listed (e.g. "sunpro gcc" is not allowed).
|
|
|
|
GCC_REQD:
|
|
|
|
This specifies the minimum version of GCC to use when building packages. If
|
|
the system GCC doesn't satisfy this requirement, then pkgsrc will build and
|
|
install one of the GCC packages to use instead.
|
|
|
|
5.4.2. Additional flags to the compiler (CFLAGS)
|
|
|
|
If you wish to set the CFLAGS variable, please make sure to use the += operator
|
|
instead of the = operator:
|
|
|
|
CFLAGS+= -your -flags
|
|
|
|
Using CFLAGS= (i.e. without the "+") may lead to problems with packages that
|
|
need to add their own flags. You may want to take a look at the devel/cpuflags
|
|
package if you're interested in optimization for the current CPU. Setting
|
|
USE_CPUFLAGS to yes in mk.conf will cause pkgsrc to automatically use cpuflags.
|
|
|
|
5.4.3. Additional flags to the linker (LDFLAGS)
|
|
|
|
If you want to pass flags to the linker, both in the configure step and the
|
|
build step, you can do this in two ways. Either set LDFLAGS or LIBS. The
|
|
difference between the two is that LIBS will be appended to the command line,
|
|
while LDFLAGS come earlier. LDFLAGS is pre-loaded with rpath settings for ELF
|
|
machines depending on the setting of USE_IMAKE or the inclusion of mk/
|
|
x11.buildlink3.mk. As with CFLAGS, if you do not wish to override these
|
|
settings, use the += operator:
|
|
|
|
LDFLAGS+= -your -linkerflags
|
|
|
|
5.5. Developer/advanced settings
|
|
|
|
XXX
|
|
|
|
* PKG_DEVELOPER: Run some sanity checks that package developers want:
|
|
|
|
o make sure patches apply with zero fuzz
|
|
|
|
o run check-shlibs to see that all binaries will find their shared libs.
|
|
|
|
* PKG_DEBUG_LEVEL: The level of debugging output which is displayed whilst
|
|
making and installing the package. The default value for this is 0, which
|
|
will not display the commands as they are executed (normal, default, quiet
|
|
operation); the value 1 will display all shell commands before their
|
|
invocation, and the value 2 will display both the shell commands before
|
|
their invocation, and their actual execution progress with set -x will be
|
|
displayed.
|
|
|
|
5.6. Selecting Build Options
|
|
|
|
Some packages have build time options, usually to select between different
|
|
dependencies, enable optional support for big dependencies or enable
|
|
experimental features.
|
|
|
|
To see which options, if any, a package supports, and which options are
|
|
mutually exclusive, run make show-options, for example:
|
|
|
|
The following options are supported by this package:
|
|
ssl Enable SSL support.
|
|
Exactly one of the following gecko options is required:
|
|
firefox Use firefox as gecko rendering engine.
|
|
mozilla Use mozilla as gecko rendering engine.
|
|
At most one of the following database options may be selected:
|
|
mysql Enable support for MySQL database.
|
|
pgsql Enable support for PostgreSQL database.
|
|
|
|
These options are enabled by default: firefox
|
|
These options are currently enabled: mozilla ssl
|
|
|
|
The following variables can be defined in mk.conf to select which options to
|
|
enable for a package: PKG_DEFAULT_OPTIONS, which can be used to select or
|
|
disable options for all packages that support them, and PKG_OPTIONS.pkgbase,
|
|
which can be used to select or disable options specifically for package pkgbase
|
|
. Options listed in these variables are selected, options preceded by "-" are
|
|
disabled. A few examples:
|
|
|
|
$ grep "PKG.*OPTION" mk.conf
|
|
PKG_DEFAULT_OPTIONS= -arts -dvdread -esound
|
|
PKG_OPTIONS.kdebase= debug -sasl
|
|
PKG_OPTIONS.apache= suexec
|
|
|
|
It is important to note that options that were specifically suggested by the
|
|
package maintainer must be explicitly removed if you do not wish to include the
|
|
option. If you are unsure you can view the current state with make show-options
|
|
.
|
|
|
|
The following settings are consulted in the order given, and the last setting
|
|
that selects or disables an option is used:
|
|
|
|
1. the default options as suggested by the package maintainer
|
|
|
|
2. the options implied by the settings of legacy variables (see below)
|
|
|
|
3. PKG_DEFAULT_OPTIONS
|
|
|
|
4. PKG_OPTIONS.pkgbase
|
|
|
|
For groups of mutually exclusive options, the last option selected is used, all
|
|
others are automatically disabled. If an option of the group is explicitly
|
|
disabled, the previously selected option, if any, is used. It is an error if no
|
|
option from a required group of options is selected, and building the package
|
|
will fail.
|
|
|
|
Before the options framework was introduced, build options were selected by
|
|
setting a variable (often named USE_FOO) in mk.conf for each option. To ease
|
|
transition to the options framework for the user, these legacy variables are
|
|
converted to the appropriate options setting (PKG_OPTIONS.pkgbase)
|
|
automatically. A warning is issued to prompt the user to update mk.conf to use
|
|
the options framework directly. Support for the legacy variables will be
|
|
removed eventually.
|
|
|
|
Chapter 6. Creating binary packages
|
|
|
|
Table of Contents
|
|
|
|
6.1. Building a single binary package
|
|
6.2. Settings for creation of binary packages
|
|
|
|
6.1. Building a single binary package
|
|
|
|
Once you have built and installed a package, you can create a binary package
|
|
which can be installed on another system with pkg_add(1). This saves having to
|
|
build the same package on a group of hosts and wasting CPU time. It also
|
|
provides a simple means for others to install your package, should you
|
|
distribute it.
|
|
|
|
To create a binary package, change into the appropriate directory in pkgsrc,
|
|
and run make package:
|
|
|
|
# cd misc/figlet
|
|
# make package
|
|
|
|
|
|
This will build and install your package (if not already done), and then build
|
|
a binary package from what was installed. You can then use the pkg_* tools to
|
|
manipulate it. Binary packages are created by default in /usr/pkgsrc/packages,
|
|
in the form of a gzipped tar file. See Section B.2, "Packaging figlet" for a
|
|
continuation of the above misc/figlet example.
|
|
|
|
See Chapter 21, Submitting and Committing for information on how to submit such
|
|
a binary package.
|
|
|
|
6.2. Settings for creation of binary packages
|
|
|
|
See Section 17.17, "Other helpful targets".
|
|
|
|
Chapter 7. Creating binary packages for everything in pkgsrc (bulk builds)
|
|
|
|
Table of Contents
|
|
|
|
7.1. Think first, build later
|
|
7.2. Requirements of a bulk build
|
|
7.3. Running an old-style bulk build
|
|
|
|
7.3.1. Configuration
|
|
7.3.2. Other environmental considerations
|
|
7.3.3. Operation
|
|
7.3.4. What it does
|
|
7.3.5. Disk space requirements
|
|
7.3.6. Setting up a sandbox for chrooted builds
|
|
7.3.7. Building a partial set of packages
|
|
7.3.8. Uploading results of a bulk build
|
|
|
|
7.4. Running a pbulk-style bulk build
|
|
|
|
7.4.1. Preparation
|
|
7.4.2. Configuration
|
|
|
|
7.5. Creating a multiple CD-ROM packages collection
|
|
|
|
7.5.1. Example of cdpack
|
|
|
|
When you have multiple machines that should run the same packages, it is wasted
|
|
time if they all build their packages themselves from source. There are two
|
|
ways of getting a set of binary packages: The old bulk build system, or the new
|
|
(as of 2007) parallel bulk build (pbulk) system. This chapter describes how to
|
|
set them up so that the packages are most likely to be usable later.
|
|
|
|
7.1. Think first, build later
|
|
|
|
Since a bulk build takes several days or even weeks to finish, you should think
|
|
about the setup before you start everything. Pay attention to at least the
|
|
following points:
|
|
|
|
* If you want to upload the binary packages to ftp.NetBSD.org, make sure the
|
|
setup complies to the requirements for binary packages:
|
|
|
|
o To end up on ftp.NetBSD.org, the packages must be built by a NetBSD
|
|
developer on a trusted machine (that is, where you and only you have
|
|
root access).
|
|
|
|
o Packages on ftp.NetBSD.org should only be created from the stable
|
|
branches (like 2007Q1), so that users browsing the available
|
|
collections can see at a glance how old the packages are.
|
|
|
|
o The packages must be built as root, since some packages require set-uid
|
|
binaries at runtime, and creating those packages as unprivileged user
|
|
doesn't work well at the moment.
|
|
|
|
* Make sure that the bulk build cannot break anything in your system. Most
|
|
bulk builds run as root, so they should be run at least in a chroot
|
|
environment or something even more restrictive, depending on what the
|
|
operating system provides. There have been numerous cases where certain
|
|
packages tried to install files outside the LOCALBASE or wanted to edit
|
|
some files in /etc. Furthermore, the bulk builds install and deinstall
|
|
packages in /usr/pkg (or whatever LOCALBASE is) during their operation, so
|
|
be sure that you don't need any package during the build.
|
|
|
|
7.2. Requirements of a bulk build
|
|
|
|
A complete bulk build requires lots of disk space. Some of the disk space can
|
|
be read-only, some other must be writable. Some can be on remote filesystems
|
|
(such as NFS) and some should be local. Some can be temporary filesystems,
|
|
others must survive a sudden reboot.
|
|
|
|
* 10 GB for the distfiles (read-write, remote, temporary)
|
|
|
|
* 10 GB for the binary packages (read-write, remote, permanent)
|
|
|
|
* 400 MB for the pkgsrc tree (read-only, remote, permanent)
|
|
|
|
* 5 GB for LOCALBASE (read-write, local, temporary for pbulk, permanent for
|
|
old-bulk)
|
|
|
|
* 5 GB for the log files (read-write, remote, permanent)
|
|
|
|
* 5 GB for temporary files (read-write, local, temporary)
|
|
|
|
7.3. Running an old-style bulk build
|
|
|
|
Note
|
|
|
|
There are two ways of doing a bulk build. The old-style one and the new-style
|
|
"pbulk". The latter is the recommended way.
|
|
|
|
7.3.1. Configuration
|
|
|
|
7.3.1.1. build.conf
|
|
|
|
The build.conf file is the main configuration file for bulk builds. You can
|
|
configure how your copy of pkgsrc is kept up to date, how the distfiles are
|
|
downloaded, how the packages are built and how the report is generated. You can
|
|
find an annotated example file in pkgsrc/mk/bulk/build.conf-example. To use it,
|
|
copy build.conf-example to build.conf and edit it, following the comments in
|
|
that file.
|
|
|
|
7.3.1.2. mk.conf
|
|
|
|
You may want to set variables in mk.conf. Look at pkgsrc/mk/defaults/mk.conf
|
|
for details of the default settings. You will want to ensure that
|
|
ACCEPTABLE_LICENSES meet your local policy. As used in this example,
|
|
_ACCEPTABLE=yes completely bypasses the license check.
|
|
|
|
PACKAGES?= ${_PKGSRCDIR}/packages/${MACHINE_ARCH}
|
|
WRKOBJDIR?= /usr/tmp/pkgsrc # build here instead of in pkgsrc
|
|
BSDSRCDIR= /usr/src
|
|
BSDXSRCDIR= /usr/xsrc # for x11/xservers
|
|
OBJHOSTNAME?= yes # use work.`hostname`
|
|
FAILOVER_FETCH= yes # insist on the correct checksum
|
|
PKG_DEVELOPER?= yes
|
|
_ACCEPTABLE= yes
|
|
|
|
Some options that are especially useful for bulk builds can be found at the top
|
|
lines of the file mk/bulk/bsd.bulk-pkg.mk. The most useful options of these are
|
|
briefly described here.
|
|
|
|
* If you are on a slow machine, you may want to set USE_BULK_BROKEN_CHECK to
|
|
"no".
|
|
|
|
* If you are doing bulk builds from a read-only copy of pkgsrc, you have to
|
|
set BULKFILESDIR to the directory where all log files are created.
|
|
Otherwise the log files are created in the pkgsrc directory.
|
|
|
|
* Another important variable is BULK_PREREQ, which is a list of packages that
|
|
should be always available while building other packages.
|
|
|
|
Some other options are scattered in the pkgsrc infrastructure:
|
|
|
|
* ALLOW_VULNERABLE_PACKAGES should be set to yes. The purpose of the bulk
|
|
builds is creating binary packages, no matter if they are vulnerable or
|
|
not. When uploading the packages to a public server, the vulnerable
|
|
packages will be put into a directory of their own. Leaving this variable
|
|
unset would prevent the bulk build system from even trying to build them,
|
|
so possible building errors would not show up.
|
|
|
|
* CHECK_FILES (pkgsrc/mk/check/check-files.mk) can be set to "yes" to check
|
|
that the installed set of files matches the PLIST.
|
|
|
|
* CHECK_INTERPRETER (pkgsrc/mk/check/check-interpreter.mk) can be set to
|
|
"yes" to check that the installed "#!"-scripts will find their interpreter.
|
|
|
|
* PKGSRC_RUN_TEST can be set to "yes" to run each package's self-test before
|
|
installing it. Note that some packages make heavy use of "good" random
|
|
numbers, so you need to assure that the machine on which you are doing the
|
|
bulk builds is not completely idle. Otherwise some test programs will seem
|
|
to hang, while they are just waiting for new random data to be available.
|
|
|
|
7.3.1.3. pre-build.local
|
|
|
|
It is possible to configure the bulk build to perform certain site-specific
|
|
tasks at the end of the pre-build stage. If the file pre-build.local exists in
|
|
/usr/pkgsrc/mk/bulk, it will be executed (as a sh(1) script) at the end of the
|
|
usual pre-build stage. An example use of pre-build.local is to have the line:
|
|
|
|
echo "I do not have enough disk space to build this pig." \
|
|
> misc/openoffice/$BROKENF
|
|
|
|
to prevent the system from trying to build a particular package which requires
|
|
nearly 3 GB of disk space.
|
|
|
|
7.3.2. Other environmental considerations
|
|
|
|
As /usr/pkg will be completely deleted at the start of bulk builds, make sure
|
|
your login shell is placed somewhere else. Either drop it into /usr/local/bin
|
|
(and adjust your login shell in the passwd file), or (re-)install it via
|
|
pkg_add(1) from /etc/rc.local, so you can login after a reboot (remember that
|
|
your current process won't die if the package is removed, you just can't start
|
|
any new instances of the shell any more). Also, if you use NetBSD earlier than
|
|
1.5, or you still want to use the pkgsrc version of ssh for some reason, be
|
|
sure to install ssh before starting it from rc.local:
|
|
|
|
(cd /usr/pkgsrc/security/ssh && make bulk-install)
|
|
if [ -f /usr/pkg/etc/rc.d/sshd ]; then
|
|
/usr/pkg/etc/rc.d/sshd
|
|
fi
|
|
|
|
Not doing so will result in you being not able to log in via ssh after the bulk
|
|
build is finished or if the machine gets rebooted or crashes. You have been
|
|
warned! :)
|
|
|
|
7.3.3. Operation
|
|
|
|
Make sure you don't need any of the packages still installed.
|
|
|
|
Warning
|
|
|
|
During the bulk build, all packages, their configuration files and some more
|
|
files from /var, /home and possibly other locations will be removed! So don't
|
|
run a bulk build with privileges that might harm your system.
|
|
|
|
Be sure to remove all other things that might interfere with builds, like some
|
|
libs installed in /usr/local, etc. then become root and type:
|
|
|
|
# cd /usr/pkgsrc
|
|
# sh mk/bulk/build
|
|
|
|
|
|
If for some reason your last build didn't complete (power failure, system
|
|
panic, ...), you can continue it by running:
|
|
|
|
# sh mk/bulk/build restart
|
|
|
|
At the end of the bulk build, you will get a summary via mail, and find build
|
|
logs in the directory specified by FTP in the build.conf file.
|
|
|
|
7.3.4. What it does
|
|
|
|
The bulk builds consist of three steps:
|
|
|
|
1. pre-build
|
|
|
|
The script updates your pkgsrc tree via (anon)cvs, then cleans out any
|
|
broken distfiles, and removes all packages installed.
|
|
|
|
2. the bulk build
|
|
|
|
This is basically "make bulk-package" with an optimised order in which
|
|
packages will be built. Packages that don't require other packages will be
|
|
built first, and packages with many dependencies will be built later.
|
|
|
|
3. post-build
|
|
|
|
Generates a report that's placed in the directory specified in the
|
|
build.conf file named broken.html, a short version of that report will also
|
|
be mailed to the build's admin.
|
|
|
|
During the build, a list of broken packages will be compiled in /usr/pkgsrc
|
|
/.broken (or .../.broken.${MACHINE} if OBJMACHINE is set), individual build
|
|
logs of broken builds can be found in the package's directory. These files are
|
|
used by the bulk-targets to mark broken builds to not waste time trying to
|
|
rebuild them, and they can be used to debug these broken package builds later.
|
|
|
|
7.3.5. Disk space requirements
|
|
|
|
Currently, roughly the following requirements are valid for NetBSD 2.0/i386:
|
|
|
|
* 10 GB - distfiles (NFS ok)
|
|
|
|
* 8 GB - full set of all binaries (NFS ok)
|
|
|
|
* 5 GB - temp space for compiling (local disk recommended)
|
|
|
|
Note that all pkgs will be de-installed as soon as they are turned into a
|
|
binary package, and that sources are removed, so there is no excessively huge
|
|
demand to disk space. Afterwards, if the package is needed again, it will be
|
|
installed via pkg_add(1) instead of building again, so there are no cycles
|
|
wasted by recompiling.
|
|
|
|
7.3.6. Setting up a sandbox for chrooted builds
|
|
|
|
If you don't want all the packages nuked from a machine (rendering it useless
|
|
for anything but pkg compiling), there is the possibility of doing the package
|
|
bulk build inside a chroot environment.
|
|
|
|
The first step is to set up a chroot sandbox, e.g. /usr/sandbox. This can be
|
|
done by using null mounts, or manually.
|
|
|
|
There is a shell script called pkgsrc/mk/bulk/mksandbox which will set up the
|
|
sandbox environment using null mounts. It will also create a script called
|
|
sandbox in the root of the sandbox environment, which will allow the null
|
|
mounts to be activated using the sandbox mount command and deactivated using
|
|
the sandbox umount command.
|
|
|
|
To set up a sandbox environment by hand, after extracting all the sets from a
|
|
NetBSD installation or doing a make distribution DESTDIR=/usr/sandbox in /usr/
|
|
src/etc, be sure the following items are present and properly configured:
|
|
|
|
1. Kernel
|
|
|
|
# cp /netbsd /usr/sandbox
|
|
|
|
2. /dev/*
|
|
|
|
# cd /usr/sandbox/dev ; sh MAKEDEV all
|
|
|
|
3. /etc/resolv.conf (for security/smtpd and mail):
|
|
|
|
# cp /etc/resolv.conf /usr/sandbox/etc
|
|
|
|
4. Working(!) mail config (hostname, sendmail.cf):
|
|
|
|
# cp /etc/mail/sendmail.cf /usr/sandbox/etc/mail
|
|
|
|
5. /etc/localtime (for security/smtpd):
|
|
|
|
# ln -sf /usr/share/zoneinfo/UTC /usr/sandbox/etc/localtime
|
|
|
|
6. /usr/src (system sources, e. g. for sysutils/aperture):
|
|
|
|
# ln -s ../disk1/cvs .
|
|
# ln -s cvs/src-2.0 src
|
|
|
|
7. Create /var/db/pkg (not part of default install):
|
|
|
|
# mkdir /usr/sandbox/var/db/pkg
|
|
|
|
8. Create /usr/pkg (not part of default install):
|
|
|
|
# mkdir /usr/sandbox/usr/pkg
|
|
|
|
9. Checkout pkgsrc via cvs into /usr/sandbox/usr/pkgsrc:
|
|
|
|
# cd /usr/sandbox/usr
|
|
# cvs -d anoncvs@anoncvs.NetBSD.org:/cvsroot checkout -d -P pkgsrc
|
|
|
|
|
|
Do not mount/link this to the copy of your pkgsrc tree you do development
|
|
in, as this will likely cause problems!
|
|
|
|
10. Make /usr/sandbox/usr/pkgsrc/packages and .../distfiles point somewhere
|
|
appropriate. NFS- and/or nullfs-mounts may come in handy!
|
|
|
|
11. Edit mk.conf, see Section 7.3.1.2, "???".
|
|
|
|
12. Adjust mk/bulk/build.conf to suit your needs.
|
|
|
|
When the chroot sandbox is set up, you can start the build with the following
|
|
steps:
|
|
|
|
# cd /usr/sandbox/usr/pkgsrc
|
|
# sh mk/bulk/do-sandbox-build
|
|
|
|
|
|
This will just jump inside the sandbox and start building. At the end of the
|
|
build, mail will be sent with the results of the build. Created binary pkgs
|
|
will be in /usr/sandbox/usr/pkgsrc/packages (wherever that points/mounts to/
|
|
from).
|
|
|
|
7.3.7. Building a partial set of packages
|
|
|
|
In addition to building a complete set of all packages in pkgsrc, the pkgsrc/mk
|
|
/bulk/build script may be used to build a subset of the packages contained in
|
|
pkgsrc. By setting SPECIFIC_PKGS in mk.conf, the variables
|
|
|
|
* SITE_SPECIFIC_PKGS
|
|
|
|
* HOST_SPECIFIC_PKGS
|
|
|
|
* GROUP_SPECIFIC_PKGS
|
|
|
|
* USER_SPECIFIC_PKGS
|
|
|
|
will define the set of packages which should be built. The bulk build code will
|
|
also include any packages which are needed as dependencies for the explicitly
|
|
listed packages.
|
|
|
|
One use of this is to do a bulk build with SPECIFIC_PKGS in a chroot sandbox
|
|
periodically to have a complete set of the binary packages needed for your site
|
|
available without the overhead of building extra packages that are not needed.
|
|
|
|
7.3.8. Uploading results of a bulk build
|
|
|
|
This section describes how pkgsrc developers can upload binary pkgs built by
|
|
bulk builds to ftp.NetBSD.org.
|
|
|
|
If you would like to automatically create checksum files for the binary
|
|
packages you intend to upload, remember to set MKSUMS=yes in your mk/bulk/
|
|
build.conf.
|
|
|
|
If you would like to PGP sign the checksum files (highly recommended!),
|
|
remember to set SIGN_AS=username@NetBSD.org in your mk/bulk/build.conf. This
|
|
will prompt you for your GPG password to sign the files before uploading
|
|
everything.
|
|
|
|
Then, make sure that you have RSYNC_DST set properly in your mk/bulk/build.conf
|
|
file, i.e. adjust it to something like one of the following:
|
|
|
|
RSYNC_DST=ftp.NetBSD.org:/pub/NetBSD/packages/packages-200xQy/NetBSD-a.b.c/arch/upload
|
|
|
|
Please use appropriate values for "packages-200xQy", "NetBSD-a.b.c" and "arch"
|
|
here. If your login on ftp.NetBSD.org is different from your local login, write
|
|
your login directly into the variable, e.g. my local account is "feyrer", but
|
|
for my login "hubertf", I use:
|
|
|
|
RSYNC_DST=hubertf@ftp.NetBSD.org:/pub/NetBSD/packages/packages-200xQy/NetBSD-a.b.c/arch/upload
|
|
|
|
A separate upload directory is used here to allow "closing" the directory
|
|
during upload. To do so, run the following command on ftp.NetBSD.org next:
|
|
|
|
nbftp% mkdir -p -m 750 /pub/NetBSD/packages/packages-200xQy/NetBSD-a.b.c/arch/upload
|
|
|
|
Please note that /pub/NetBSD/packages is only appropriate for packages for the
|
|
NetBSD operating system. Binary packages for other operating systems should go
|
|
into /pub/pkgsrc.
|
|
|
|
Before uploading the binary pkgs, ssh authentication needs to be set up. This
|
|
example shows how to set up temporary keys for the root account inside the
|
|
sandbox (assuming that no keys should be present there usually):
|
|
|
|
# chroot /usr/sandbox
|
|
chroot-# rm $HOME/.ssh/id-dsa*
|
|
chroot-# ssh-keygen -t dsa
|
|
chroot-# cat $HOME/.ssh/id-dsa.pub
|
|
|
|
|
|
Now take the output of id-dsa.pub and append it to your ~/.ssh/authorized_keys
|
|
file on ftp.NetBSD.org. You can remove the key after the upload is done!
|
|
|
|
Next, test if your ssh connection really works:
|
|
|
|
chroot-# ssh ftp.NetBSD.org date
|
|
|
|
Use "-l yourNetBSDlogin" here as appropriate!
|
|
|
|
Now after all this works, you can exit the sandbox and start the upload:
|
|
|
|
chroot-# exit
|
|
# cd /usr/sandbox/usr/pkgsrc
|
|
# sh mk/bulk/do-sandbox-upload
|
|
|
|
|
|
The upload process may take quite some time. Use ls(1) or du(1) on the FTP
|
|
server to monitor progress of the upload. The upload script will take care of
|
|
not uploading restricted packages and putting vulnerable packages into the
|
|
vulnerable subdirectory.
|
|
|
|
After the upload has ended, first thing is to revoke ssh access:
|
|
|
|
nbftp% vi ~/.ssh/authorized_keys
|
|
Gdd:x!
|
|
|
|
Use whatever is needed to remove the key you've entered before! Last, move the
|
|
uploaded packages out of the upload directory to have them accessible to
|
|
everyone:
|
|
|
|
nbftp% cd /pub/NetBSD/packages/packages-200xQy/NetBSD-a.b.c/arch
|
|
nbftp% mv upload/* .
|
|
nbftp% rmdir upload
|
|
nbftp% chmod 755 .
|
|
|
|
|
|
7.4. Running a pbulk-style bulk build
|
|
|
|
Running a pbulk-style bulk build works roughly as follows:
|
|
|
|
* First, build the pbulk infrastructure in a fresh pkgsrc location.
|
|
|
|
* Then, build each of the packages from a clean installation directory using
|
|
the infrastructure.
|
|
|
|
7.4.1. Preparation
|
|
|
|
First, you need to create a pkgsrc installation for the pbulk infrastructure.
|
|
No matter on which platform you are (even on NetBSD), you should bootstrap into
|
|
its own directory. Let's take the directory /usr/pbulk or $HOME/pbulk for it.
|
|
This installation will be bootstrapped and all the tools that are required for
|
|
the bulk build will be installed there.
|
|
|
|
$ cd /usr/pkgsrc
|
|
$ ./bootstrap/bootstrap --prefix=/usr/pbulk --varbase=/usr/pbulk/var --workdir=/tmp/pbulk-bootstrap
|
|
$ rm -rf /tmp/pbulk-bootstrap
|
|
|
|
Now the basic environment for the pbulk infrastructure is installed. The
|
|
specific tools are still missing. This is a good time to edit the pkgsrc
|
|
configuration file /usr/pbulk/etc/mk.conf to fit your needs. Typical things you
|
|
might set now are:
|
|
|
|
* PKG_DEVELOPER=yes, to enable many consistency checks,
|
|
|
|
* WRKOBJDIR=/tmp/pbulk-outer, to keep /usr/pkgsrc free from any
|
|
modifications,
|
|
|
|
* DISTDIR=/distfiles, to have only one directory in which all distfiles (for
|
|
the infrastructure and for the actual packages) are downloaded,
|
|
|
|
* ACCEPTABLE_LICENSES+=..., to select some licenses additional to the usual
|
|
Free/Open Source licenses that are acceptable to you,
|
|
|
|
* _ACCEPTABLE=yes, to accept all licenses, no matter how restrictive they
|
|
are.
|
|
|
|
Now you are ready to build the rest of the pbulk infrastructure.
|
|
|
|
$ cd pkgtools/pbulk
|
|
$ /usr/pbulk/bin/bmake install
|
|
$ rm -rf /tmp/pbulk-outer
|
|
|
|
Now the pbulk infrastructure is built and installed. It still needs to be
|
|
configured, and after some more preparation, we will be able to start the real
|
|
bulk build.
|
|
|
|
7.4.2. Configuration
|
|
|
|
TODO; see pkgsrc/doc/HOWTO-pbulk for more information.
|
|
|
|
TODO: continue writing
|
|
|
|
7.5. Creating a multiple CD-ROM packages collection
|
|
|
|
After your pkgsrc bulk-build has completed, you may wish to create a CD-ROM set
|
|
of the resulting binary packages to assist in installing packages on other
|
|
machines. The pkgtools/cdpack package provides a simple tool for creating the
|
|
ISO 9660 images. cdpack arranges the packages on the CD-ROMs in a way that
|
|
keeps all the dependencies for a given package on the same CD as that package.
|
|
|
|
7.5.1. Example of cdpack
|
|
|
|
Complete documentation for cdpack is found in the cdpack(1) man page. The
|
|
following short example assumes that the binary packages are left in /usr/
|
|
pkgsrc/packages/All and that sufficient disk space exists in /u2 to hold the
|
|
ISO 9660 images.
|
|
|
|
# mkdir /u2/images
|
|
# pkg_add /usr/pkgsrc/packages/All/cdpack
|
|
# cdpack /usr/pkgsrc/packages/All /u2/images
|
|
|
|
|
|
If you wish to include a common set of files (COPYRIGHT, README, etc.) on each
|
|
CD in the collection, then you need to create a directory which contains these
|
|
files. e.g.
|
|
|
|
# mkdir /tmp/common
|
|
# echo "This is a README" > /tmp/common/README
|
|
# echo "Another file" > /tmp/common/COPYING
|
|
# mkdir /tmp/common/bin
|
|
# echo "#!/bin/sh" > /tmp/common/bin/myscript
|
|
# echo "echo Hello world" >> /tmp/common/bin/myscript
|
|
# chmod 755 /tmp/common/bin/myscript
|
|
|
|
|
|
Now create the images:
|
|
|
|
# cdpack -x /tmp/common /usr/pkgsrc/packages/All /u2/images
|
|
|
|
Each image will contain README, COPYING, and bin/myscript in their root
|
|
directories.
|
|
|
|
Chapter 8. Directory layout of the installed files
|
|
|
|
Table of Contents
|
|
|
|
8.1. File system layout in ${LOCALBASE}
|
|
8.2. File system layout in ${VARBASE}
|
|
|
|
The files that are installed by pkgsrc are organized in a way that is similar
|
|
to what you find in the /usr directory of the base system. But some details are
|
|
different. This is because pkgsrc initially came from FreeBSD and had adopted
|
|
its file system hierarchy. Later it was largely influenced by NetBSD. But no
|
|
matter which operating system you are using pkgsrc with, you can expect the
|
|
same layout for pkgsrc.
|
|
|
|
There are mainly four root directories for pkgsrc, which are all configurable
|
|
in the bootstrap/bootstrap script. When pkgsrc has been installed as root, the
|
|
default locations are:
|
|
|
|
LOCALBASE= /usr/pkg
|
|
PKG_SYSCONFBASE= /usr/pkg/etc
|
|
VARBASE= /var
|
|
PKG_DBDIR= /var/db/pkg
|
|
|
|
In unprivileged mode (when pkgsrc has been installed as any other user), the
|
|
default locations are:
|
|
|
|
LOCALBASE= ${HOME}/pkg
|
|
PKG_SYSCONFBASE= ${HOME}/pkg/etc
|
|
VARBASE= ${HOME}/pkg/var
|
|
PKG_DBDIR= ${HOME}/pkg/var/db/pkg
|
|
|
|
What these four directories are for, and what they look like is explained
|
|
below.
|
|
|
|
* LOCALBASE corresponds to the /usr directory in the base system. It is the
|
|
"main" directory where the files are installed and contains the well-known
|
|
subdirectories like bin, include, lib, share and sbin.
|
|
|
|
* VARBASE corresponds to /var in the base system. Some programs (especially
|
|
games, network daemons) need write access to it during normal operation.
|
|
|
|
* PKG_SYSCONFDIR corresponds to /etc in the base system. It contains
|
|
configuration files of the packages, as well as pkgsrc's mk.conf itself.
|
|
|
|
8.1. File system layout in ${LOCALBASE}
|
|
|
|
The following directories exist in a typical pkgsrc installation in $
|
|
{LOCALBASE}.
|
|
|
|
bin
|
|
|
|
Contains executable programs that are intended to be directly used by the
|
|
end user.
|
|
|
|
emul
|
|
|
|
Contains files for the emulation layers of various other operating systems,
|
|
especially for NetBSD.
|
|
|
|
etc (the usual location of ${PKG_SYSCONFDIR})
|
|
|
|
Contains the configuration files.
|
|
|
|
include
|
|
|
|
Contains headers for the C and C++ programming languages.
|
|
|
|
info
|
|
|
|
Contains GNU info files of various packages.
|
|
|
|
lib
|
|
|
|
Contains shared and static libraries.
|
|
|
|
libdata
|
|
|
|
Contains data files that don't change after installation. Other data files
|
|
belong into ${VARBASE}.
|
|
|
|
libexec
|
|
|
|
Contains programs that are not intended to be used by end users, such as
|
|
helper programs or network daemons.
|
|
|
|
libexec/cgi-bin
|
|
|
|
Contains programs that are intended to be executed as CGI scripts by a web
|
|
server.
|
|
|
|
man (the usual value of ${PKGMANDIR})
|
|
|
|
Contains brief documentation in form of manual pages.
|
|
|
|
sbin
|
|
|
|
Contains programs that are intended to be used only by the super-user.
|
|
|
|
share
|
|
|
|
Contains platform-independent data files that don't change after
|
|
installation.
|
|
|
|
share/doc
|
|
|
|
Contains documentation files provided by the packages.
|
|
|
|
share/examples
|
|
|
|
Contains example files provided by the packages. Among others, the original
|
|
configuration files are saved here and copied to ${PKG_SYSCONFDIR} during
|
|
installation.
|
|
|
|
share/examples/rc.d
|
|
|
|
Contains the original files for rc.d scripts.
|
|
|
|
var (the usual location of ${VARBASE})
|
|
|
|
Contains files that may be modified after installation.
|
|
|
|
8.2. File system layout in ${VARBASE}
|
|
|
|
db/pkg (the usual location of ${PKG_DBDIR})
|
|
|
|
Contains information about the currently installed packages.
|
|
|
|
games
|
|
|
|
Contains highscore files.
|
|
|
|
log
|
|
|
|
Contains log files.
|
|
|
|
run
|
|
|
|
Contains informational files about daemons that are currently running.
|
|
|
|
Chapter 9. Frequently Asked Questions
|
|
|
|
Table of Contents
|
|
|
|
9.1. Are there any mailing lists for pkg-related discussion?
|
|
9.2. Where's the pkgviews documentation?
|
|
9.3. Utilities for package management (pkgtools)
|
|
9.4. How to use pkgsrc as non-root
|
|
9.5. How to resume transfers when fetching distfiles?
|
|
9.6. How can I install/use modular X.org from pkgsrc?
|
|
9.7. How to fetch files from behind a firewall
|
|
9.8. How do I tell make fetch to do passive FTP?
|
|
9.9. How to fetch all distfiles at once
|
|
9.10. What does Don't know how to make /usr/share/tmac/tmac.andoc mean?
|
|
9.11. What does Could not find bsd.own.mk mean?
|
|
9.12. Using 'sudo' with pkgsrc
|
|
9.13. How do I change the location of configuration files?
|
|
9.14. Automated security checks
|
|
9.15. Why do some packages ignore my CFLAGS?
|
|
9.16. A package does not build. What shall I do?
|
|
9.17. What does Makefile appears to contain unresolved cvs/rcs/??? merge
|
|
conflicts mean?
|
|
|
|
This section contains hints, tips & tricks on special things in pkgsrc that we
|
|
didn't find a better place for in the previous chapters, and it contains items
|
|
for both pkgsrc users and developers.
|
|
|
|
9.1. Are there any mailing lists for pkg-related discussion?
|
|
|
|
The following mailing lists may be of interest to pkgsrc users:
|
|
|
|
* pkgsrc-users: This is a general purpose list for most issues regarding
|
|
pkgsrc, regardless of platform, e.g. soliciting user help for pkgsrc
|
|
configuration, unexpected build failures, using particular packages,
|
|
upgrading pkgsrc installations, questions regarding the pkgsrc release
|
|
branches, etc. General announcements or proposals for changes that impact
|
|
the pkgsrc user community, e.g. major infrastructure changes, new features,
|
|
package removals, etc., may also be posted.
|
|
|
|
* pkgsrc-bulk: A list where the results of pkgsrc bulk builds are sent and
|
|
discussed.
|
|
|
|
* pkgsrc-changes: This list is for those who are interested in getting a
|
|
commit message for every change committed to pkgsrc. It is also available
|
|
in digest form, meaning one daily message containing all commit messages
|
|
for changes to the package source tree in that 24 hour period.
|
|
|
|
To subscribe, do:
|
|
|
|
% echo subscribe listname | mail majordomo@NetBSD.org
|
|
|
|
Archives for all these mailing lists are available from http://
|
|
mail-index.NetBSD.org/.
|
|
|
|
9.2. Where's the pkgviews documentation?
|
|
|
|
Pkgviews is tightly integrated with buildlink. You can find a pkgviews User's
|
|
guide in pkgsrc/mk/buildlink3/PKGVIEWS_UG.
|
|
|
|
9.3. Utilities for package management (pkgtools)
|
|
|
|
The directory pkgsrc/pkgtools contains a number of useful utilities for both
|
|
users and developers of pkgsrc. This section attempts only to make the reader
|
|
aware of the utilities and when they might be useful, and not to duplicate the
|
|
documentation that comes with each package.
|
|
|
|
Utilities used by pkgsrc (automatically installed when needed):
|
|
|
|
* pkgtools/x11-links: Symlinks for use by buildlink.
|
|
|
|
OS tool augmentation (automatically installed when needed):
|
|
|
|
* pkgtools/digest: Calculates various kinds of checksums (including SHA1).
|
|
|
|
* pkgtools/libnbcompat: Compatibility library for pkgsrc tools.
|
|
|
|
* pkgtools/mtree: Installed on non-BSD systems due to lack of native mtree.
|
|
|
|
* pkgtools/pkg_install: Up-to-date replacement for /usr/sbin/pkg_install, or
|
|
for use on operating systems where pkg_install is not present.
|
|
|
|
Utilities used by pkgsrc (not automatically installed):
|
|
|
|
* pkgtools/pkg_tarup: Create a binary package from an already-installed
|
|
package. Used by make replace to save the old package.
|
|
|
|
* pkgtools/dfdisk: Adds extra functionality to pkgsrc, allowing it to fetch
|
|
distfiles from multiple locations. It currently supports the following
|
|
methods: multiple CD-ROMs and network FTP/HTTP connections.
|
|
|
|
* pkgtools/xpkgwedge: Put X11 packages someplace else (enabled by default).
|
|
|
|
* devel/cpuflags: Determine the best compiler flags to optimise code for your
|
|
current CPU and compiler. Setting USE_CPUFLAGS to yes in mk.conf will cause
|
|
pkgsrc to automatically use cpuflags.
|
|
|
|
Utilities for keeping track of installed packages, being up to date, etc:
|
|
|
|
* pkgtools/pkg_chk: Reports on packages whose installed versions do not match
|
|
the latest pkgsrc entries.
|
|
|
|
* pkgtools/pkgdep: Makes dependency graphs of packages, to aid in choosing a
|
|
strategy for updating.
|
|
|
|
* pkgtools/pkgdepgraph: Makes graphs from the output of pkgtools/pkgdep (uses
|
|
graphviz).
|
|
|
|
* pkgtools/pkglint: The pkglint(1) program checks a pkgsrc entry for errors.
|
|
|
|
* pkgtools/lintpkgsrc: The lintpkgsrc(1) program does various checks on the
|
|
complete pkgsrc system.
|
|
|
|
* pkgtools/pkgsurvey: Report what packages you have installed.
|
|
|
|
Utilities for people maintaining or creating individual packages:
|
|
|
|
* pkgtools/pkgdiff: Automate making and maintaining patches for a package
|
|
(includes pkgdiff, pkgvi, mkpatches, etc.).
|
|
|
|
* pkgtools/rpm2pkg, pkgtools/url2pkg: Aids in converting to pkgsrc.
|
|
|
|
* pkgtools/gensolpkg: Convert pkgsrc to a Solaris package.
|
|
|
|
Utilities for people maintaining pkgsrc (or: more obscure pkg utilities)
|
|
|
|
* pkgtools/pkg_comp: Build packages in a chrooted area.
|
|
|
|
* pkgtools/libkver: Spoof kernel version for chrooted cross builds.
|
|
|
|
9.4. How to use pkgsrc as non-root
|
|
|
|
If you want to use pkgsrc as non-root user, you can set some variables to make
|
|
pkgsrc work under these conditions. At the very least, you need to set
|
|
UNPRIVILEGED to "yes"; this will turn on unprivileged mode and set multiple
|
|
related variables to allow installation of packages as non-root.
|
|
|
|
In case the defaults are not enough, you may want to tune some other variables
|
|
used. For example, if the automatic user/group detection leads to incorrect
|
|
values (or not the ones you would like to use), you can change them by setting
|
|
UNPRIVILEGED_USER and UNPRIVILEGED_GROUP respectively.
|
|
|
|
As regards bootstrapping, please note that the bootstrap script will ease
|
|
non-root configuration when given the "--ignore-user-check" flag, as it will
|
|
choose and use multiple default directories under ~/pkg as the installation
|
|
targets. These directories can be overridden by the "--prefix" flag provided by
|
|
the script, as well as some others that allow finer tuning of the tree layout.
|
|
|
|
9.5. How to resume transfers when fetching distfiles?
|
|
|
|
By default, resuming transfers in pkgsrc is disabled, but you can enable this
|
|
feature by adding the option PKG_RESUME_TRANSFERS=YES into mk.conf. If, during
|
|
a fetch step, an incomplete distfile is found, pkgsrc will try to resume it.
|
|
|
|
You can also use a different program than the default ftp(1) by changing the
|
|
FETCH_USING variable. You can specify the program by using of ftp, fetch, wget
|
|
or curl. Alternatively, fetching can be disabled by using the value manual. A
|
|
value of custom disables the system defaults and dependency tracking for the
|
|
fetch program. In that case you have to provide FETCH_CMD, FETCH_BEFORE_ARGS,
|
|
FETCH_RESUME_ARGS, FETCH_OUTPUT_ARGS, FETCH_AFTER_ARGS.
|
|
|
|
For example, if you want to use wget to download, you'll have to use something
|
|
like:
|
|
|
|
FETCH_USING= wget
|
|
|
|
9.6. How can I install/use modular X.org from pkgsrc?
|
|
|
|
If you want to use modular X.org from pkgsrc instead of your system's own X11
|
|
(/usr/X11R6, /usr/openwin, ...) you will have to add the following line into
|
|
mk.conf:
|
|
|
|
X11_TYPE=modular
|
|
|
|
Note
|
|
|
|
The DragonFly operating system defaults to using modular X.org from pkgsrc.
|
|
|
|
9.7. How to fetch files from behind a firewall
|
|
|
|
If you are sitting behind a firewall which does not allow direct connections to
|
|
Internet hosts (i.e. non-NAT), you may specify the relevant proxy hosts. This
|
|
is done using an environment variable in the form of a URL, e.g. in Amdahl, the
|
|
machine "orpheus.amdahl.com" is one of the firewalls, and it uses port 80 as
|
|
the proxy port number. So the proxy environment variables are:
|
|
|
|
ftp_proxy=ftp://orpheus.amdahl.com:80/
|
|
http_proxy=http://orpheus.amdahl.com:80/
|
|
|
|
9.8. How do I tell make fetch to do passive FTP?
|
|
|
|
This depends on which utility is used to retrieve distfiles. From bsd.pkg.mk,
|
|
FETCH_CMD is assigned the first available command from the following list:
|
|
|
|
* ${LOCALBASE}/bin/ftp
|
|
|
|
* /usr/bin/ftp
|
|
|
|
On a default NetBSD installation, this will be /usr/bin/ftp, which
|
|
automatically tries passive connections first, and falls back to active
|
|
connections if the server refuses to do passive. For the other tools, add the
|
|
following to your mk.conf file: PASSIVE_FETCH=1.
|
|
|
|
Having that option present will prevent /usr/bin/ftp from falling back to
|
|
active transfers.
|
|
|
|
9.9. How to fetch all distfiles at once
|
|
|
|
You would like to download all the distfiles in a single batch from work or
|
|
university, where you can't run a make fetch. There is an archive of distfiles
|
|
on ftp.NetBSD.org, but downloading the entire directory may not be appropriate.
|
|
|
|
The answer here is to do a make fetch-list in /usr/pkgsrc or one of its
|
|
subdirectories, carry the resulting list to your machine at work/school and use
|
|
it there. If you don't have a NetBSD-compatible ftp(1) (like tnftp) at work,
|
|
don't forget to set FETCH_CMD to something that fetches a URL:
|
|
|
|
At home:
|
|
|
|
% cd /usr/pkgsrc
|
|
% make fetch-list FETCH_CMD=wget DISTDIR=/tmp/distfiles >/tmp/fetch.sh
|
|
% scp /tmp/fetch.sh work:/tmp
|
|
|
|
At work:
|
|
|
|
% sh /tmp/fetch.sh
|
|
|
|
then tar up /tmp/distfiles and take it home.
|
|
|
|
If you have a machine running NetBSD, and you want to get all distfiles (even
|
|
ones that aren't for your machine architecture), you can do so by using the
|
|
above-mentioned make fetch-list approach, or fetch the distfiles directly by
|
|
running:
|
|
|
|
% make mirror-distfiles
|
|
|
|
If you even decide to ignore NO_{SRC,BIN}_ON_{FTP,CDROM}, then you can get
|
|
everything by running:
|
|
|
|
% make fetch NO_SKIP=yes
|
|
|
|
9.10. What does "Don't know how to make /usr/share/tmac/tmac.andoc" mean?
|
|
|
|
When compiling the pkgtools/pkg_install package, you get the error from make
|
|
that it doesn't know how to make /usr/share/tmac/tmac.andoc? This indicates
|
|
that you don't have installed the "text" set (nroff, ...) from the NetBSD base
|
|
distribution on your machine. It is recommended to do that to format man pages.
|
|
|
|
In the case of the pkgtools/pkg_install package, you can get away with setting
|
|
NOMAN=YES either in the environment or in mk.conf.
|
|
|
|
9.11. What does "Could not find bsd.own.mk" mean?
|
|
|
|
You didn't install the compiler set, comp.tgz, when you installed your NetBSD
|
|
machine. Please get and install it, by extracting it in /:
|
|
|
|
# cd /
|
|
# tar --unlink -zxvpf .../comp.tgz
|
|
|
|
comp.tgz is part of every NetBSD release. Get the one that corresponds to your
|
|
release (determine via uname -r).
|
|
|
|
9.12. Using 'sudo' with pkgsrc
|
|
|
|
When installing packages as non-root user and using the just-in-time su(1)
|
|
feature of pkgsrc, it can become annoying to type in the root password for each
|
|
required package installed. To avoid this, the sudo package can be used, which
|
|
does password caching over a limited time. To use it, install sudo (either as
|
|
binary package or from security/sudo) and then put the following into your
|
|
mk.conf, somewhere after the definition of the LOCALBASE variable:
|
|
|
|
.if exists(${LOCALBASE}/bin/sudo)
|
|
SU_CMD= ${LOCALBASE}/bin/sudo /bin/sh -c
|
|
.endif
|
|
|
|
9.13. How do I change the location of configuration files?
|
|
|
|
As the system administrator, you can choose where configuration files are
|
|
installed. The default settings make all these files go into ${PREFIX}/etc or
|
|
some of its subdirectories; this may be suboptimal depending on your
|
|
expectations (e.g., a read-only, NFS-exported PREFIX with a need of per-machine
|
|
configuration of the provided packages).
|
|
|
|
In order to change the defaults, you can modify the PKG_SYSCONFBASE variable
|
|
(in mk.conf) to point to your preferred configuration directory; some common
|
|
examples include /etc or /etc/pkg.
|
|
|
|
Furthermore, you can change this value on a per-package basis by setting the
|
|
PKG_SYSCONFDIR.${PKG_SYSCONFVAR} variable. PKG_SYSCONFVAR's value usually
|
|
matches the name of the package you would like to modify, that is, the contents
|
|
of PKGBASE.
|
|
|
|
Note that after changing these settings, you must rebuild and reinstall any
|
|
affected packages.
|
|
|
|
9.14. Automated security checks
|
|
|
|
Please be aware that there can often be bugs in third-party software, and some
|
|
of these bugs can leave a machine vulnerable to exploitation by attackers. In
|
|
an effort to lessen the exposure, the NetBSD packages team maintains a database
|
|
of known-exploits to packages which have at one time been included in pkgsrc.
|
|
The database can be downloaded automatically, and a security audit of all
|
|
packages installed on a system can take place. To do this, refer to the
|
|
following two tools (installed as part of the pkgtools/pkg_install package):
|
|
|
|
1. download-vulnerability-list, an easy way to download a list of the security
|
|
vulnerabilities information. This list is kept up to date by the NetBSD
|
|
security officer and the NetBSD packages team, and is distributed from the
|
|
NetBSD ftp server:
|
|
|
|
ftp://ftp.NetBSD.org/pub/NetBSD/packages/distfiles/pkg-vulnerabilities
|
|
|
|
2. audit-packages, an easy way to audit the current machine, checking each
|
|
vulnerability which is known. If a vulnerable package is installed, it will
|
|
be shown by output to stdout, including a description of the type of
|
|
vulnerability, and a URL containing more information.
|
|
|
|
Use of these tools is strongly recommended! After "pkg_install" is installed,
|
|
please read the package's message, which you can get by running pkg_info -D
|
|
pkg_install.
|
|
|
|
If this package is installed, pkgsrc builds will use it to perform a security
|
|
check before building any package. See Section 5.2, "Variables affecting the
|
|
build process" for ways to control this check.
|
|
|
|
9.15. Why do some packages ignore my CFLAGS?
|
|
|
|
When you add your own preferences to the CFLAGS variable in your mk.conf, these
|
|
flags are passed in environment variables to the ./configure scripts and to
|
|
make(1). Some package authors ignore the CFLAGS from the environment variable
|
|
by overriding them in the Makefiles of their package.
|
|
|
|
Currently there is no solution to this problem. If you really need the package
|
|
to use your CFLAGS you should run make patch in the package directory and then
|
|
inspect any Makefile and Makefile.in for whether they define CFLAGS explicitly.
|
|
Usually you can remove these lines. But be aware that some "smart" programmers
|
|
write so bad code that it only works for the specific combination of CFLAGS
|
|
they have chosen.
|
|
|
|
9.16. A package does not build. What shall I do?
|
|
|
|
1. Make sure that your copy of pkgsrc is consistent. A case that occurs often
|
|
is that people only update pkgsrc in parts, because of performance reasons.
|
|
Since pkgsrc is one large system, not a collection of many small systems,
|
|
there are sometimes changes that only work when the whole pkgsrc tree is
|
|
updated.
|
|
|
|
2. Make sure that you don't have any CVS conflicts. Search for "<<<<<<" or
|
|
">>>>>>" in all your pkgsrc files.
|
|
|
|
3. Make sure that you don't have old copies of the packages extracted. Run
|
|
make clean clean-depends to verify this.
|
|
|
|
4. If the problem still exists, write a mail to the pkgsrc-users mailing list.
|
|
|
|
9.17. What does "Makefile appears to contain unresolved cvs/rcs/??? merge
|
|
conflicts" mean?
|
|
|
|
You have modified a file from pkgsrc, and someone else has modified that same
|
|
file afterwards in the CVS repository. Both changes are in the same region of
|
|
the file, so when you updated pkgsrc, the cvs command marked the conflicting
|
|
changes in the file. Because of these markers, the file is no longer a valid
|
|
Makefile.
|
|
|
|
Have a look at that file, and if you don't need your local changes anymore, you
|
|
can remove that file and run cvs -q update -dP in that directory to download
|
|
the current version.
|
|
|
|
Part II. The pkgsrc developer's guide
|
|
|
|
This part of the book deals with creating and modifying packages. It starts
|
|
with a "HOWTO"-like guide on creating a new package. The remaining chapters are
|
|
more like a reference manual for pkgsrc.
|
|
|
|
Table of Contents
|
|
|
|
10. Creating a new pkgsrc package from scratch
|
|
|
|
10.1. Common types of packages
|
|
|
|
10.1.1. Perl modules
|
|
10.1.2. KDE applications
|
|
10.1.3. Python modules and programs
|
|
|
|
10.2. Examples
|
|
|
|
10.2.1. How the www/nvu package came into pkgsrc
|
|
|
|
11. Package components - files, directories and contents
|
|
|
|
11.1. Makefile
|
|
11.2. distinfo
|
|
11.3. patches/*
|
|
|
|
11.3.1. Structure of a single patch file
|
|
11.3.2. Creating patch files
|
|
11.3.3. Sources where the patch files come from
|
|
11.3.4. Patching guidelines
|
|
11.3.5. Feedback to the author
|
|
|
|
11.4. Other mandatory files
|
|
11.5. Optional files
|
|
|
|
11.5.1. Files affecting the binary package
|
|
11.5.2. Files affecting the build process
|
|
11.5.3. Files affecting nothing at all
|
|
|
|
11.6. work*
|
|
11.7. files/*
|
|
|
|
12. Programming in Makefiles
|
|
|
|
12.1. Caveats
|
|
12.2. Makefile variables
|
|
|
|
12.2.1. Naming conventions
|
|
|
|
12.3. Code snippets
|
|
|
|
12.3.1. Adding things to a list
|
|
12.3.2. Converting an internal list into an external list
|
|
12.3.3. Passing variables to a shell command
|
|
12.3.4. Quoting guideline
|
|
12.3.5. Workaround for a bug in BSD Make
|
|
|
|
13. PLIST issues
|
|
|
|
13.1. RCS ID
|
|
13.2. Semi-automatic PLIST generation
|
|
13.3. Tweaking output of make print-PLIST
|
|
13.4. Variable substitution in PLIST
|
|
13.5. Man page compression
|
|
13.6. Changing PLIST source with PLIST_SRC
|
|
13.7. Platform-specific and differing PLISTs
|
|
13.8. Sharing directories between packages
|
|
|
|
14. Buildlink methodology
|
|
|
|
14.1. Converting packages to use buildlink3
|
|
14.2. Writing buildlink3.mk files
|
|
|
|
14.2.1. Anatomy of a buildlink3.mk file
|
|
14.2.2. Updating BUILDLINK_API_DEPENDS.pkg in buildlink3.mk files
|
|
|
|
14.3. Writing builtin.mk files
|
|
|
|
14.3.1. Anatomy of a builtin.mk file
|
|
14.3.2. Global preferences for native or pkgsrc software
|
|
|
|
15. The pkginstall framework
|
|
|
|
15.1. Files and directories outside the installation prefix
|
|
|
|
15.1.1. Directory manipulation
|
|
15.1.2. File manipulation
|
|
|
|
15.2. Configuration files
|
|
|
|
15.2.1. How PKG_SYSCONFDIR is set
|
|
15.2.2. Telling the software where configuration files are
|
|
15.2.3. Patching installations
|
|
15.2.4. Disabling handling of configuration files
|
|
|
|
15.3. System startup scripts
|
|
|
|
15.3.1. Disabling handling of system startup scripts
|
|
|
|
15.4. System users and groups
|
|
15.5. System shells
|
|
|
|
15.5.1. Disabling shell registration
|
|
|
|
15.6. Fonts
|
|
|
|
15.6.1. Disabling automatic update of the fonts databases
|
|
|
|
16. Options handling
|
|
|
|
16.1. Global default options
|
|
16.2. Converting packages to use bsd.options.mk
|
|
16.3. Option Names
|
|
16.4. Determining the options of dependencies
|
|
|
|
17. The build process
|
|
|
|
17.1. Introduction
|
|
17.2. Program location
|
|
17.3. Directories used during the build process
|
|
17.4. Running a phase
|
|
17.5. The fetch phase
|
|
|
|
17.5.1. What to fetch and where to get it from
|
|
17.5.2. How are the files fetched?
|
|
|
|
17.6. The checksum phase
|
|
17.7. The extract phase
|
|
17.8. The patch phase
|
|
17.9. The tools phase
|
|
17.10. The wrapper phase
|
|
17.11. The configure phase
|
|
17.12. The build phase
|
|
17.13. The test phase
|
|
17.14. The install phase
|
|
17.15. The package phase
|
|
17.16. Cleaning up
|
|
17.17. Other helpful targets
|
|
|
|
18. Tools needed for building or running
|
|
|
|
18.1. Tools for pkgsrc builds
|
|
18.2. Tools needed by packages
|
|
18.3. Tools provided by platforms
|
|
18.4. Questions regarding the tools
|
|
|
|
19. Making your package work
|
|
|
|
19.1. General operation
|
|
|
|
19.1.1. Portability of packages
|
|
19.1.2. How to pull in user-settable variables from ???
|
|
19.1.3. User interaction
|
|
19.1.4. Handling licenses
|
|
19.1.5. Restricted packages
|
|
19.1.6. Handling dependencies
|
|
19.1.7. Handling conflicts with other packages
|
|
19.1.8. Packages that cannot or should not be built
|
|
19.1.9. Packages which should not be deleted, once installed
|
|
19.1.10. Handling packages with security problems
|
|
19.1.11. How to handle incrementing versions when fixing an existing
|
|
package
|
|
19.1.12. Substituting variable text in the package files (the SUBST
|
|
framework)
|
|
|
|
19.2. Fixing problems in the fetch phase
|
|
|
|
19.2.1. Packages whose distfiles aren't available for plain downloading
|
|
19.2.2. How to handle modified distfiles with the 'old' name
|
|
|
|
19.3. Fixing problems in the configure phase
|
|
|
|
19.3.1. Shared libraries - libtool
|
|
19.3.2. Using libtool on GNU packages that already support libtool
|
|
19.3.3. GNU Autoconf/Automake
|
|
|
|
19.4. Programming languages
|
|
|
|
19.4.1. C, C++, and Fortran
|
|
19.4.2. Java
|
|
19.4.3. Packages containing perl scripts
|
|
19.4.4. Other programming languages
|
|
|
|
19.5. Fixing problems in the build phase
|
|
|
|
19.5.1. Compiling C and C++ code conditionally
|
|
19.5.2. How to handle compiler bugs
|
|
19.5.3. Undefined reference to ...
|
|
19.5.4. Running out of memory
|
|
|
|
19.6. Fixing problems in the install phase
|
|
|
|
19.6.1. Creating needed directories
|
|
19.6.2. Where to install documentation
|
|
19.6.3. Installing highscore files
|
|
19.6.4. Adding DESTDIR support to packages
|
|
19.6.5. Packages with hardcoded paths to other interpreters
|
|
19.6.6. Packages installing perl modules
|
|
19.6.7. Packages installing info files
|
|
19.6.8. Packages installing man pages
|
|
19.6.9. Packages installing GConf data files
|
|
19.6.10. Packages installing scrollkeeper/rarian data files
|
|
19.6.11. Packages installing X11 fonts
|
|
19.6.12. Packages installing GTK2 modules
|
|
19.6.13. Packages installing SGML or XML data
|
|
19.6.14. Packages installing extensions to the MIME database
|
|
19.6.15. Packages using intltool
|
|
19.6.16. Packages installing startup scripts
|
|
19.6.17. Packages installing TeX modules
|
|
19.6.18. Packages supporting running binaries in emulation
|
|
19.6.19. Packages installing hicolor theme icons
|
|
19.6.20. Packages installing desktop files
|
|
|
|
19.7. Marking packages as having problems
|
|
|
|
20. Debugging
|
|
21. Submitting and Committing
|
|
|
|
21.1. Submitting binary packages
|
|
21.2. Submitting source packages (for non-NetBSD-developers)
|
|
21.3. General notes when adding, updating, or removing packages
|
|
21.4. Committing: Importing a package into CVS
|
|
21.5. Updating a package to a newer version
|
|
21.6. Moving a package in pkgsrc
|
|
|
|
22. Frequently Asked Questions
|
|
23. GNOME packaging and porting
|
|
|
|
23.1. Meta packages
|
|
23.2. Packaging a GNOME application
|
|
23.3. Updating GNOME to a newer version
|
|
23.4. Patching guidelines
|
|
|
|
Chapter 10. Creating a new pkgsrc package from scratch
|
|
|
|
Table of Contents
|
|
|
|
10.1. Common types of packages
|
|
|
|
10.1.1. Perl modules
|
|
10.1.2. KDE applications
|
|
10.1.3. Python modules and programs
|
|
|
|
10.2. Examples
|
|
|
|
10.2.1. How the www/nvu package came into pkgsrc
|
|
|
|
When you find a package that is not yet in pkgsrc, you most likely have a URL
|
|
from where you can download the source code. Starting with this URL, creating a
|
|
package involves only a few steps.
|
|
|
|
1. First, install the packages pkgtools/url2pkg and pkgtools/pkglint.
|
|
|
|
2. Then, choose one of the top-level directories as the category in which you
|
|
want to place your package. You can also create a directory of your own
|
|
(maybe called local). In that category directory, create another directory
|
|
for your package and change into it.
|
|
|
|
3. Run the program url2pkg, which will ask you for a URL. Enter the URL of the
|
|
distribution file (in most cases a .tar.gz file) and watch how the basic
|
|
ingredients of your package are created automatically. The distribution
|
|
file is extracted automatically to fill in some details in the Makefile
|
|
that would otherwise have to be done manually.
|
|
|
|
4. Examine the extracted files to determine the dependencies of your package.
|
|
Ideally, this is mentioned in some README file, but things may differ. For
|
|
each of these dependencies, look where it exists in pkgsrc, and if there is
|
|
a file called buildlink3.mk in that directory, add a line to your package
|
|
Makefile which includes that file just before the last line. If the
|
|
buildlink3.mk file does not exist, add a DEPENDS line to the Makefile,
|
|
which specifies the version of the dependency and where it can be found in
|
|
pkgsrc. This line should be placed in the third paragraph. If the
|
|
dependency is only needed for building the package, but not when using it,
|
|
use BUILD_DEPENDS instead of DEPENDS. Your package may then look like this:
|
|
|
|
[...]
|
|
|
|
BUILD_DEPENDS+= lua>=5.0:../../lang/lua
|
|
DEPENDS+= screen-[0-9]*:../../misc/screen
|
|
DEPENDS+= screen>=4.0:../../misc/screen
|
|
|
|
[...]
|
|
|
|
.include "../../category/package/buildlink3.mk"
|
|
.include "../../devel/glib2/buildlink3.mk"
|
|
.include "../../mk/bsd.pkg.mk"
|
|
|
|
5. Run pkglint to see what things still need to be done to make your package a
|
|
"good" one. If you don't know what pkglint's warnings want to tell you, try
|
|
pkglint --explain or pkglint -e, which outputs additional explanations.
|
|
|
|
6. In many cases the package is not yet ready to build. You can find
|
|
instructions for the most common cases in the next section, Section 10.1,
|
|
"Common types of packages". After you have followed the instructions over
|
|
there, you can hopefully continue here.
|
|
|
|
7. Run bmake clean to clean the working directory from the extracted files.
|
|
Besides these files, a lot of cache files and other system information has
|
|
been saved in the working directory, which may become wrong after you
|
|
edited the Makefile.
|
|
|
|
8. Now, run bmake to build the package. For the various things that can go
|
|
wrong in this phase, consult Chapter 19, Making your package work.
|
|
|
|
9. When the package builds fine, the next step is to install the package. Run
|
|
bmake install and hope that everything works.
|
|
|
|
10. Up to now, the file PLIST, which contains a list of the files that are
|
|
installed by the package, is nearly empty. Run bmake print-PLIST >PLIST to
|
|
generate a probably correct list. Check the file using your preferred text
|
|
editor to see if the list of files looks plausible.
|
|
|
|
11. Run pkglint again to see if the generated PLIST contains garbage or not.
|
|
|
|
12. When you ran bmake install, the package has been registered in the database
|
|
of installed files, but with an empty list of files. To fix this, run bmake
|
|
deinstall and bmake install again. Now the package is registered with the
|
|
list of files from PLIST.
|
|
|
|
13. Run bmake package to create a binary package from the set of installed
|
|
files.
|
|
|
|
10.1. Common types of packages
|
|
|
|
10.1.1. Perl modules
|
|
|
|
Simple Perl modules are handled automatically by url2pkg, including
|
|
dependencies.
|
|
|
|
10.1.2. KDE applications
|
|
|
|
KDE applications should always include meta-pkgs/kde3/kde3.mk, which contains
|
|
numerous settings that are typical of KDE packages.
|
|
|
|
10.1.3. Python modules and programs
|
|
|
|
Python modules and programs packages are easily created using a set of
|
|
predefined variables.
|
|
|
|
Most Python packages use either "distutils" or easy-setup ("eggs"). If the
|
|
software uses "distutils", set the PYDISTUTILSPKG variable to "yes" so pkgsrc
|
|
will make use of this framework. "distutils" uses a script called setup.py, if
|
|
the "distutils" driver is not called setup.py, set the PYSETUP variable to the
|
|
name of the script.
|
|
|
|
If the default Python versions are not supported by the software, set the
|
|
PYTHON_VERSIONS_ACCEPTED variable to the Python versions the software is known
|
|
to work with, from the most recent to the older one, e.g.
|
|
|
|
PYTHON_VERSIONS_ACCEPTED= 25 24 23
|
|
|
|
If the packaged software is a Python module, include "../../lang/python/
|
|
extension.mk". In this case, the package directory should be called
|
|
"py-software" and PKGNAME should be set to "${PYPKGPREFIX}-${DISTNAME}", e.g.
|
|
|
|
DISTNAME= foopymodule-1.2.10
|
|
PKGNAME= ${PYPKGPREFIX}-${DISTNAME}
|
|
|
|
If it is an application, also include "../../lang/python/application.mk" before
|
|
"extension.mk".
|
|
|
|
If the packaged software, either it is an application or a module, is
|
|
egg-aware, you only need to include "../../lang/python/egg.mk".
|
|
|
|
In order to correctly set the path to the Python interpreter, use the
|
|
REPLACE_PYTHON variable and set it to the list of files that must be corrected.
|
|
For example :
|
|
|
|
REPLACE_PYTHON= ${WRKSRC}/*.py
|
|
|
|
10.2. Examples
|
|
|
|
10.2.1. How the www/nvu package came into pkgsrc
|
|
|
|
10.2.1.1. The initial package
|
|
|
|
Looking at the file pkgsrc/doc/TODO, I saw that the "nvu" package has not yet
|
|
been imported into pkgsrc. As the description says it has to do with the web,
|
|
the obvious choice for the category is "www".
|
|
|
|
$ mkdir www/nvu
|
|
$ cd www/nvu
|
|
|
|
The web site says that the sources are available as a tar file, so I fed that
|
|
URL to the url2pkg program:
|
|
|
|
$ url2pkg http://cvs.nvu.com/download/nvu-1.0-sources.tar.bz2
|
|
|
|
My editor popped up, and I added a PKGNAME line below the DISTNAME line, as the
|
|
package name should not have the word "sources" in it. I also filled in the
|
|
MAINTAINER, HOMEPAGE and COMMENT fields. Then the package Makefile looked like
|
|
that:
|
|
|
|
# $NetBSD$
|
|
#
|
|
|
|
DISTNAME= nvu-1.0-sources
|
|
PKGNAME= nvu-1.0
|
|
CATEGORIES= www
|
|
MASTER_SITES= http://cvs.nvu.com/download/
|
|
EXTRACT_SUFX= .tar.bz2
|
|
|
|
MAINTAINER= rillig@NetBSD.org
|
|
HOMEPAGE= http://cvs.nvu.com/
|
|
COMMENT= Web Authoring System
|
|
|
|
# url2pkg-marker (please do not remove this line.)
|
|
.include "../../mk/bsd.pkg.mk"
|
|
|
|
Then, I quit the editor and watched pkgsrc downloading a large source archive:
|
|
|
|
url2pkg> Running "make makesum" ...
|
|
=> Required installed package digest>=20010302: digest-20060826 found
|
|
=> Fetching nvu-1.0-sources.tar.bz2
|
|
Requesting http://cvs.nvu.com/download/nvu-1.0-sources.tar.bz2
|
|
100% |*************************************| 28992 KB 150.77 KB/s00:00 ETA
|
|
29687976 bytes retrieved in 03:12 (150.77 KB/s)
|
|
url2pkg> Running "make extract" ...
|
|
=> Required installed package digest>=20010302: digest-20060826 found
|
|
=> Checksum SHA1 OK for nvu-1.0-sources.tar.bz2
|
|
=> Checksum RMD160 OK for nvu-1.0-sources.tar.bz2
|
|
work.bacc -> /tmp/roland/pkgsrc/www/nvu/work.bacc
|
|
===> Installing dependencies for nvu-1.0
|
|
===> Overriding tools for nvu-1.0
|
|
===> Extracting for nvu-1.0
|
|
url2pkg> Adjusting the Makefile.
|
|
|
|
Remember to correct CATEGORIES, HOMEPAGE, COMMENT, and DESCR when you're done!
|
|
|
|
Good luck! (See pkgsrc/doc/pkgsrc.txt for some more help :-)
|
|
|
|
10.2.1.2. Fixing all kinds of problems to make the package work
|
|
|
|
Now that the package has been extracted, let's see what's inside it. The
|
|
package has a README.txt, but that only says something about mozilla, so it's
|
|
probably useless for seeing what dependencies this package has. But since there
|
|
is a GNU configure script in the package, let's hope that it will complain
|
|
about everything it needs.
|
|
|
|
$ bmake
|
|
=> Required installed package digest>=20010302: digest-20060826 found
|
|
=> Checksum SHA1 OK for nvu-1.0-sources.tar.bz2
|
|
=> Checksum RMD160 OK for nvu-1.0-sources.tar.bz2
|
|
===> Patching for nvu-1.0
|
|
===> Creating toolchain wrappers for nvu-1.0
|
|
===> Configuring for nvu-1.0
|
|
[...]
|
|
configure: error: Perl 5.004 or higher is required.
|
|
[...]
|
|
WARNING: Please add USE_TOOLS+=perl to the package Makefile.
|
|
[...]
|
|
|
|
That worked quite well. So I opened the package Makefile in my editor, and
|
|
since it already has a USE_TOOLS line, I just appended "perl" to it. Since the
|
|
dependencies of the package have changed now, and since a perl wrapper is
|
|
automatically installed in the "tools" phase, I need to build the package from
|
|
scratch.
|
|
|
|
$ bmake clean
|
|
===> Cleaning for nvu-1.0
|
|
$ bmake
|
|
[...]
|
|
*** /tmp/roland/pkgsrc/www/nvu/work.bacc/.tools/bin/make is not \
|
|
GNU Make. You will not be able to build Mozilla without GNU Make.
|
|
[...]
|
|
|
|
So I added "gmake" to the USE_TOOLS line and tried again (from scratch).
|
|
|
|
[...]
|
|
checking for GTK - version >= 1.2.0... no
|
|
*** Could not run GTK test program, checking why...
|
|
[...]
|
|
|
|
Now to the other dependencies. The first question is: Where is the GTK package
|
|
hidden in pkgsrc?
|
|
|
|
$ echo ../../*/gtk*
|
|
[many packages ...]
|
|
$ echo ../../*/gtk
|
|
../../x11/gtk
|
|
$ echo ../../*/gtk2
|
|
../../x11/gtk2
|
|
$ echo ../../*/gtk2/bui*
|
|
../../x11/gtk2/buildlink3.mk
|
|
|
|
The first try was definitely too broad. The second one had exactly one result,
|
|
which is very good. But there is one pitfall with GNOME packages. Before GNOME
|
|
2 had been released, there were already many GNOME 1 packages in pkgsrc. To be
|
|
able to continue to use these packages, the GNOME 2 packages were imported as
|
|
separate packages, and their names usually have a "2" appended. So I checked
|
|
whether this was the case here, and indeed it was.
|
|
|
|
Since the GTK2 package has a buildlink3.mk file, adding the dependency is very
|
|
easy. I just inserted an .include line before the last line of the package
|
|
Makefile, so that it now looks like this:
|
|
|
|
[...]
|
|
.include "../../x11/gtk2/buildlink3.mk"
|
|
.include "../../mk/bsd.pkg.mk
|
|
|
|
After another bmake clean && bmake, the answer was:
|
|
|
|
[...]
|
|
checking for gtk-config... /home/roland/pkg/bin/gtk-config
|
|
checking for GTK - version >= 1.2.0... no
|
|
*** Could not run GTK test program, checking why...
|
|
*** The test program failed to compile or link. See the file config.log for the
|
|
*** exact error that occured. This usually means GTK was incorrectly installed
|
|
*** or that you have moved GTK since it was installed. In the latter case, you
|
|
*** may want to edit the gtk-config script: /home/roland/pkg/bin/gtk-config
|
|
configure: error: Test for GTK failed.
|
|
[...]
|
|
|
|
In this particular case, the assumption that "every package prefers GNOME 2"
|
|
had been wrong. The first of the lines above told me that this package really
|
|
wanted to have the GNOME 1 version of GTK. If the package had looked for GTK2,
|
|
it would have looked for pkg-config instead of gtk-config. So I changed the x11
|
|
/gtk2 to x11/gtk in the package Makefile, and tried again.
|
|
|
|
[...]
|
|
cc -o xpidl.o -c -DOSTYPE=\"NetBSD3\" -DOSARCH=\"NetBSD\" -I../../../dist/include/xpcom -I../../../dist/include -I/tmp/roland/pkgsrc/www/nvu/work.bacc/mozilla/dist/include/nspr -I/usr/X11R6/include -fPIC -DPIC -I/home/roland/pkg/include -I/usr/include -I/usr/X11R6/include -Wall -W -Wno-unused -Wpointer-arith -Wcast-align -Wno-long-long -pedantic -O2 -I/home/roland/pkg/include -I/usr/include -Dunix -pthread -pipe -DDEBUG -D_DEBUG -DDEBUG_roland -DTRACING -g -I/home/roland/pkg/include/glib/glib-1.2 -I/home/roland/pkg/lib/glib/include -I/usr/pkg/include/orbit-1.0 -I/home/roland/pkg/include -I/usr/include -I/usr/X11R6/include -include ../../../mozilla-config.h -DMOZILLA_CLIENT -Wp,-MD,.deps/xpidl.pp xpidl.c
|
|
In file included from xpidl.c:42:
|
|
xpidl.h:53:24: libIDL/IDL.h: No such file or directory
|
|
In file included from xpidl.c:42:
|
|
xpidl.h:132: error: parse error before "IDL_ns"
|
|
[...]
|
|
|
|
The package still does not find all of its dependencies. Now the question is:
|
|
Which package provides the libIDL/IDL.h header file?
|
|
|
|
$ echo ../../*/*idl*
|
|
../../devel/py-idle ../../wip/idled ../../x11/acidlaunch
|
|
$ echo ../../*/*IDL*
|
|
../../net/libIDL
|
|
|
|
Let's take the one from the second try. So I included the ../../net/libIDL/
|
|
buildlink3.mk file and tried again. But the error didn't change. After digging
|
|
through some of the code, I concluded that the build process of the package was
|
|
broken and couldn't have ever worked, but since the Mozilla source tree is
|
|
quite large, I didn't want to fix it. So I added the following to the package
|
|
Makefile and tried again:
|
|
|
|
CPPFLAGS+= -I${BUILDLINK_PREFIX.libIDL}/include/libIDL-2.0
|
|
BUILDLINK_TRANSFORM+= -l:IDL:IDL-2
|
|
|
|
The latter line is needed because the package expects the library libIDL.so,
|
|
but only libIDL-2.so is available. So I told the compiler wrapper to rewrite
|
|
that on the fly.
|
|
|
|
The next problem was related to a recent change of the FreeType interface. I
|
|
looked up in www/seamonkey which patch files were relevant for this issue and
|
|
copied them to the patches directory. Then I retried, fixed the patches so that
|
|
they applied cleanly and retried again. This time, everything worked.
|
|
|
|
10.2.1.3. Installing the package
|
|
|
|
$ bmake CHECK_FILES=no install
|
|
[...]
|
|
$ bmake print-PLIST >PLIST
|
|
$ bmake deinstall
|
|
$ bmake install
|
|
|
|
Chapter 11. Package components - files, directories and contents
|
|
|
|
Table of Contents
|
|
|
|
11.1. Makefile
|
|
11.2. distinfo
|
|
11.3. patches/*
|
|
|
|
11.3.1. Structure of a single patch file
|
|
11.3.2. Creating patch files
|
|
11.3.3. Sources where the patch files come from
|
|
11.3.4. Patching guidelines
|
|
11.3.5. Feedback to the author
|
|
|
|
11.4. Other mandatory files
|
|
11.5. Optional files
|
|
|
|
11.5.1. Files affecting the binary package
|
|
11.5.2. Files affecting the build process
|
|
11.5.3. Files affecting nothing at all
|
|
|
|
11.6. work*
|
|
11.7. files/*
|
|
|
|
Whenever you're preparing a package, there are a number of files involved which
|
|
are described in the following sections.
|
|
|
|
11.1. Makefile
|
|
|
|
Building, installation and creation of a binary package are all controlled by
|
|
the package's Makefile. The Makefile describes various things about a package,
|
|
for example from where to get it, how to configure, build, and install it.
|
|
|
|
A package Makefile contains several sections that describe the package.
|
|
|
|
In the first section there are the following variables, which should appear
|
|
exactly in the order given here. The order and grouping of the variables is
|
|
mostly historical and has no further meaning.
|
|
|
|
* DISTNAME is the basename of the distribution file to be downloaded from the
|
|
package's website.
|
|
|
|
* PKGNAME is the name of the package, as used by pkgsrc. You only need to
|
|
provide it if DISTNAME (which is the default) is not a good name for the
|
|
package in pkgsrc. Usually it is the pkgsrc directory name together with
|
|
the version number. It must match the regular expression ^[A-Za-z0-9]
|
|
[A-Za-z0-9-_.+]*$, that is, it starts with a letter or digit, and contains
|
|
only letters, digits, dashes, underscores, dots and plus signs.
|
|
|
|
* SVR4_PKGNAME is the name of the package file to create if the PKGNAME isn't
|
|
unique on a SVR4 system. The default is PKGNAME, which may be shortened
|
|
when you use pkgtools/gensolpkg. Only add SVR4_PKGNAME if PKGNAME does not
|
|
produce an unique package name on a SVR4 system. The length of SVR4_PKGNAME
|
|
is limited to 5 characters.
|
|
|
|
* CATEGORIES is a list of categories which the package fits in. You can
|
|
choose any of the top-level directories of pkgsrc for it.
|
|
|
|
Currently the following values are available for CATEGORIES. If more than
|
|
one is used, they need to be separated by spaces:
|
|
|
|
archivers cross geography meta-pkgs security
|
|
audio databases graphics misc shells
|
|
benchmarks devel ham multimedia sysutils
|
|
biology editors inputmethod net textproc
|
|
cad emulators lang news time
|
|
chat finance mail parallel wm
|
|
comms fonts math pkgtools www
|
|
converters games mbone print x11
|
|
|
|
* MASTER_SITES, DYNAMIC_MASTER_SITES, DIST_SUBDIR, EXTRACT_SUFX and DISTFILES
|
|
are discussed in detail in Section 17.5, "The fetch phase".
|
|
|
|
The second section contains information about separately downloaded patches, if
|
|
any.
|
|
|
|
* PATCHFILES: Name(s) of additional files that contain distribution patches.
|
|
There is no default. pkgsrc will look for them at PATCH_SITES. They will
|
|
automatically be uncompressed before patching if the names end with .gz or
|
|
.Z.
|
|
|
|
* PATCH_SITES: Primary location(s) for distribution patch files (see
|
|
PATCHFILES below) if not found locally.
|
|
|
|
The third section contains the following variables.
|
|
|
|
* MAINTAINER is the email address of the person who feels responsible for
|
|
this package, and who is most likely to look at problems or questions
|
|
regarding this package which have been reported with send-pr(1). Other
|
|
developers may contact the MAINTAINER before making changes to the package,
|
|
but are not required to do so. When packaging a new program, set MAINTAINER
|
|
to yourself. If you really can't maintain the package for future updates,
|
|
set it to <pkgsrc-users@NetBSD.org>.
|
|
|
|
* OWNER should be used instead of MAINTAINER when you do not want other
|
|
developers to update or change the package without contacting you first. A
|
|
package Makefile should contain one of MAINTAINER or OWNER, but not both.
|
|
|
|
* HOMEPAGE is a URL where users can find more information about the package.
|
|
|
|
* COMMENT is a one-line description of the package (should not include the
|
|
package name).
|
|
|
|
Other variables that affect the build:
|
|
|
|
* WRKSRC: The directory where the interesting distribution files of the
|
|
package are found. The default is ${WRKDIR}/${DISTNAME}, which works for
|
|
most packages.
|
|
|
|
If a package doesn't create a subdirectory for itself (most GNU software
|
|
does, for instance), but extracts itself in the current directory, you
|
|
should set WRKSRC=${WRKDIR}.
|
|
|
|
If a package doesn't create a subdirectory with the name of DISTNAME but
|
|
some different name, set WRKSRC to point to the proper name in ${WRKDIR},
|
|
for example WRKSRC=${WRKDIR}/${DISTNAME}/unix. See lang/tcl and x11/tk for
|
|
other examples.
|
|
|
|
The name of the working directory created by pkgsrc is taken from the
|
|
WRKDIR_BASENAME variable. By default, its value is work. If you want to use
|
|
the same pkgsrc tree for building different kinds of binary packages, you
|
|
can change the variable according to your needs. Two other variables handle
|
|
common cases of setting WRKDIR_BASENAME individually. If OBJHOSTNAME is
|
|
defined in mk.conf, the first component of the host's name is attached to
|
|
the directory name. If OBJMACHINE is defined, the platform name is
|
|
attached, which might look like work.i386 or work.sparc.
|
|
|
|
Please pay attention to the following gotchas:
|
|
|
|
* Add MANCOMPRESSED if man pages are installed in compressed form by the
|
|
package. For packages using BSD-style makefiles which honor MANZ, there is
|
|
MANCOMPRESSED_IF_MANZ.
|
|
|
|
* Replace /usr/local with "${PREFIX}" in all files (see patches, below).
|
|
|
|
* If the package installs any info files, see Section 19.6.7, "Packages
|
|
installing info files".
|
|
|
|
11.2. distinfo
|
|
|
|
The distinfo file contains the message digest, or checksum, of each distfile
|
|
needed for the package. This ensures that the distfiles retrieved from the
|
|
Internet have not been corrupted during transfer or altered by a malign force
|
|
to introduce a security hole. Due to recent rumor about weaknesses of digest
|
|
algorithms, all distfiles are protected using both SHA1 and RMD160 message
|
|
digests, as well as the file size.
|
|
|
|
The distinfo file also contains the checksums for all the patches found in the
|
|
patches directory (see Section 11.3, "patches/*").
|
|
|
|
To regenerate the distinfo file, use the make makedistinfo or make mdi command.
|
|
|
|
Some packages have different sets of distfiles depending on the platform, for
|
|
example www/navigator). These are kept in the same distinfo file and care
|
|
should be taken when upgrading such a package to ensure distfile information is
|
|
not lost.
|
|
|
|
11.3. patches/*
|
|
|
|
Many packages still don't work out-of-the box on the various platforms that are
|
|
supported by pkgsrc. Therefore, a number of custom patch files are needed to
|
|
make the package work. These patch files are found in the patches/ directory.
|
|
|
|
In the patch phase, these patches are applied to the files in WRKSRC directory
|
|
after extracting them, in alphabetic order, so patch-aa is applied before
|
|
patch-ab, etc.
|
|
|
|
11.3.1. Structure of a single patch file
|
|
|
|
The patch-* files should be in diff -bu format, and apply without a fuzz to
|
|
avoid problems. (To force patches to apply with fuzz you can set
|
|
PATCH_FUZZ_FACTOR=-F2). Furthermore, each patch should contain only changes for
|
|
a single file, and no file should be patched by more than one patch file. This
|
|
helps to keep future modifications simple.
|
|
|
|
Each patch file is structured as follows: In the first line, there is the RCS
|
|
Id of the patch itself. The second line should be empty for aesthetic reasons.
|
|
After that, there should be a comment for each change that the patch does.
|
|
There are a number of standard cases:
|
|
|
|
* Patches that replace the == operator for test(1) with = in shell scripts
|
|
are so common that they don't need a comment at all.
|
|
|
|
* Patches for commonly known vulnerabilities should mention the vulnerability
|
|
ID (CAN, CVE).
|
|
|
|
* Patches that change source code should mention the platform and other
|
|
environment (for example, the compiler) that the patch is needed for.
|
|
|
|
In all other cases, the patch should be commented so that any developer who
|
|
knows the code of the application can make some use of the patch. Special care
|
|
should be taken for the upstream developers, since we generally want that they
|
|
accept our patches, so we have less work in the future.
|
|
|
|
11.3.2. Creating patch files
|
|
|
|
One important thing to mention is to pay attention that no RCS IDs get stored
|
|
in the patch files, as these will cause problems when later checked into the
|
|
NetBSD CVS tree. Use the pkgdiff command from the pkgtools/pkgdiff package to
|
|
avoid these problems.
|
|
|
|
For even more automation, we recommend using mkpatches from the same package to
|
|
make a whole set of patches. You just have to backup files before you edit them
|
|
to filename.orig, e.g. with cp -p filename filename.orig or, easier, by using
|
|
pkgvi again from the same package. If you upgrade a package this way, you can
|
|
easily compare the new set of patches with the previously existing one with
|
|
patchdiff. Copy the patches you want to use or update from the work/.newpatches
|
|
directory to patches/.
|
|
|
|
When you have finished a package, remember to generate the checksums for the
|
|
patch files by using the make makepatchsum command, see Section 11.2,
|
|
"distinfo".
|
|
|
|
When adding a patch that corrects a problem in the distfile (rather than e.g.
|
|
enforcing pkgsrc's view of where man pages should go), send the patch as a bug
|
|
report to the maintainer. This benefits non-pkgsrc users of the package, and
|
|
usually makes it possible to remove the patch in future version.
|
|
|
|
The file names of the patch files are usually of the form patch-[a-z][a-z].
|
|
|
|
11.3.3. Sources where the patch files come from
|
|
|
|
If you want to share patches between multiple packages in pkgsrc, e.g. because
|
|
they use the same distfiles, set PATCHDIR to the path where the patch files can
|
|
be found, e.g.:
|
|
|
|
PATCHDIR= ${.CURDIR}/../xemacs/patches
|
|
|
|
Patch files that are distributed by the author or other maintainers can be
|
|
listed in PATCHFILES.
|
|
|
|
If it is desired to store any patches that should not be committed into pkgsrc,
|
|
they can be kept outside the pkgsrc tree in the $LOCALPATCHES directory. The
|
|
directory tree there is expected to have the same "category/package" structure
|
|
as pkgsrc, and patches are expected to be stored inside these dirs (also known
|
|
as $LOCALPATCHES/$PKGPATH). For example, if you want to keep a private patch
|
|
for pkgsrc/graphics/png, keep it in $LOCALPATCHES/graphics/png/mypatch. All
|
|
files in the named directory are expected to be patch files, and they are
|
|
applied after pkgsrc patches are applied.
|
|
|
|
11.3.4. Patching guidelines
|
|
|
|
When fixing a portability issue in the code do not use preprocessor magic to
|
|
check for the current operating system nor platform. Doing so hurts portability
|
|
to other platforms because the OS-specific details are not abstracted
|
|
appropriately.
|
|
|
|
The general rule to follow is: instead of checking for the operating system the
|
|
application is being built on, check for the specific features you need. For
|
|
example, instead of assuming that kqueue is available under NetBSD and using
|
|
the __NetBSD__ macro to conditionalize kqueue support, add a check that detects
|
|
kqueue itself ? yes, this generally involves patching the configure script.
|
|
There is absolutely nothing that prevents some OSes from adopting interfaces
|
|
from other OSes (e.g. Linux implementing kqueue), something that the above
|
|
checks cannot take into account.
|
|
|
|
Of course, checking for features generally involves more work on the
|
|
developer's side, but the resulting changes are cleaner and there are chances
|
|
they will work on many other platforms. Not to mention that there are higher
|
|
chances of being later integrated into the mainstream sources. Remember: It
|
|
doesn't work unless it is right!
|
|
|
|
Some typical examples:
|
|
|
|
Table 11.1. Patching examples
|
|
|
|
+-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------+
|
|
| Where | Incorrect | Correct |
|
|
|---------+--------------------------+------------------------------------------------------|
|
|
| |case ${target_os} in | |
|
|
|configure|netbsd*) have_kvm=yes ;; |AC_CHECK_LIB(kvm, kvm_open, have_kvm=yes, have_kvm=no)|
|
|
|script |*) have_kvm=no ;; | |
|
|
| |esac | |
|
|
|---------+--------------------------+------------------------------------------------------|
|
|
|C source |#if defined(__NetBSD__) |#if defined(HAVE_SYS_EVENT_H) |
|
|
|file |# include <sys/event.h> |# include <sys/event.h> |
|
|
| |#endif |#endif |
|
|
|---------+--------------------------+------------------------------------------------------|
|
|
| |int |int |
|
|
| |monitor_file(...) |monitor_file(...) |
|
|
| |{ |{ |
|
|
| |#if defined(__NetBSD__) |#if defined(HAVE_KQUEUE) |
|
|
|C source | int fd = kqueue();| int fd = kqueue(); |
|
|
|file | ... | ... |
|
|
| |#else |#else |
|
|
| | ... | ... |
|
|
| |#endif |#endif |
|
|
| |} |} |
|
|
+-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------+
|
|
|
|
|
|
For more information, please read the Making packager-friendly software article
|
|
(part 1, part 2). It summarizes multiple details on how to make software easier
|
|
to package; all the suggestions in it were collected from our experience in
|
|
pkgsrc work, so they are possibly helpful when creating patches too.
|
|
|
|
11.3.5. Feedback to the author
|
|
|
|
Always, always, always feed back any portability fixes or improvements you do
|
|
to a package to the mainstream developers. This is the only way to get their
|
|
attention on portability issues and to ensure that future versions can be built
|
|
out-of-the box on NetBSD. Furthermore, any user that gets newer distfiles will
|
|
get the fixes straight from the packaged code.
|
|
|
|
This generally involves cleaning up the patches (because sometimes the patches
|
|
that are added to pkgsrc are quick hacks), filling bug reports in the
|
|
appropriate trackers for the projects and working with the mainstream authors
|
|
to accept your changes. It is extremely important that you do it so that the
|
|
packages in pkgsrc are kept simple and thus further changes can be done without
|
|
much hassle.
|
|
|
|
Support the idea of free software!
|
|
|
|
11.4. Other mandatory files
|
|
|
|
DESCR
|
|
|
|
A multi-line description of the piece of software. This should include any
|
|
credits where they are due. Please bear in mind that others do not share
|
|
your sense of humour (or spelling idiosyncrasies), and that others will
|
|
read everything that you write here.
|
|
|
|
PLIST
|
|
|
|
This file governs the files that are installed on your system: all the
|
|
binaries, manual pages, etc. There are other directives which may be
|
|
entered in this file, to control the creation and deletion of directories,
|
|
and the location of inserted files. See Chapter 13, PLIST issues for more
|
|
information.
|
|
|
|
11.5. Optional files
|
|
|
|
11.5.1. Files affecting the binary package
|
|
|
|
INSTALL
|
|
|
|
This shell script is invoked twice by pkg_add(1). First time after package
|
|
extraction and before files are moved in place, the second time after the
|
|
files to install are moved in place. This can be used to do any custom
|
|
procedures not possible with @exec commands in PLIST. See pkg_add(1) and
|
|
pkg_create(1) for more information. See also Section 15.1, "Files and
|
|
directories outside the installation prefix".
|
|
|
|
DEINSTALL
|
|
|
|
This script is executed before and after any files are removed. It is this
|
|
script's responsibility to clean up any additional messy details around the
|
|
package's installation, since all pkg_delete knows is how to delete the
|
|
files created in the original distribution. See pkg_delete(1) and
|
|
pkg_create(1) for more information.
|
|
|
|
MESSAGE
|
|
|
|
This file is displayed after installation of the package. Useful for things
|
|
like legal notices on almost-free software and hints for updating config
|
|
files after installing modules for apache, PHP etc. Please note that you
|
|
can modify variables in it easily by using MESSAGE_SUBST in the package's
|
|
Makefile:
|
|
|
|
MESSAGE_SUBST+= SOMEVAR="somevalue"
|
|
|
|
replaces "${SOMEVAR}" with "somevalue" in MESSAGE. By default, substitution
|
|
is performed for PKGNAME, PKGBASE, PREFIX, LOCALBASE, X11PREFIX, X11BASE,
|
|
PKG_SYSCONFDIR, ROOT_GROUP, and ROOT_USER.
|
|
|
|
You can display a different or additional files by setting the MESSAGE_SRC
|
|
variable. Its default is MESSAGE, if the file exists.
|
|
|
|
ALTERNATIVES
|
|
|
|
FIXME: There is no documentation on the alternatives framework.
|
|
|
|
11.5.2. Files affecting the build process
|
|
|
|
Makefile.common
|
|
|
|
This file contains arbitrary things that could also go into a Makefile, but
|
|
its purpose is to be used by more than one package. This file should only
|
|
be used when the packages that will use the file are known in advance. For
|
|
other purposes it is often better to write a *.mk file and give it a good
|
|
name that describes what it does.
|
|
|
|
buildlink3.mk
|
|
|
|
This file contains the dependency information for the buildlink3 framework
|
|
(see Chapter 14, Buildlink methodology).
|
|
|
|
hacks.mk
|
|
|
|
This file contains workarounds for compiler bugs and similar things. It is
|
|
included automatically by the pkgsrc infrastructure, so you don't need an
|
|
extra .include line for it.
|
|
|
|
options.mk
|
|
|
|
This file contains the code for the package-specific options (see
|
|
Chapter 16, Options handling) that can be selected by the user. If a
|
|
package has only one or two options, it is equally acceptable to put the
|
|
code directly into the Makefile.
|
|
|
|
11.5.3. Files affecting nothing at all
|
|
|
|
README*
|
|
|
|
These files do not take place in the creation of a package and thus are
|
|
purely informative to the package developer.
|
|
|
|
TODO
|
|
|
|
This file contains things that need to be done to make the package even
|
|
better.
|
|
|
|
11.6. work*
|
|
|
|
When you type make, the distribution files are unpacked into the directory
|
|
denoted by WRKDIR. It can be removed by running make clean. Besides the
|
|
sources, this directory is also used to keep various timestamp files. The
|
|
directory gets removed completely on clean. The default is ${.CURDIR}/work or $
|
|
{.CURDIR}/work.${MACHINE_ARCH} if OBJMACHINE is set.
|
|
|
|
11.7. files/*
|
|
|
|
If you have any files that you wish to be placed in the package prior to
|
|
configuration or building, you could place these files here and use a ${CP}
|
|
command in the "pre-configure" target to achieve this. Alternatively, you could
|
|
simply diff the file against /dev/null and use the patch mechanism to manage
|
|
the creation of this file.
|
|
|
|
If you want to share files in this way with other packages, set the FILESDIR
|
|
variable to point to the other package's files directory, e.g.:
|
|
|
|
FILESDIR=${.CURDIR}/../xemacs/files
|
|
|
|
Chapter 12. Programming in Makefiles
|
|
|
|
Table of Contents
|
|
|
|
12.1. Caveats
|
|
12.2. Makefile variables
|
|
|
|
12.2.1. Naming conventions
|
|
|
|
12.3. Code snippets
|
|
|
|
12.3.1. Adding things to a list
|
|
12.3.2. Converting an internal list into an external list
|
|
12.3.3. Passing variables to a shell command
|
|
12.3.4. Quoting guideline
|
|
12.3.5. Workaround for a bug in BSD Make
|
|
|
|
Pkgsrc consists of many Makefile fragments, each of which forms a well-defined
|
|
part of the pkgsrc system. Using the make(1) system as a programming language
|
|
for a big system like pkgsrc requires some discipline to keep the code correct
|
|
and understandable.
|
|
|
|
The basic ingredients for Makefile programming are variables (which are
|
|
actually macros) and shell commands. Among these shell commands may even be
|
|
more complex ones like awk(1) programs. To make sure that every shell command
|
|
runs as intended it is necessary to quote all variables correctly when they are
|
|
used.
|
|
|
|
This chapter describes some patterns, that appear quite often in Makefiles,
|
|
including the pitfalls that come along with them.
|
|
|
|
12.1. Caveats
|
|
|
|
* When you are creating a file as a target of a rule, always write the data
|
|
to a temporary file first and finally rename that file. Otherwise there
|
|
might occur an error in the middle of generating the file, and when the
|
|
user runs make(1) for the second time, the file exists and will not be
|
|
regenerated properly. Example:
|
|
|
|
wrong:
|
|
@echo "line 1" > ${.TARGET}
|
|
@echo "line 2" >> ${.TARGET}
|
|
@false
|
|
|
|
correct:
|
|
@echo "line 1" > ${.TARGET}.tmp
|
|
@echo "line 2" >> ${.TARGET}.tmp
|
|
@false
|
|
@mv ${.TARGET}.tmp ${.TARGET}
|
|
|
|
When you run make wrong twice, the file wrong will exist, although there
|
|
was an error message in the first run. On the other hand, running make
|
|
correct gives an error message twice, as expected.
|
|
|
|
You might remember that make(1) sometimes removes ${.TARGET} in case of
|
|
error, but this only happens when it is interrupted, for example by
|
|
pressing ^C. This does not happen when one of the commands fails (like
|
|
false(1) above).
|
|
|
|
12.2. Makefile variables
|
|
|
|
Makefile variables contain strings that can be processed using the five
|
|
operators ``='', ``+='', ``?='', ``:='', and ``!='', which are described in the
|
|
make(1) man page.
|
|
|
|
When a variable's value is parsed from a Makefile, the hash character ``#'' and
|
|
the backslash character ``\'' are handled specially. If a backslash is followed
|
|
by a newline, any whitespace immediately in front of the backslash, the
|
|
backslash, the newline, and any whitespace immediately behind the newline are
|
|
replaced with a single space. A backslash character and an immediately
|
|
following hash character are replaced with a single hash character. Otherwise,
|
|
the backslash is passed as is. In a variable assignment, any hash character
|
|
that is not preceded by a backslash starts a comment that continues upto the
|
|
end of the logical line.
|
|
|
|
Note: Because of this parsing algorithm the only way to create a variable
|
|
consisting of a single backslash is using the ``!='' operator, for example:
|
|
BACKSLASH!=echo "\\".
|
|
|
|
So far for defining variables. The other thing you can do with variables is
|
|
evaluating them. A variable is evaluated when it is part of the right side of
|
|
the ``:='' or the ``!='' operator, or directly before executing a shell command
|
|
which the variable is part of. In all other cases, make(1) performs lazy
|
|
evaluation, that is, variables are not evaluated until there's no other way.
|
|
The ``modifiers'' mentioned in the man page also evaluate the variable.
|
|
|
|
Some of the modifiers split the string into words and then operate on the
|
|
words, others operate on the string as a whole. When a string is split into
|
|
words, it is split as you would expect it from sh(1).
|
|
|
|
No rule without exception?the .for loop does not follow the shell quoting rules
|
|
but splits at sequences of whitespace.
|
|
|
|
There are several types of variables that should be handled differently.
|
|
Strings and two types of lists.
|
|
|
|
* Strings can contain arbitrary characters. Nevertheless, you should restrict
|
|
yourself to only using printable characters. Examples are PREFIX and
|
|
COMMENT.
|
|
|
|
* Internal lists are lists that are never exported to any shell command.
|
|
Their elements are separated by whitespace. Therefore, the elements
|
|
themselves cannot have embedded whitespace. Any other characters are
|
|
allowed. Internal lists can be used in .for loops. Examples are DEPENDS and
|
|
BUILD_DEPENDS.
|
|
|
|
* External lists are lists that may be exported to a shell command. Their
|
|
elements can contain any characters, including whitespace. That's why they
|
|
cannot be used in .for loops. Examples are DISTFILES and MASTER_SITES.
|
|
|
|
12.2.1. Naming conventions
|
|
|
|
* All variable names starting with an underscore are reserved for use by the
|
|
pkgsrc infrastructure. They shall not be used by package Makefiles.
|
|
|
|
* In .for loops you should use lowercase variable names for the iteration
|
|
variables.
|
|
|
|
* All list variables should have a ``plural'' name, e.g. PKG_OPTIONS or
|
|
DISTFILES.
|
|
|
|
12.3. Code snippets
|
|
|
|
This section presents you with some code snippets you should use in your own
|
|
code. If you don't find anything appropriate here, you should test your code
|
|
and add it here.
|
|
|
|
12.3.1. Adding things to a list
|
|
|
|
STRING= foo * bar `date`
|
|
INT_LIST= # empty
|
|
ANOTHER_INT_LIST= apache-[0-9]*:../../www/apache
|
|
EXT_LIST= # empty
|
|
ANOTHER_EXT_LIST= a=b c=d
|
|
|
|
INT_LIST+= ${STRING} # 1
|
|
INT_LIST+= ${ANOTHER_INT_LIST} # 2
|
|
EXT_LIST+= ${STRING:Q} # 3
|
|
EXT_LIST+= ${ANOTHER_EXT_LIST} # 4
|
|
|
|
When you add a string to an external list (example 3), it must be quoted. In
|
|
all other cases, you must not add a quoting level. You must not merge internal
|
|
and external lists, unless you are sure that all entries are correctly
|
|
interpreted in both lists.
|
|
|
|
12.3.2. Converting an internal list into an external list
|
|
|
|
EXT_LIST= # empty
|
|
.for i in ${INT_LIST}
|
|
EXT_LIST+= ${i:Q}""
|
|
.endfor
|
|
|
|
This code converts the internal list INT_LIST into the external list EXT_LIST.
|
|
As the elements of an internal list are unquoted they must be quoted here. The
|
|
reason for appending "" is explained below.
|
|
|
|
12.3.3. Passing variables to a shell command
|
|
|
|
Sometimes you may want to print an arbitrary string. There are many ways to get
|
|
it wrong and only few that can handle every nastiness.
|
|
|
|
STRING= foo bar < > * `date` $$HOME ' "
|
|
EXT_LIST= string=${STRING:Q} x=second\ item
|
|
|
|
all:
|
|
echo ${STRING} # 1
|
|
echo "${STRING}" # 2
|
|
echo "${STRING:Q}" # 3
|
|
echo ${STRING:Q} # 4
|
|
echo x${STRING:Q} | sed 1s,.,, # 5
|
|
printf "%s\\n" ${STRING:Q}"" # 6
|
|
env ${EXT_LIST} /bin/sh -c 'echo "$$string"; echo "$$x"'
|
|
|
|
Example 1 leads to a syntax error in the shell, as the characters are just
|
|
copied.
|
|
|
|
Example 2 leads to a syntax error too, and if you leave out the last "
|
|
character from ${STRING}, date(1) will be executed. The $HOME shell variable
|
|
would be evaluated, too.
|
|
|
|
Example 3 outputs each space character preceded by a backslash (or not),
|
|
depending on the implementation of the echo(1) command.
|
|
|
|
Example 4 handles correctly every string that does not start with a dash. In
|
|
that case, the result depends on the implementation of the echo(1) command. As
|
|
long as you can guarantee that your input does not start with a dash, this form
|
|
is appropriate.
|
|
|
|
Example 5 handles even the case of a leading dash correctly.
|
|
|
|
Example 6 also works with every string and is the light-weight solution, since
|
|
it does not involve a pipe, which has its own problems.
|
|
|
|
The EXT_LIST does not need to be quoted because the quoting has already been
|
|
done when adding elements to the list.
|
|
|
|
As internal lists shall not be passed to the shell, there is no example for it.
|
|
|
|
12.3.4. Quoting guideline
|
|
|
|
There are many possible sources of wrongly quoted variables. This section lists
|
|
some of the commonly known ones.
|
|
|
|
* Whenever you use the value of a list, think about what happens to leading
|
|
or trailing whitespace. If the list is a well-formed shell expression, you
|
|
can apply the :M* modifier to strip leading and trailing whitespace from
|
|
each word. The :M operator first splits its argument according to the rules
|
|
of the shell, and then creates a new list consisting of all words that
|
|
match the shell glob expression *, that is: all. One class of situations
|
|
where this is needed is when adding a variable like CPPFLAGS to
|
|
CONFIGURE_ARGS. If the configure script invokes other configure scripts, it
|
|
strips the leading and trailing whitespace from the variable and then
|
|
passes it to the other configure scripts. But these configure scripts
|
|
expect the (child) CPPFLAGS variable to be the same as the parent CPPFLAGS.
|
|
That's why we better pass the CPPFLAGS value properly trimmed. And here is
|
|
how we do it:
|
|
|
|
CPPFLAGS= # empty
|
|
CPPFLAGS+= -Wundef -DPREFIX=\"${PREFIX:Q}\"
|
|
CPPFLAGS+= ${MY_CPPFLAGS}
|
|
|
|
CONFIGURE_ARGS+= CPPFLAGS=${CPPFLAGS:M*:Q}
|
|
|
|
all:
|
|
echo x${CPPFLAGS:Q}x # leading and trailing whitespace
|
|
echo x${CONFIGURE_ARGS}x # properly trimmed
|
|
|
|
* The example above contains one bug: The ${PREFIX} is a properly quoted
|
|
shell expression, but there is the C compiler after it, which also expects
|
|
a properly quoted string (this time in C syntax). The version above is
|
|
therefore only correct if ${PREFIX} does not have embedded backslashes or
|
|
double quotes. If you want to allow these, you have to add another layer of
|
|
quoting to each variable that is used as a C string literal. You cannot use
|
|
the :Q operator for it, as this operator only works for the shell.
|
|
|
|
* Whenever a variable can be empty, the :Q operator can have surprising
|
|
results. Here are two completely different cases which can be solved with
|
|
the same trick.
|
|
|
|
EMPTY= # empty
|
|
empty_test:
|
|
for i in a ${EMPTY:Q} c; do \
|
|
echo "$$i"; \
|
|
done
|
|
|
|
for_test:
|
|
.for i in a:\ a:\test.txt
|
|
echo ${i:Q}
|
|
echo "foo"
|
|
.endfor
|
|
|
|
The first example will only print two of the three lines we might have
|
|
expected. This is because ${EMPTY:Q} expands to the empty string, which the
|
|
shell cannot see. The workaround is to write ${EMPTY:Q}"". This pattern can
|
|
be often found as ${TEST} -z ${VAR:Q} or as ${TEST} -f ${FNAME:Q} (both of
|
|
these are wrong).
|
|
|
|
The second example will only print three lines instead of four. The first
|
|
line looks like a:\ echo foo. This is because the backslash of the value a:
|
|
\ is interpreted as a line-continuation by make(1), which makes the second
|
|
line the arguments of the echo(1) command from the first line. To avoid
|
|
this, write ${i:Q}"".
|
|
|
|
12.3.5. Workaround for a bug in BSD Make
|
|
|
|
The pkgsrc bmake program does not handle the following assignment correctly. In
|
|
case _othervar_ contains a ``-'' character, one of the closing braces is
|
|
included in ${VAR} after this code executes.
|
|
|
|
VAR:= ${VAR:N${_othervar_:C/-//}}
|
|
|
|
For a more complex code snippet and a workaround, see the package regress/
|
|
make-quoting, testcase bug1.
|
|
|
|
Chapter 13. PLIST issues
|
|
|
|
Table of Contents
|
|
|
|
13.1. RCS ID
|
|
13.2. Semi-automatic PLIST generation
|
|
13.3. Tweaking output of make print-PLIST
|
|
13.4. Variable substitution in PLIST
|
|
13.5. Man page compression
|
|
13.6. Changing PLIST source with PLIST_SRC
|
|
13.7. Platform-specific and differing PLISTs
|
|
13.8. Sharing directories between packages
|
|
|
|
The PLIST file contains a package's "packing list", i.e. a list of files that
|
|
belong to the package (relative to the ${PREFIX} directory it's been installed
|
|
in) plus some additional statements - see the pkg_create(1) man page for a full
|
|
list. This chapter addresses some issues that need attention when dealing with
|
|
the PLIST file (or files, see below!).
|
|
|
|
13.1. RCS ID
|
|
|
|
Be sure to add a RCS ID line as the first thing in any PLIST file you write:
|
|
|
|
@comment $NetBSD$
|
|
|
|
|
|
13.2. Semi-automatic PLIST generation
|
|
|
|
You can use the make print-PLIST command to output a PLIST that matches any new
|
|
files since the package was extracted. See Section 17.17, "Other helpful
|
|
targets" for more information on this target.
|
|
|
|
13.3. Tweaking output of make print-PLIST
|
|
|
|
If you have used any of the *-dirs packages, as explained in Section 13.8,
|
|
"Sharing directories between packages", you may have noticed that make
|
|
print-PLIST outputs a set of @comments instead of real @dirrm lines. You can
|
|
also do this for specific directories and files, so that the results of that
|
|
command are very close to reality. This helps a lot during the update of
|
|
packages.
|
|
|
|
The PRINT_PLIST_AWK variable takes a set of AWK patterns and actions that are
|
|
used to filter the output of print-PLIST. You can append any chunk of AWK
|
|
scripting you like to it, but be careful with quoting.
|
|
|
|
For example, to get all files inside the libdata/foo directory removed from the
|
|
resulting PLIST:
|
|
|
|
PRINT_PLIST_AWK+= /^libdata\/foo/ { next; }
|
|
|
|
|
|
And to get all the @dirrm lines referring to a specific (shared) directory
|
|
converted to @comments:
|
|
|
|
PRINT_PLIST_AWK+= /^@dirrm share\/specific/ { print "@comment " $$0; next; }
|
|
|
|
|
|
13.4. Variable substitution in PLIST
|
|
|
|
A number of variables are substituted automatically in PLISTs when a package is
|
|
installed on a system. This includes the following variables:
|
|
|
|
${MACHINE_ARCH}, ${MACHINE_GNU_ARCH}
|
|
|
|
Some packages like emacs and perl embed information about which
|
|
architecture they were built on into the pathnames where they install their
|
|
files. To handle this case, PLIST will be preprocessed before actually
|
|
used, and the symbol "${MACHINE_ARCH}" will be replaced by what uname -p
|
|
gives. The same is done if the string ${MACHINE_GNU_ARCH} is embedded in
|
|
PLIST somewhere - use this on packages that have GNU autoconf-created
|
|
configure scripts.
|
|
|
|
Legacy note
|
|
|
|
There used to be a symbol "$ARCH" that was replaced by the output of uname
|
|
-m, but that's no longer supported and has been removed.
|
|
|
|
${OPSYS}, ${LOWER_OPSYS}, ${OS_VERSION}
|
|
|
|
Some packages want to embed the OS name and version into some paths. To do
|
|
this, use these variables in the PLIST:
|
|
|
|
* ${OPSYS} - output of "uname -s"
|
|
|
|
* ${LOWER_OPSYS} - lowercase common name (eg. "solaris")
|
|
|
|
* ${OS_VERSION} - "uname -r"
|
|
|
|
For a complete list of values which are replaced by default, please look in
|
|
bsd.pkg.mk (and search for PLIST_SUBST).
|
|
|
|
If you want to change other variables not listed above, you can add variables
|
|
and their expansions to this variable in the following way, similar to
|
|
MESSAGE_SUBST (see Section 11.5, "Optional files"):
|
|
|
|
PLIST_SUBST+= SOMEVAR="somevalue"
|
|
|
|
|
|
This replaces all occurrences of "${SOMEVAR}" in the PLIST with "somevalue".
|
|
|
|
The PLIST_VARS variable can be used to simplify the common case of
|
|
conditionally including some PLIST entries. It can be done by adding
|
|
PLIST_VARS+=foo and setting the corresponding PLIST.foo variable to yes if the
|
|
entry should be included. This will substitute "${PLIST.foo}" in the PLIST with
|
|
either """" or ""@comment "". For example, in Makefile:
|
|
|
|
PLIST_VARS+= foo
|
|
.if condition
|
|
PLIST.foo= yes
|
|
.else
|
|
|
|
|
|
And then in PLIST:
|
|
|
|
@comment $NetBSD$
|
|
bin/bar
|
|
man/man1/bar.1
|
|
${PLIST.foo}bin/foo
|
|
${PLIST.foo}man/man1/foo.1
|
|
${PLIST.foo}share/bar/foo.data
|
|
${PLIST.foo}@dirrm share/bar
|
|
|
|
|
|
13.5. Man page compression
|
|
|
|
Man pages should be installed in compressed form if MANZ is set (in
|
|
bsd.own.mk), and uncompressed otherwise. To handle this in the PLIST file, the
|
|
suffix ".gz" is appended/removed automatically for man pages according to MANZ
|
|
and MANCOMPRESSED being set or not, see above for details. This modification of
|
|
the PLIST file is done on a copy of it, not PLIST itself.
|
|
|
|
13.6. Changing PLIST source with PLIST_SRC
|
|
|
|
To use one or more files as source for the PLIST used in generating the binary
|
|
package, set the variable PLIST_SRC to the names of that file(s). The files are
|
|
later concatenated using cat(1), and the order of things is important. The
|
|
default for PLIST_SRC is ${PKGDIR}/PLIST.
|
|
|
|
13.7. Platform-specific and differing PLISTs
|
|
|
|
Some packages decide to install a different set of files based on the operating
|
|
system being used. These differences can be automatically handled by using the
|
|
following files:
|
|
|
|
* PLIST.common
|
|
|
|
* PLIST.${OPSYS}
|
|
|
|
* PLIST.${MACHINE_ARCH}
|
|
|
|
* PLIST.${OPSYS}-${MACHINE_ARCH}
|
|
|
|
* PLIST.common_end
|
|
|
|
13.8. Sharing directories between packages
|
|
|
|
A "shared directory" is a directory where multiple (and unrelated) packages
|
|
install files. These directories are problematic because you have to add
|
|
special tricks in the PLIST to conditionally remove them, or have some
|
|
centralized package handle them.
|
|
|
|
Within pkgsrc, you'll find both approaches. If a directory is shared by a few
|
|
unrelated packages, it's often not worth to add an extra package to remove it.
|
|
Therefore, one simply does:
|
|
|
|
@unexec ${RMDIR} %D/path/to/shared/directory 2>/dev/null || ${TRUE}
|
|
|
|
|
|
in the PLISTs of all affected packages, instead of the regular "@dirrm" line.
|
|
|
|
However, if the directory is shared across many packages, two different
|
|
solutions are available:
|
|
|
|
1. If the packages have a common dependency, the directory can be removed in
|
|
that. For example, see textproc/scrollkeeper, which removes the shared
|
|
directory share/omf.
|
|
|
|
2. If the packages using the directory are not related at all (they have no
|
|
common dependencies), a *-dirs package is used.
|
|
|
|
From now on, we'll discuss the second solution. To get an idea of the *-dirs
|
|
packages available, issue:
|
|
|
|
% cd .../pkgsrc
|
|
% ls -d */*-dirs
|
|
|
|
|
|
Their use from other packages is very simple. The USE_DIRS variable takes a
|
|
list of package names (without the "-dirs" part) together with the required
|
|
version number (always pick the latest one when writing new packages).
|
|
|
|
For example, if a package installs files under share/applications, it should
|
|
have the following line in it:
|
|
|
|
USE_DIRS+= xdg-1.1
|
|
|
|
|
|
After regenerating the PLIST using make print-PLIST, you should get the right
|
|
(commented out) lines.
|
|
|
|
Note that even if your package is using $X11BASE, it must not depend on the
|
|
*-x11-dirs packages. Just specify the name without that part and pkgsrc (in
|
|
particular, mk/dirs.mk) will take care of it.
|
|
|
|
Chapter 14. Buildlink methodology
|
|
|
|
Table of Contents
|
|
|
|
14.1. Converting packages to use buildlink3
|
|
14.2. Writing buildlink3.mk files
|
|
|
|
14.2.1. Anatomy of a buildlink3.mk file
|
|
14.2.2. Updating BUILDLINK_API_DEPENDS.pkg in buildlink3.mk files
|
|
|
|
14.3. Writing builtin.mk files
|
|
|
|
14.3.1. Anatomy of a builtin.mk file
|
|
14.3.2. Global preferences for native or pkgsrc software
|
|
|
|
Buildlink is a framework in pkgsrc that controls what headers and libraries are
|
|
seen by a package's configure and build processes. This is implemented in a two
|
|
step process:
|
|
|
|
1. Symlink headers and libraries for dependencies into BUILDLINK_DIR, which by
|
|
default is a subdirectory of WRKDIR.
|
|
|
|
2. Create wrapper scripts that are used in place of the normal compiler tools
|
|
that translate -I${LOCALBASE}/include and -L${LOCALBASE}/lib into
|
|
references to BUILDLINK_DIR. The wrapper scripts also make native compiler
|
|
on some operating systems look like GCC, so that packages that expect GCC
|
|
won't require modifications to build with those native compilers.
|
|
|
|
This normalizes the environment in which a package is built so that the package
|
|
may be built consistently despite what other software may be installed. Please
|
|
note that the normal system header and library paths, e.g. /usr/include, /usr/
|
|
lib, etc., are always searched -- buildlink3 is designed to insulate the
|
|
package build from non-system-supplied software.
|
|
|
|
14.1. Converting packages to use buildlink3
|
|
|
|
The process of converting packages to use the buildlink3 framework
|
|
("bl3ifying") is fairly straightforward. The things to keep in mind are:
|
|
|
|
1. Ensure that the build always calls the wrapper scripts instead of the
|
|
actual toolchain. Some packages are tricky, and the only way to know for
|
|
sure is the check ${WRKDIR}/.work.log to see if the wrappers are being
|
|
invoked.
|
|
|
|
2. Don't override PREFIX from within the package Makefile, e.g. Java VMs,
|
|
standalone shells, etc., because the code to symlink files into $
|
|
{BUILDLINK_DIR} looks for files relative to "pkg_info -qp pkgname".
|
|
|
|
3. Remember that only the buildlink3.mk files that you list in a package's
|
|
Makefile are added as dependencies for that package.
|
|
|
|
If a dependency on a particular package is required for its libraries and
|
|
headers, then we replace:
|
|
|
|
DEPENDS+= foo>=1.1.0:../../category/foo
|
|
|
|
with
|
|
|
|
.include "../../category/foo/buildlink3.mk"
|
|
|
|
The buildlink3.mk files usually define the required dependencies. If you need a
|
|
newer version of the dependency when using buildlink3.mk files, then you can
|
|
define it in your Makefile; for example:
|
|
|
|
BUILDLINK_API_DEPENDS.foo+= foo>=1.1.0
|
|
.include "../../category/foo/buildlink3.mk"
|
|
|
|
There are several buildlink3.mk files in pkgsrc/mk that handle special package
|
|
issues:
|
|
|
|
* bdb.buildlink3.mk chooses either the native or a pkgsrc Berkeley DB
|
|
implementation based on the values of BDB_ACCEPTED and BDB_DEFAULT.
|
|
|
|
* curses.buildlink3.mk: If the system comes with neither Curses nor NCurses,
|
|
this will take care to install the devel/ncurses package.
|
|
|
|
* krb5.buildlink3.mk uses the value of KRB5_ACCEPTED to choose between adding
|
|
a dependency on Heimdal or MIT-krb5 for packages that require a Kerberos 5
|
|
implementation.
|
|
|
|
* motif.buildlink3.mk checks for a system-provided Motif installation or adds
|
|
a dependency on x11/lesstif or x11/openmotif. The user can set MOTIF_TYPE
|
|
to "dt", "lesstif", or "openmotif" to choose which Motif version will be
|
|
used.
|
|
|
|
* oss.buildlink3.mk defines several variables that may be used by packages
|
|
that use the Open Sound System (OSS) API.
|
|
|
|
* pgsql.buildlink3.mk will accept either Postgres 8.0, 8.1, or 8.2, whichever
|
|
is found installed. See the file for more information.
|
|
|
|
* pthread.buildlink3.mk uses the value of PTHREAD_OPTS and checks for native
|
|
pthreads or adds a dependency on devel/pth as needed.
|
|
|
|
* xaw.buildlink3.mk uses the value of XAW_TYPE to choose a particular Athena
|
|
widgets library.
|
|
|
|
The comments in those buildlink3.mk files provide a more complete description
|
|
of how to use them properly.
|
|
|
|
14.2. Writing buildlink3.mk files
|
|
|
|
A package's buildlink3.mk file is included by Makefiles to indicate the need to
|
|
compile and link against header files and libraries provided by the package. A
|
|
buildlink3.mk file should always provide enough information to add the correct
|
|
type of dependency relationship and include any other buildlink3.mk files that
|
|
it needs to find headers and libraries that it needs in turn.
|
|
|
|
To generate an initial buildlink3.mk file for further editing, Rene Hexel's
|
|
pkgtools/createbuildlink package is highly recommended. For most packages, the
|
|
following command will generate a good starting point for buildlink3.mk files:
|
|
|
|
% cd pkgsrc/category/pkgdir
|
|
% createbuildlink >buildlink3.mk
|
|
|
|
|
|
14.2.1. Anatomy of a buildlink3.mk file
|
|
|
|
The following real-life example buildlink3.mk is taken from pkgsrc/graphics/
|
|
tiff:
|
|
|
|
# $NetBSD: buildlink3.mk,v 1.16 2009/03/20 19:24:45 joerg Exp $
|
|
|
|
BUILDLINK_TREE+= tiff
|
|
|
|
.if !defined(TIFF_BUILDLINK3_MK)
|
|
TIFF_BUILDLINK3_MK:=
|
|
|
|
BUILDLINK_API_DEPENDS.tiff+= tiff>=3.6.1
|
|
BUILDLINK_ABI_DEPENDS.tiff+= tiff>=3.7.2nb1
|
|
BUILDLINK_PKGSRCDIR.tiff?= ../../graphics/tiff
|
|
|
|
.include "../../devel/zlib/buildlink3.mk"
|
|
.include "../../graphics/jpeg/buildlink3.mk"
|
|
.endif # TIFF_BUILDLINK3_MK
|
|
|
|
BUILDLINK_TREE+= -tiff
|
|
|
|
The header and footer manipulate BUILDLINK_TREE, which is common across all
|
|
buildlink3.mk files and is used to track the dependency tree.
|
|
|
|
The main section is protected from multiple inclusion and controls how the
|
|
dependency on pkg is added. Several important variables are set in the section:
|
|
|
|
* BUILDLINK_API_DEPENDS.pkg is the actual dependency recorded in the
|
|
installed package; this should always be set using += to ensure that we're
|
|
appending to any pre-existing list of values. This variable should be set
|
|
to the first version of the package that had an API change.
|
|
|
|
* BUILDLINK_PKGSRCDIR.pkg is the location of the pkg pkgsrc directory.
|
|
|
|
* BUILDLINK_DEPMETHOD.pkg (not shown above) controls whether we use
|
|
BUILD_DEPENDS or DEPENDS to add the dependency on pkg. The build dependency
|
|
is selected by setting BUILDLINK_DEPMETHOD.pkg to "build". By default, the
|
|
full dependency is used.
|
|
|
|
* BUILDLINK_INCDIRS.pkg and BUILDLINK_LIBDIRS.pkg (not shown above) are lists
|
|
of subdirectories of ${BUILDLINK_PREFIX.pkg} to add to the header and
|
|
library search paths. These default to "include" and "lib" respectively.
|
|
|
|
* BUILDLINK_CPPFLAGS.pkg (not shown above) is the list of preprocessor flags
|
|
to add to CPPFLAGS, which are passed on to the configure and build phases.
|
|
The "-I" option should be avoided and instead be handled using
|
|
BUILDLINK_INCDIRS.pkg as above.
|
|
|
|
The following variables are all optionally defined within this second section
|
|
(protected against multiple inclusion) and control which package files are
|
|
symlinked into ${BUILDLINK_DIR} and how their names are transformed during the
|
|
symlinking:
|
|
|
|
* BUILDLINK_FILES.pkg (not shown above) is a shell glob pattern relative to $
|
|
{BUILDLINK_PREFIX.pkg} to be symlinked into ${BUILDLINK_DIR}, e.g. include/
|
|
*.h.
|
|
|
|
* BUILDLINK_FILES_CMD.pkg (not shown above) is a shell pipeline that outputs
|
|
to stdout a list of files relative to ${BUILDLINK_PREFIX.pkg}. The
|
|
resulting files are to be symlinked into ${BUILDLINK_DIR}. By default, this
|
|
takes the +CONTENTS of a pkg and filters it through $
|
|
{BUILDLINK_CONTENTS_FILTER.pkg}.
|
|
|
|
* BUILDLINK_CONTENTS_FILTER.pkg (not shown above) is a filter command that
|
|
filters +CONTENTS input into a list of files relative to $
|
|
{BUILDLINK_PREFIX.pkg} on stdout. By default for overwrite packages,
|
|
BUILDLINK_CONTENTS_FILTER.pkg outputs the contents of the include and lib
|
|
directories in the package +CONTENTS, and for pkgviews packages, it outputs
|
|
any libtool archives in lib directories.
|
|
|
|
* BUILDLINK_FNAME_TRANSFORM.pkg (not shown above) is a list of sed arguments
|
|
used to transform the name of the source filename into a destination
|
|
filename, e.g. -e "s|/curses.h|/ncurses.h|g".
|
|
|
|
This section can additionally include any buildlink3.mk needed for pkg's
|
|
library dependencies. Including these buildlink3.mk files means that the
|
|
headers and libraries for these dependencies are also symlinked into $
|
|
{BUILDLINK_DIR} whenever the pkg buildlink3.mk file is included. Dependencies
|
|
are only added for directly include buildlink3.mk files.
|
|
|
|
14.2.2. Updating BUILDLINK_API_DEPENDS.pkg in buildlink3.mk files
|
|
|
|
The situation that requires increasing the dependency listed in
|
|
BUILDLINK_API_DEPENDS.pkg after a package update is when the API or interface
|
|
to the header files change.
|
|
|
|
In this case, BUILDLINK_API_DEPENDS.pkg should be adjusted to require at least
|
|
the new package version. In some cases, the packages that depend on this new
|
|
version may need their PKGREVISIONs increased and, if they have buildlink3.mk
|
|
files, their BUILDLINK_API_DEPENDS.pkg adjusted, too. This is needed so pkgsrc
|
|
will require the correct package dependency and not settle for an older one
|
|
when building the source.
|
|
|
|
BUILDLINK_ABI_DEPENDS.pkg should be increased when the binary interface or
|
|
sonames (major number of the library version) of any installed shared libraries
|
|
change. This is needed so that binary packages made using it will require the
|
|
correct package dependency and not settle for an older one which will not
|
|
contain the necessary shared libraries.
|
|
|
|
See Section 19.1.6, "Handling dependencies" for more information about
|
|
dependencies on other packages, including the BUILDLINK_ABI_DEPENDS and
|
|
ABI_DEPENDS definitions.
|
|
|
|
Please take careful consideration before adjusting BUILDLINK_API_DEPENDS.pkg or
|
|
BUILDLINK_ABI_DEPENDS.pkg as we don't want to cause unneeded package deletions
|
|
and rebuilds. In many cases, new versions of packages work just fine with older
|
|
dependencies.
|
|
|
|
Also it is not needed to set BUILDLINK_ABI_DEPENDS.pkg when it is identical to
|
|
BUILDLINK_API_DEPENDS.pkg.
|
|
|
|
14.3. Writing builtin.mk files
|
|
|
|
Some packages in pkgsrc install headers and libraries that coincide with
|
|
headers and libraries present in the base system. Aside from a buildlink3.mk
|
|
file, these packages should also include a builtin.mk file that includes the
|
|
necessary checks to decide whether using the built-in software or the pkgsrc
|
|
software is appropriate.
|
|
|
|
The only requirements of a builtin.mk file for pkg are:
|
|
|
|
1. It should set USE_BUILTIN.pkg to either "yes" or "no" after it is included.
|
|
|
|
2. It should not override any USE_BUILTIN.pkg which is already set before the
|
|
builtin.mk file is included.
|
|
|
|
3. It should be written to allow multiple inclusion. This is very important
|
|
and takes careful attention to Makefile coding.
|
|
|
|
14.3.1. Anatomy of a builtin.mk file
|
|
|
|
The following is the recommended template for builtin.mk files:
|
|
|
|
.if !defined(IS_BUILTIN.foo)
|
|
#
|
|
# IS_BUILTIN.foo is set to "yes" or "no" depending on whether "foo"
|
|
# genuinely exists in the system or not.
|
|
#
|
|
IS_BUILTIN.foo?= no
|
|
|
|
# BUILTIN_PKG.foo should be set here if "foo" is built-in and its package
|
|
# version can be determined.
|
|
#
|
|
. if !empty(IS_BUILTIN.foo:M[yY][eE][sS])
|
|
BUILTIN_PKG.foo?= foo-1.0
|
|
. endif
|
|
.endif # IS_BUILTIN.foo
|
|
|
|
.if !defined(USE_BUILTIN.foo)
|
|
USE_BUILTIN.foo?= ${IS_BUILTIN.foo}
|
|
. if defined(BUILTIN_PKG.foo)
|
|
. for _depend_ in ${BUILDLINK_API_DEPENDS.foo}
|
|
. if !empty(USE_BUILTIN.foo:M[yY][eE][sS])
|
|
USE_BUILTIN.foo!= \
|
|
${PKG_ADMIN} pmatch '${_depend_}' ${BUILTIN_PKG.foo} \
|
|
&& ${ECHO} "yes" || ${ECHO} "no"
|
|
. endif
|
|
. endfor
|
|
. endif
|
|
.endif # USE_BUILTIN.foo
|
|
|
|
CHECK_BUILTIN.foo?= no
|
|
.if !empty(CHECK_BUILTIN.foo:M[nN][oO])
|
|
#
|
|
# Here we place code that depends on whether USE_BUILTIN.foo is set to
|
|
# "yes" or "no".
|
|
#
|
|
.endif # CHECK_BUILTIN.foo
|
|
|
|
The first section sets IS_BUILTIN.pkg depending on if pkg really exists in the
|
|
base system. This should not be a base system software with similar
|
|
functionality to pkg; it should only be "yes" if the actual package is included
|
|
as part of the base system. This variable is only used internally within the
|
|
builtin.mk file.
|
|
|
|
The second section sets BUILTIN_PKG.pkg to the version of pkg in the base
|
|
system if it exists (if IS_BUILTIN.pkg is "yes"). This variable is only used
|
|
internally within the builtin.mk file.
|
|
|
|
The third section sets USE_BUILTIN.pkg and is required in all builtin.mk files.
|
|
The code in this section must make the determination whether the built-in
|
|
software is adequate to satisfy the dependencies listed in
|
|
BUILDLINK_API_DEPENDS.pkg. This is typically done by comparing BUILTIN_PKG.pkg
|
|
against each of the dependencies in BUILDLINK_API_DEPENDS.pkg. USE_BUILTIN.pkg
|
|
must be set to the correct value by the end of the builtin.mk file. Note that
|
|
USE_BUILTIN.pkg may be "yes" even if IS_BUILTIN.pkg is "no" because we may make
|
|
the determination that the built-in version of the software is similar enough
|
|
to be used as a replacement.
|
|
|
|
The last section is guarded by CHECK_BUILTIN.pkg, and includes code that uses
|
|
the value of USE_BUILTIN.pkg set in the previous section. This typically
|
|
includes, e.g., adding additional dependency restrictions and listing
|
|
additional files to symlink into ${BUILDLINK_DIR} (via BUILDLINK_FILES.pkg).
|
|
|
|
14.3.2. Global preferences for native or pkgsrc software
|
|
|
|
When building packages, it's possible to choose whether to set a global
|
|
preference for using either the built-in (native) version or the pkgsrc version
|
|
of software to satisfy a dependency. This is controlled by setting
|
|
PREFER_PKGSRC and PREFER_NATIVE. These variables take values of either "yes",
|
|
"no", or a list of packages. PREFER_PKGSRC tells pkgsrc to use the pkgsrc
|
|
versions of software, while PREFER_NATIVE tells pkgsrc to use the built-in
|
|
versions. Preferences are determined by the most specific instance of the
|
|
package in either PREFER_PKGSRC or PREFER_NATIVE. If a package is specified in
|
|
neither or in both variables, then PREFER_PKGSRC has precedence over
|
|
PREFER_NATIVE. For example, to require using pkgsrc versions of software for
|
|
all but the most basic bits on a NetBSD system, you can set:
|
|
|
|
PREFER_PKGSRC= yes
|
|
PREFER_NATIVE= getopt skey tcp_wrappers
|
|
|
|
A package must have a builtin.mk file to be listed in PREFER_NATIVE, otherwise
|
|
it is simply ignored in that list.
|
|
|
|
Chapter 15. The pkginstall framework
|
|
|
|
Table of Contents
|
|
|
|
15.1. Files and directories outside the installation prefix
|
|
|
|
15.1.1. Directory manipulation
|
|
15.1.2. File manipulation
|
|
|
|
15.2. Configuration files
|
|
|
|
15.2.1. How PKG_SYSCONFDIR is set
|
|
15.2.2. Telling the software where configuration files are
|
|
15.2.3. Patching installations
|
|
15.2.4. Disabling handling of configuration files
|
|
|
|
15.3. System startup scripts
|
|
|
|
15.3.1. Disabling handling of system startup scripts
|
|
|
|
15.4. System users and groups
|
|
15.5. System shells
|
|
|
|
15.5.1. Disabling shell registration
|
|
|
|
15.6. Fonts
|
|
|
|
15.6.1. Disabling automatic update of the fonts databases
|
|
|
|
This chapter describes the framework known as pkginstall, whose key features
|
|
are:
|
|
|
|
* Generic installation and manipulation of directories and files outside the
|
|
pkgsrc-handled tree, LOCALBASE.
|
|
|
|
* Automatic handling of configuration files during installation, provided
|
|
that packages are correctly designed.
|
|
|
|
* Generation and installation of system startup scripts.
|
|
|
|
* Registration of system users and groups.
|
|
|
|
* Registration of system shells.
|
|
|
|
* Automatic updating of fonts databases.
|
|
|
|
The following sections inspect each of the above points in detail.
|
|
|
|
You may be thinking that many of the things described here could be easily done
|
|
with simple code in the package's post-installation target (post-install). This
|
|
is incorrect, as the code in them is only executed when building from source.
|
|
Machines using binary packages could not benefit from it at all (as the code
|
|
itself could be unavailable). Therefore, the only way to achieve any of the
|
|
items described above is by means of the installation scripts, which are
|
|
automatically generated by pkginstall.
|
|
|
|
15.1. Files and directories outside the installation prefix
|
|
|
|
As you already know, the PLIST file holds a list of files and directories that
|
|
belong to a package. The names used in it are relative to the installation
|
|
prefix (${PREFIX}), which means that it cannot register files outside this
|
|
directory (absolute path names are not allowed). Despite this restriction, some
|
|
packages need to install files outside this location; e.g., under ${VARBASE} or
|
|
${PKG_SYSCONFDIR}. The only way to achieve this is to create such files during
|
|
installation time by using installation scripts.
|
|
|
|
The generic installation scripts are shell scripts that can contain arbitrary
|
|
code. The list of scripts to execute is taken from the INSTALL_FILE variable,
|
|
which defaults to INSTALL. A similar variable exists for package removal
|
|
(DEINSTALL_FILE, whose default is DEINSTALL). These scripts can run arbitrary
|
|
commands, so they have the potential to create and manage files anywhere in the
|
|
file system.
|
|
|
|
Using these general installation files is not recommended, but may be needed in
|
|
some special cases. One reason for avoiding them is that the user has to trust
|
|
the packager that there is no unwanted or simply erroneous code included in the
|
|
installation script. Also, previously there were many similar scripts for the
|
|
same functionality, and fixing a common error involved finding and changing all
|
|
of them.
|
|
|
|
The pkginstall framework offers another, standardized way. It provides generic
|
|
scripts to abstract the manipulation of such files and directories based on
|
|
variables set in the package's Makefile. The rest of this section describes
|
|
these variables.
|
|
|
|
15.1.1. Directory manipulation
|
|
|
|
The following variables can be set to request the creation of directories
|
|
anywhere in the file system:
|
|
|
|
* MAKE_DIRS and OWN_DIRS contain a list of directories that should be created
|
|
and should attempt to be destroyed by the installation scripts. The
|
|
difference between the two is that the latter prompts the administrator to
|
|
remove any directories that may be left after deinstallation (because they
|
|
were not empty), while the former does not.
|
|
|
|
* MAKE_DIRS_PERMS and OWN_DIRS_PERMS contain a list of tuples describing
|
|
which directories should be created and should attempt to be destroyed by
|
|
the installation scripts. Each tuple holds the following values, separated
|
|
by spaces: the directory name, its owner, its group and its numerical mode.
|
|
For example:
|
|
|
|
MAKE_DIRS_PERMS+= ${VARBASE}/foo/private ${ROOT_USER} ${ROOT_GROUP} 0700
|
|
|
|
The difference between the two is exactly the same as their non-PERMS
|
|
counterparts.
|
|
|
|
15.1.2. File manipulation
|
|
|
|
Creating non-empty files outside the installation prefix is tricky because the
|
|
PLIST forces all files to be inside it. To overcome this problem, the only
|
|
solution is to extract the file in the known place (i.e., inside the
|
|
installation prefix) and copy it to the appropriate location during
|
|
installation (done by the installation scripts generated by pkginstall). We
|
|
will call the former the master file in the following paragraphs, which
|
|
describe the variables that can be used to automatically and consistently
|
|
handle files outside the installation prefix:
|
|
|
|
* CONF_FILES and SUPPORT_FILES are pairs of master and target files. During
|
|
installation time, the master file is copied to the target one if and only
|
|
if the latter does not exist. Upon deinstallation, the target file is
|
|
removed provided that it was not modified by the installation.
|
|
|
|
The difference between the two is that the latter prompts the administrator
|
|
to remove any files that may be left after deinstallation (because they
|
|
were not empty), while the former does not.
|
|
|
|
* CONF_FILES_PERMS and SUPPORT_FILES_PERMS contain tuples describing master
|
|
files as well as their target locations. For each of them, it also
|
|
specifies their owner, their group and their numeric permissions, in this
|
|
order. For example:
|
|
|
|
SUPPORT_FILES_PERMS+= ${PREFIX}/share/somefile ${VARBASE}/somefile ${ROOT_USER} ${ROOT_GROUP} 0700
|
|
|
|
The difference between the two is exactly the same as their non-PERMS
|
|
counterparts.
|
|
|
|
15.2. Configuration files
|
|
|
|
Configuration files are special in the sense that they are installed in their
|
|
own specific directory, PKG_SYSCONFDIR, and need special treatment during
|
|
installation (most of which is automated by pkginstall). The main concept you
|
|
must bear in mind is that files marked as configuration files are automatically
|
|
copied to the right place (somewhere inside PKG_SYSCONFDIR) during installation
|
|
if and only if they didn't exist before. Similarly, they will not be removed if
|
|
they have local modifications. This ensures that administrators never lose any
|
|
custom changes they may have made.
|
|
|
|
15.2.1. How PKG_SYSCONFDIR is set
|
|
|
|
As said before, the PKG_SYSCONFDIR variable specifies where configuration files
|
|
shall be installed. Its contents are set based upon the following variables:
|
|
|
|
* PKG_SYSCONFBASE: The configuration's root directory. Defaults to ${PREFIX}/
|
|
etc although it may be overridden by the user to point to his preferred
|
|
location (e.g., /etc, /etc/pkg, etc.). Packages must not use it directly.
|
|
|
|
* PKG_SYSCONFSUBDIR: A subdirectory of PKG_SYSCONFBASE under which the
|
|
configuration files for the package being built shall be installed. The
|
|
definition of this variable only makes sense in the package's Makefile
|
|
(i.e., it is not user-customizable).
|
|
|
|
As an example, consider the Apache package, www/apache2, which places its
|
|
configuration files under the httpd/ subdirectory of PKG_SYSCONFBASE. This
|
|
should be set in the package Makefile.
|
|
|
|
* PKG_SYSCONFVAR: Specifies the name of the variable that holds this
|
|
package's configuration directory (if different from PKG_SYSCONFBASE). It
|
|
defaults to PKGBASE's value, and is always prefixed with PKG_SYSCONFDIR.
|
|
|
|
* PKG_SYSCONFDIR.${PKG_SYSCONFVAR}: Holds the directory where the
|
|
configuration files for the package identified by PKG_SYSCONFVAR's shall be
|
|
placed.
|
|
|
|
Based on the above variables, pkginstall determines the value of
|
|
PKG_SYSCONFDIR, which is the only variable that can be used within a package to
|
|
refer to its configuration directory. The algorithm used to set its value is
|
|
basically the following:
|
|
|
|
1. If PKG_SYSCONFDIR.${PKG_SYSCONFVAR} is set, its value is used.
|
|
|
|
2. If the previous variable is not defined but PKG_SYSCONFSUBDIR is set in the
|
|
package's Makefile, the resulting value is ${PKG_SYSCONFBASE}/$
|
|
{PKG_SYSCONFSUBDIR}.
|
|
|
|
3. Otherwise, it is set to ${PKG_SYSCONFBASE}.
|
|
|
|
It is worth mentioning that ${PKG_SYSCONFDIR} is automatically added to
|
|
OWN_DIRS. See Section 15.1.1, "Directory manipulation" what this means. This
|
|
does not apply to subdirectories of ${PKG_SYSCONFDIR}, they still have to be
|
|
created with OWN_DIRS or MAKE_DIRS.
|
|
|
|
15.2.2. Telling the software where configuration files are
|
|
|
|
Given that pkgsrc (and users!) expect configuration files to be in a known
|
|
place, you need to teach each package where it shall install its files. In some
|
|
cases you will have to patch the package Makefiles to achieve it. If you are
|
|
lucky, though, it may be as easy as passing an extra flag to the configuration
|
|
script; this is the case of GNU Autoconf- generated files:
|
|
|
|
CONFIGURE_ARGS+= --sysconfdir=${PKG_SYSCONFDIR}
|
|
|
|
Note that this specifies where the package has to look for its configuration
|
|
files, not where they will be originally installed (although the difference is
|
|
never explicit, unfortunately).
|
|
|
|
15.2.3. Patching installations
|
|
|
|
As said before, pkginstall automatically handles configuration files. This
|
|
means that the packages themselves must not touch the contents of $
|
|
{PKG_SYSCONFDIR} directly. Bad news is that many software installation scripts
|
|
will, out of the box, mess with the contents of that directory. So what is the
|
|
correct procedure to fix this issue?
|
|
|
|
You must teach the package (usually by manually patching it) to install any
|
|
configuration files under the examples hierarchy, share/examples/${PKGBASE}/.
|
|
This way, the PLIST registers them and the administrator always has the
|
|
original copies available.
|
|
|
|
Once the required configuration files are in place (i.e., under the examples
|
|
hierarchy), the pkginstall framework can use them as master copies during the
|
|
package installation to update what is in ${PKG_SYSCONFDIR}. To achieve this,
|
|
the variables CONF_FILES and CONF_FILES_PERMS are used. Check out
|
|
Section 15.1.2, "File manipulation" for information about their syntax and
|
|
their purpose. Here is an example, taken from the mail/mutt package:
|
|
|
|
EGDIR= ${PREFIX}/share/doc/mutt/samples
|
|
CONF_FILES= ${EGDIR}/Muttrc ${PKG_SYSCONFDIR}/Muttrc
|
|
|
|
Note that the EGDIR variable is specific to that package and has no meaning
|
|
outside it.
|
|
|
|
15.2.4. Disabling handling of configuration files
|
|
|
|
The automatic copying of config files can be toggled by setting the environment
|
|
variable PKG_CONFIG prior to package installation.
|
|
|
|
15.3. System startup scripts
|
|
|
|
System startup scripts are special files because they must be installed in a
|
|
place known by the underlying OS, usually outside the installation prefix.
|
|
Therefore, the same rules described in Section 15.1, "Files and directories
|
|
outside the installation prefix" apply, and the same solutions can be used.
|
|
However, pkginstall provides a special mechanism to handle these files.
|
|
|
|
In order to provide system startup scripts, the package has to:
|
|
|
|
1. Store the script inside ${FILESDIR}, with the .sh suffix appended.
|
|
Considering the print/cups package as an example, it has a cupsd.sh in its
|
|
files directory.
|
|
|
|
2. Tell pkginstall to handle it, appending the name of the script, without its
|
|
extension, to the RCD_SCRIPTS variable. Continuing the previous example:
|
|
|
|
RCD_SCRIPTS+= cupsd
|
|
|
|
Once this is done, pkginstall will do the following steps for each script in an
|
|
automated fashion:
|
|
|
|
1. Process the file found in the files directory applying all the
|
|
substitutions described in the FILES_SUBST variable.
|
|
|
|
2. Copy the script from the files directory to the examples hierarchy, $
|
|
{PREFIX}/share/examples/rc.d/. Note that this master file must be
|
|
explicitly registered in the PLIST.
|
|
|
|
3. Add code to the installation scripts to copy the startup script from the
|
|
examples hierarchy into the system-wide startup scripts directory.
|
|
|
|
15.3.1. Disabling handling of system startup scripts
|
|
|
|
The automatic copying of config files can be toggled by setting the environment
|
|
variable PKG_RCD_SCRIPTS prior to package installation. Note that the scripts
|
|
will be always copied inside the examples hierarchy, ${PREFIX}/share/examples/
|
|
rc.d/, no matter what the value of this variable is.
|
|
|
|
15.4. System users and groups
|
|
|
|
If a package needs to create special users and/or groups during installation,
|
|
it can do so by using the pkginstall framework.
|
|
|
|
Users can be created by adding entries to the PKG_USERS variable. Each entry
|
|
has the following syntax:
|
|
|
|
user:group
|
|
|
|
Further specification of user details may be done by setting per-user
|
|
variables. PKG_UID.user is the numeric UID for the user. PKG_GECOS.user is the
|
|
user's description or comment. PKG_HOME.user is the user's home directory, and
|
|
defaults to /nonexistent if not specified. PKG_SHELL.user is the user's shell,
|
|
and defaults to /sbin/nologin if not specified.
|
|
|
|
Similarly, groups can be created by adding entries to the PKG_GROUPS variable,
|
|
whose syntax is:
|
|
|
|
group
|
|
|
|
The numeric GID of the group may be set by defining PKG_GID.group.
|
|
|
|
If a package needs to create the users and groups at an earlier stage, then it
|
|
can set USERGROUP_PHASE to either configure or build to indicate the phase
|
|
before which the users and groups are created. In this case, the numeric UIDs
|
|
and GIDs of the created users and groups are automatically hardcoded into the
|
|
final installation scripts.
|
|
|
|
15.5. System shells
|
|
|
|
Packages that install system shells should register them in the shell database,
|
|
/etc/shells, to make things easier to the administrator. This must be done from
|
|
the installation scripts to keep binary packages working on any system.
|
|
pkginstall provides an easy way to accomplish this task.
|
|
|
|
When a package provides a shell interpreter, it has to set the PKG_SHELL
|
|
variable to its absolute file name. This will add some hooks to the
|
|
installation scripts to handle it. Consider the following example, taken from
|
|
shells/zsh:
|
|
|
|
PKG_SHELL= ${PREFIX}/bin/zsh
|
|
|
|
15.5.1. Disabling shell registration
|
|
|
|
The automatic registration of shell interpreters can be disabled by the
|
|
administrator by setting the PKG_REGISTER_SHELLS environment variable to NO.
|
|
|
|
15.6. Fonts
|
|
|
|
Packages that install X11 fonts should update the database files that index the
|
|
fonts within each fonts directory. This can easily be accomplished within the
|
|
pkginstall framework.
|
|
|
|
When a package installs X11 fonts, it must list the directories in which fonts
|
|
are installed in the FONTS_DIRS.type variables, where type can be one of "ttf",
|
|
"type1" or "x11". This will add hooks to the installation scripts to run the
|
|
appropriate commands to update the fonts database files within each of those
|
|
directories. For convenience, if the directory path is relative, it is taken to
|
|
be relative to the package's installation prefix. Consider the following
|
|
example, taken from fonts/dbz-ttf:
|
|
|
|
FONTS_DIRS.ttf= ${PREFIX}/lib/X11/fonts/TTF
|
|
|
|
15.6.1. Disabling automatic update of the fonts databases
|
|
|
|
The automatic update of fonts databases can be disabled by the administrator by
|
|
setting the PKG_UPDATE_FONTS_DB environment variable to NO.
|
|
|
|
Chapter 16. Options handling
|
|
|
|
Table of Contents
|
|
|
|
16.1. Global default options
|
|
16.2. Converting packages to use bsd.options.mk
|
|
16.3. Option Names
|
|
16.4. Determining the options of dependencies
|
|
|
|
Many packages have the ability to be built to support different sets of
|
|
features. bsd.options.mk is a framework in pkgsrc that provides generic
|
|
handling of those options that determine different ways in which the packages
|
|
can be built. It's possible for the user to specify exactly which sets of
|
|
options will be built into a package or to allow a set of global default
|
|
options apply.
|
|
|
|
There are two broad classes of behaviors that one might want to control via
|
|
options. One is whether some particular feature is enabled in a program that
|
|
will be built anyway, often by including or not including a dependency on some
|
|
other package. The other is whether or not an additional program will be built
|
|
as part of the package. Generally, it is better to make a split package for
|
|
such additional programs instead of using options, because it enables binary
|
|
packages to be built which can then be added separately. For example, the foo
|
|
package might have minimal dependencies (those packages without which foo
|
|
doesn't make sense), and then the foo-gfoo package might include the GTK
|
|
frontend program gfoo. This is better than including a gtk option to foo that
|
|
adds gfoo, because either that option is default, in which case binary users
|
|
can't get foo without gfoo, or not default, in which case they can't get gfoo.
|
|
With split packages, they can install foo without having GTK, and later decide
|
|
to install gfoo (pulling in GTK at that time). This is an advantage to source
|
|
users too, avoiding the need for rebuilds.
|
|
|
|
Plugins with widely varying dependencies should usually be split instead of
|
|
options.
|
|
|
|
It is often more work to maintain split packages, especially if the upstream
|
|
package does not support this. The decision of split vs. option should be made
|
|
based on the likelihood that users will want or object to the various pieces,
|
|
the size of the dependencies that are included, and the amount of work.
|
|
|
|
A further consideration is licensing. Non-free parts, or parts that depend on
|
|
non-free dependencies (especially plugins) should almost always be split if
|
|
feasible.
|
|
|
|
16.1. Global default options
|
|
|
|
Global default options are listed in PKG_DEFAULT_OPTIONS, which is a list of
|
|
the options that should be built into every package if that option is
|
|
supported. This variable should be set in mk.conf.
|
|
|
|
16.2. Converting packages to use bsd.options.mk
|
|
|
|
The following example shows how bsd.options.mk should be used by the
|
|
hypothetical ``wibble'' package, either in the package Makefile, or in a file,
|
|
e.g. options.mk, that is included by the main package Makefile.
|
|
|
|
PKG_OPTIONS_VAR= PKG_OPTIONS.wibble
|
|
PKG_SUPPORTED_OPTIONS= wibble-foo ldap
|
|
PKG_OPTIONS_OPTIONAL_GROUPS= database
|
|
PKG_OPTIONS_GROUP.database= mysql pgsql
|
|
PKG_SUGGESTED_OPTIONS= wibble-foo
|
|
PKG_OPTIONS_LEGACY_VARS+= WIBBLE_USE_OPENLDAP:ldap
|
|
PKG_OPTIONS_LEGACY_OPTS+= foo:wibble-foo
|
|
|
|
.include "../../mk/bsd.prefs.mk"
|
|
|
|
# this package was previously named wibble2
|
|
.if defined(PKG_OPTIONS.wibble2)
|
|
PKG_LEGACY_OPTIONS+= ${PKG_OPTIONS.wibble2}
|
|
PKG_OPTIONS_DEPRECATED_WARNINGS+= \
|
|
"Deprecated variable PKG_OPTIONS.wibble2 used, use ${PKG_OPTIONS_VAR} instead."
|
|
.endif
|
|
|
|
.include "../../mk/bsd.options.mk"
|
|
|
|
# Package-specific option-handling
|
|
|
|
###
|
|
### FOO support
|
|
###
|
|
.if !empty(PKG_OPTIONS:Mwibble-foo)
|
|
CONFIGURE_ARGS+= --enable-foo
|
|
.endif
|
|
|
|
###
|
|
### LDAP support
|
|
###
|
|
.if !empty(PKG_OPTIONS:Mldap)
|
|
. include "../../databases/openldap-client/buildlink3.mk"
|
|
CONFIGURE_ARGS+= --enable-ldap=${BUILDLINK_PREFIX.openldap-client}
|
|
.endif
|
|
|
|
###
|
|
### database support
|
|
###
|
|
.if !empty(PKG_OPTIONS:Mmysql)
|
|
. include "../../mk/mysql.buildlink3.mk"
|
|
.endif
|
|
.if !empty(PKG_OPTIONS:Mpgsql)
|
|
. include "../../mk/pgsql.buildlink3.mk"
|
|
.endif
|
|
|
|
The first section contains the information about which build options are
|
|
supported by the package, and any default options settings if needed.
|
|
|
|
1. PKG_OPTIONS_VAR is the name of the make(1) variable that the user can set
|
|
to override the default options. It should be set to PKG_OPTIONS.pkgbase.
|
|
Do not set it to PKG_OPTIONS.${PKGBASE}, since PKGBASE is not defined at
|
|
the point where the options are processed.
|
|
|
|
2. PKG_SUPPORTED_OPTIONS is a list of build options supported by the package.
|
|
|
|
3. PKG_OPTIONS_OPTIONAL_GROUPS is a list of names of groups of mutually
|
|
exclusive options. The options in each group are listed in
|
|
PKG_OPTIONS_GROUP.groupname. The most specific setting of any option from
|
|
the group takes precedence over all other options in the group. Options
|
|
from the groups will be automatically added to PKG_SUPPORTED_OPTIONS.
|
|
|
|
4. PKG_OPTIONS_REQUIRED_GROUPS is like PKG_OPTIONS_OPTIONAL_GROUPS, but
|
|
building the packages will fail if no option from the group is selected.
|
|
|
|
5. PKG_OPTIONS_NONEMPTY_SETS is a list of names of sets of options. At least
|
|
one option from each set must be selected. The options in each set are
|
|
listed in PKG_OPTIONS_SET.setname. Options from the sets will be
|
|
automatically added to PKG_SUPPORTED_OPTIONS. Building the package will
|
|
fail if no option from the set is selected.
|
|
|
|
6. PKG_SUGGESTED_OPTIONS is a list of build options which are enabled by
|
|
default.
|
|
|
|
7. PKG_OPTIONS_LEGACY_VARS is a list of "USE_VARIABLE:option" pairs that map
|
|
legacy mk.conf variables to their option counterparts. Pairs should be
|
|
added with "+=" to keep the listing of global legacy variables. A warning
|
|
will be issued if the user uses a legacy variable.
|
|
|
|
8. PKG_OPTIONS_LEGACY_OPTS is a list of "old-option:new-option" pairs that map
|
|
options that have been renamed to their new counterparts. Pairs should be
|
|
added with "+=" to keep the listing of global legacy options. A warning
|
|
will be issued if the user uses a legacy option.
|
|
|
|
9. PKG_LEGACY_OPTIONS is a list of options implied by deprecated variables
|
|
used. This can be used for cases that neither PKG_OPTIONS_LEGACY_VARS nor
|
|
PKG_OPTIONS_LEGACY_OPTS can handle, e. g. when PKG_OPTIONS_VAR is renamed.
|
|
|
|
10. PKG_OPTIONS_DEPRECATED_WARNINGS is a list of warnings about deprecated
|
|
variables or options used, and what to use instead.
|
|
|
|
A package should never modify PKG_DEFAULT_OPTIONS or the variable named in
|
|
PKG_OPTIONS_VAR. These are strictly user-settable. To suggest a default set of
|
|
options, use PKG_SUGGESTED_OPTIONS.
|
|
|
|
PKG_OPTIONS_VAR must be defined before including bsd.options.mk. If none of
|
|
PKG_SUPPORTED_OPTIONS, PKG_OPTIONS_OPTIONAL_GROUPS, and
|
|
PKG_OPTIONS_REQUIRED_GROUPS are defined (as can happen with platform-specific
|
|
options if none of them is supported on the current platform), PKG_OPTIONS is
|
|
set to the empty list and the package is otherwise treated as not using the
|
|
options framework.
|
|
|
|
After the inclusion of bsd.options.mk, the variable PKG_OPTIONS contains the
|
|
list of selected build options, properly filtered to remove unsupported and
|
|
duplicate options.
|
|
|
|
The remaining sections contain the logic that is specific to each option. The
|
|
correct way to check for an option is to check whether it is listed in
|
|
PKG_OPTIONS:
|
|
|
|
.if !empty(PKG_OPTIONS:Moption)
|
|
|
|
16.3. Option Names
|
|
|
|
Options that enable similar features in different packages (like optional
|
|
support for a library) should use a common name in all packages that support it
|
|
(like the name of the library). If another package already has an option with
|
|
the same meaning, use the same name.
|
|
|
|
Options that enable features specific to one package, where it's unlikely that
|
|
another (unrelated) package has the same (or a similar) optional feature,
|
|
should use a name prefixed with pkgname-.
|
|
|
|
If a group of related packages share an optional feature specific to that
|
|
group, prefix it with the name of the "main" package (e. g.
|
|
djbware-errno-hack).
|
|
|
|
For new options, add a line to mk/defaults/options.description. Lines have two
|
|
fields, separated by tab. The first field is the option name, the second its
|
|
description. The description should be a whole sentence (starting with an
|
|
uppercase letter and ending with a period) that describes what enabling the
|
|
option does. E. g. "Enable ispell support." The file is sorted by option names.
|
|
|
|
16.4. Determining the options of dependencies
|
|
|
|
When writing buildlink3.mk files, it is often necessary to list different
|
|
dependencies based on the options with which the package was built. For
|
|
querying these options, the file pkgsrc/mk/pkg-build-options.mk should be used.
|
|
A typical example looks like this:
|
|
|
|
pkgbase := libpurple
|
|
.include "../../mk/pkg-build-options.mk"
|
|
|
|
.if !empty(PKG_BUILD_OPTIONS.libpurple:Mdbus)
|
|
...
|
|
.endif
|
|
|
|
Including pkg-build-options.mk here will set the variable
|
|
PKG_BUILD_OPTIONS.libpurple to the build options of the libpurple package,
|
|
which can then be queried like PKG_OPTIONS in the options.mk file. See the file
|
|
pkg-build-options.mk for more details.
|
|
|
|
Chapter 17. The build process
|
|
|
|
Table of Contents
|
|
|
|
17.1. Introduction
|
|
17.2. Program location
|
|
17.3. Directories used during the build process
|
|
17.4. Running a phase
|
|
17.5. The fetch phase
|
|
|
|
17.5.1. What to fetch and where to get it from
|
|
17.5.2. How are the files fetched?
|
|
|
|
17.6. The checksum phase
|
|
17.7. The extract phase
|
|
17.8. The patch phase
|
|
17.9. The tools phase
|
|
17.10. The wrapper phase
|
|
17.11. The configure phase
|
|
17.12. The build phase
|
|
17.13. The test phase
|
|
17.14. The install phase
|
|
17.15. The package phase
|
|
17.16. Cleaning up
|
|
17.17. Other helpful targets
|
|
|
|
17.1. Introduction
|
|
|
|
This chapter gives a detailed description on how a package is built. Building a
|
|
package is separated into different phases (for example fetch, build, install),
|
|
all of which are described in the following sections. Each phase is split into
|
|
so-called stages, which take the name of the containing phase, prefixed by one
|
|
of pre-, do- or post-. (Examples are pre-configure, post-build.) Most of the
|
|
actual work is done in the do-* stages.
|
|
|
|
Never override the regular targets (like fetch), if you have to, override the
|
|
do-* ones instead.
|
|
|
|
The basic steps for building a program are always the same. First the program's
|
|
source (distfile) must be brought to the local system and then extracted. After
|
|
any pkgsrc-specific patches to compile properly are applied, the software can
|
|
be configured, then built (usually by compiling), and finally the generated
|
|
binaries, etc. can be put into place on the system.
|
|
|
|
To get more details about what is happening at each step, you can set the
|
|
PKG_VERBOSE variable, or the PATCH_DEBUG variable if you are just interested in
|
|
more details about the patch step.
|
|
|
|
17.2. Program location
|
|
|
|
Before outlining the process performed by the NetBSD package system in the next
|
|
section, here's a brief discussion on where programs are installed, and which
|
|
variables influence this.
|
|
|
|
The automatic variable PREFIX indicates where all files of the final program
|
|
shall be installed. It is usually set to LOCALBASE (/usr/pkg), or CROSSBASE for
|
|
pkgs in the cross category. The value of PREFIX needs to be put into the
|
|
various places in the program's source where paths to these files are encoded.
|
|
See Section 11.3, "patches/*" and Section 19.3.1, "Shared libraries - libtool"
|
|
for more details.
|
|
|
|
When choosing which of these variables to use, follow the following rules:
|
|
|
|
* PREFIX always points to the location where the current pkg will be
|
|
installed. When referring to a pkg's own installation path, use "${PREFIX}
|
|
".
|
|
|
|
* LOCALBASE is where all non-X11 pkgs are installed. If you need to construct
|
|
a -I or -L argument to the compiler to find includes and libraries
|
|
installed by another non-X11 pkg, use "${LOCALBASE}". The name LOCALBASE
|
|
stems from FreeBSD, which installed all packages in /usr/local. As pkgsrc
|
|
leaves /usr/local for the system administrator, this variable is a
|
|
misnomer.
|
|
|
|
* X11BASE is where the actual X11 distribution (from xsrc, etc.) is
|
|
installed. When looking for standard X11 includes (not those installed by a
|
|
package), use "${X11BASE}".
|
|
|
|
* X11-based packages are special in that they may be installed in either
|
|
X11BASE or LOCALBASE.
|
|
|
|
Usually, X11 packages should be installed under LOCALBASE whenever
|
|
possible. Note that you will need to include ../../mk/x11.buildlink3.mk in
|
|
them to request the presence of X11 and to get the right compilation flags.
|
|
|
|
Even though, there are some packages that cannot be installed under
|
|
LOCALBASE: those that come with app-defaults files. These packages are
|
|
special and they must be placed under X11BASE. To accomplish this, set
|
|
either USE_X11BASE or USE_IMAKE in your package.
|
|
|
|
Some notes: If you need to find includes or libraries installed by a pkg
|
|
that has USE_IMAKE or USE_X11BASE in its pkg Makefile, you need to look in
|
|
both ${X11BASE} and ${LOCALBASE}. To force installation of all X11 packages
|
|
in LOCALBASE, the pkgtools/xpkgwedge package is enabled by default.
|
|
|
|
* X11PREFIX should be used to refer to the installed location of an X11
|
|
package. X11PREFIX will be set to X11BASE if xpkgwedge is not installed,
|
|
and to LOCALBASE if xpkgwedge is installed.
|
|
|
|
* If xpkgwedge is installed, it is possible to have some packages installed
|
|
in X11BASE and some in LOCALBASE. To determine the prefix of an installed
|
|
package, the EVAL_PREFIX definition can be used. It takes pairs in the
|
|
format "DIRNAME=<package>", and the make(1) variable DIRNAME will be set to
|
|
the prefix of the installed package <package>, or "${X11PREFIX}" if the
|
|
package is not installed.
|
|
|
|
This is best illustrated by example.
|
|
|
|
The following lines are taken from pkgsrc/wm/scwm/Makefile:
|
|
|
|
EVAL_PREFIX+= GTKDIR=gtk+
|
|
CONFIGURE_ARGS+= --with-guile-prefix=${LOCALBASE:Q}
|
|
CONFIGURE_ARGS+= --with-gtk-prefix=${GTKDIR:Q}
|
|
CONFIGURE_ARGS+= --enable-multibyte
|
|
|
|
Specific defaults can be defined for the packages evaluated using
|
|
EVAL_PREFIX, by using a definition of the form:
|
|
|
|
GTKDIR_DEFAULT= ${LOCALBASE}
|
|
|
|
where GTKDIR corresponds to the first definition in the EVAL_PREFIX pair.
|
|
|
|
* Within ${PREFIX}, packages should install files according to hier(7), with
|
|
the exception that manual pages go into ${PREFIX}/man, not ${PREFIX}/share/
|
|
man.
|
|
|
|
17.3. Directories used during the build process
|
|
|
|
When building a package, various directories are used to store source files,
|
|
temporary files, pkgsrc-internal files, and so on. These directories are
|
|
explained here.
|
|
|
|
Some of the directory variables contain relative pathnames. There are two
|
|
common base directories for these relative directories: PKGSRCDIR/PKGPATH is
|
|
used for directories that are pkgsrc-specific. WRKSRC is used for directories
|
|
inside the package itself.
|
|
|
|
PKGSRCDIR
|
|
|
|
This is an absolute pathname that points to the pkgsrc root directory.
|
|
Generally, you don't need it.
|
|
|
|
PKGDIR
|
|
|
|
This is an absolute pathname that points to the current package.
|
|
|
|
PKGPATH
|
|
|
|
This is a pathname relative to PKGSRCDIR that points to the current
|
|
package.
|
|
|
|
WRKDIR
|
|
|
|
This is an absolute pathname pointing to the directory where all work takes
|
|
place. The distfiles are extracted to this directory. It also contains
|
|
temporary directories and log files used by the various pkgsrc frameworks,
|
|
like buildlink or the wrappers.
|
|
|
|
WRKSRC
|
|
|
|
This is an absolute pathname pointing to the directory where the distfiles
|
|
are extracted. It is usually a direct subdirectory of WRKDIR, and often
|
|
it's the only directory entry that isn't hidden. This variable may be
|
|
changed by a package Makefile.
|
|
|
|
The CREATE_WRKDIR_SYMLINK definition takes either the value yes or no and
|
|
defaults to no. It indicates whether a symbolic link to the WRKDIR is to be
|
|
created in the pkgsrc entry's directory. If users would like to have their
|
|
pkgsrc trees behave in a read-only manner, then the value of
|
|
CREATE_WRKDIR_SYMLINK should be set to no.
|
|
|
|
17.4. Running a phase
|
|
|
|
You can run a particular phase by typing make phase, where phase is the name of
|
|
the phase. This will automatically run all phases that are required for this
|
|
phase. The default phase is build, that is, when you run make without
|
|
parameters in a package directory, the package will be built, but not
|
|
installed.
|
|
|
|
17.5. The fetch phase
|
|
|
|
The first step in building a package is to fetch the distribution files
|
|
(distfiles) from the sites that are providing them. This is the task of the
|
|
fetch phase.
|
|
|
|
17.5.1. What to fetch and where to get it from
|
|
|
|
In simple cases, MASTER_SITES defines all URLs from where the distfile, whose
|
|
name is derived from the DISTNAME variable, is fetched. The more complicated
|
|
cases are described below.
|
|
|
|
The variable DISTFILES specifies the list of distfiles that have to be fetched.
|
|
Its value defaults to ${DISTNAME}${EXTRACT_SUFX}, so that most packages don't
|
|
need to define it at all. EXTRACT_SUFX is .tar.gz by default, but can be
|
|
changed freely. Note that if your package requires additional distfiles to the
|
|
default one, you cannot just append the additional filenames using the +=
|
|
operator, but you have write for example:
|
|
|
|
DISTFILES= ${DISTNAME}${EXTRACT_SUFX} additional-files.tar.gz
|
|
|
|
Each distfile is fetched from a list of sites, usually MASTER_SITES. If the
|
|
package has multiple DISTFILES or multiple PATCHFILES from different sites, you
|
|
can set SITES.distfile to the list of URLs where the file distfile (including
|
|
the suffix) can be found.
|
|
|
|
DISTFILES= ${DISTNAME}${EXTRACT_SUFX}
|
|
DISTFILES+= foo-file.tar.gz
|
|
SITES.foo-file.tar.gz= \
|
|
http://www.somewhere.com/somehow/ \
|
|
http://www.somewhereelse.com/mirror/somehow/
|
|
|
|
When actually fetching the distfiles, each item from MASTER_SITES or SITES.*
|
|
gets the name of each distfile appended to it, without an intermediate slash.
|
|
Therefore, all site values have to end with a slash or other separator
|
|
character. This allows for example to set MASTER_SITES to a URL of a CGI script
|
|
that gets the name of the distfile as a parameter. In this case, the definition
|
|
would look like:
|
|
|
|
MASTER_SITES= http://www.example.com/download.cgi?file=
|
|
|
|
There are some predefined values for MASTER_SITES, which can be used in
|
|
packages. The names of the variables should speak for themselves.
|
|
|
|
${MASTER_SITE_APACHE}
|
|
${MASTER_SITE_BACKUP}
|
|
${MASTER_SITE_CYGWIN}
|
|
${MASTER_SITE_DEBIAN}
|
|
${MASTER_SITE_FREEBSD}
|
|
${MASTER_SITE_FREEBSD_LOCAL}
|
|
${MASTER_SITE_GENTOO}
|
|
${MASTER_SITE_GNOME}
|
|
${MASTER_SITE_GNU}
|
|
${MASTER_SITE_GNUSTEP}
|
|
${MASTER_SITE_IFARCHIVE}
|
|
${MASTER_SITE_KDE}
|
|
${MASTER_SITE_MOZILLA}
|
|
${MASTER_SITE_MYSQL}
|
|
${MASTER_SITE_OPENOFFICE}
|
|
${MASTER_SITE_PERL_CPAN}
|
|
${MASTER_SITE_PGSQL}
|
|
${MASTER_SITE_R_CRAN}
|
|
${MASTER_SITE_SOURCEFORGE}
|
|
${MASTER_SITE_SOURCEFORGE_JP}
|
|
${MASTER_SITE_SUNSITE}
|
|
${MASTER_SITE_SUSE}
|
|
${MASTER_SITE_TEX_CTAN}
|
|
${MASTER_SITE_XCONTRIB}
|
|
${MASTER_SITE_XEMACS}
|
|
|
|
Some explanations for the less self-explaining ones: MASTER_SITE_BACKUP
|
|
contains backup sites for packages that are maintained in ftp://ftp.NetBSD.org/
|
|
pub/NetBSD/packages/distfiles/${DIST_SUBDIR}. MASTER_SITE_LOCAL contains local
|
|
package source distributions that are maintained in ftp://ftp.NetBSD.org/pub/
|
|
NetBSD/packages/distfiles/LOCAL_PORTS/.
|
|
|
|
If you choose one of these predefined sites, you may want to specify a
|
|
subdirectory of that site. Since these macros may expand to more than one
|
|
actual site, you must use the following construct to specify a subdirectory:
|
|
|
|
MASTER_SITES= ${MASTER_SITE_GNU:=subdirectory/name/}
|
|
MASTER_SITES= ${MASTER_SITE_SOURCEFORGE:=project_name/}
|
|
|
|
Note the trailing slash after the subdirectory name.
|
|
|
|
17.5.2. How are the files fetched?
|
|
|
|
The fetch phase makes sure that all the distfiles exist in a local directory
|
|
(DISTDIR, which can be set by the pkgsrc user). If the files do not exist, they
|
|
are fetched using commands of the form
|
|
|
|
${FETCH_CMD} ${FETCH_BEFORE_ARGS} ${site}${file} ${FETCH_AFTER_ARGS}
|
|
|
|
where ${site} varies through several possibilities in turn: first,
|
|
MASTER_SITE_OVERRIDE is tried, then the sites specified in either SITES.file if
|
|
defined, else MASTER_SITES or PATCH_SITES, as applies, then finally the value
|
|
of MASTER_SITE_BACKUP. The order of all except the first and the last can be
|
|
optionally sorted by the user, via setting either MASTER_SORT_RANDOM, and
|
|
MASTER_SORT_AWK or MASTER_SORT_REGEX.
|
|
|
|
The specific command and arguments used depend on the FETCH_USING parameter.
|
|
The example above is for FETCH_USING=custom.
|
|
|
|
The distfiles mirror run by the NetBSD Foundation uses the mirror-distfiles
|
|
target to mirror the distfiles, if they are freely distributable. Packages
|
|
setting NO_SRC_ON_FTP (usually to "${RESTRICTED}") will not have their
|
|
distfiles mirrored.
|
|
|
|
17.6. The checksum phase
|
|
|
|
After the distfile(s) are fetched, their checksum is generated and compared
|
|
with the checksums stored in the distinfo file. If the checksums don't match,
|
|
the build is aborted. This is to ensure the same distfile is used for building,
|
|
and that the distfile wasn't changed, e.g. by some malign force, deliberately
|
|
changed distfiles on the master distribution site or network lossage.
|
|
|
|
17.7. The extract phase
|
|
|
|
When the distfiles are present on the local system, they need to be extracted,
|
|
as they usually come in the form of some compressed archive format.
|
|
|
|
By default, all DISTFILES are extracted. If you only need some of them, you can
|
|
set the EXTRACT_ONLY variable to the list of those files.
|
|
|
|
Extracting the files is usually done by a little program, mk/extract/extract,
|
|
which already knows how to extract various archive formats, so most likely you
|
|
will not need to change anything here. But if you need, the following variables
|
|
may help you:
|
|
|
|
EXTRACT_OPTS_{BIN,LHA,PAX,RAR,TAR,ZIP,ZOO}
|
|
|
|
Use these variables to override the default options for an extract command,
|
|
which are defined in mk/extract/extract.
|
|
|
|
EXTRACT_USING
|
|
|
|
This variable can be set to bsdtar, gtar, nbtar (which is the default
|
|
value), pax, or an absolute pathname pointing to the command with which tar
|
|
archives should be extracted. It is preferred to choose bsdtar over gtar if
|
|
NetBSD's pax-as-tar is not good enough.
|
|
|
|
If the extract program doesn't serve your needs, you can also override the
|
|
EXTRACT_CMD variable, which holds the command used for extracting the files.
|
|
This command is executed in the ${WRKSRC} directory. During execution of this
|
|
command, the shell variable extract_file holds the absolute pathname of the
|
|
file that is going to be extracted.
|
|
|
|
And if that still does not suffice, you can override the do-extract target in
|
|
the package Makefile.
|
|
|
|
17.8. The patch phase
|
|
|
|
After extraction, all the patches named by the PATCHFILES, those present in the
|
|
patches subdirectory of the package as well as in $LOCALPATCHES/$PKGPATH (e.g.
|
|
/usr/local/patches/graphics/png) are applied. Patchfiles ending in .Z or .gz
|
|
are uncompressed before they are applied, files ending in .orig or .rej are
|
|
ignored. Any special options to patch(1) can be handed in PATCH_DIST_ARGS. See
|
|
Section 11.3, "patches/*" for more details.
|
|
|
|
By default patch(1) is given special args to make it fail if the patches apply
|
|
with some lines of fuzz. Please fix (regen) the patches so that they apply
|
|
cleanly. The rationale behind this is that patches that don't apply cleanly may
|
|
end up being applied in the wrong place, and cause severe harm there.
|
|
|
|
17.9. The tools phase
|
|
|
|
This is covered in Chapter 18, Tools needed for building or running.
|
|
|
|
17.10. The wrapper phase
|
|
|
|
This phase creates wrapper programs for the compilers and linkers. The
|
|
following variables can be used to tweak the wrappers.
|
|
|
|
ECHO_WRAPPER_MSG
|
|
|
|
The command used to print progress messages. Does nothing by default. Set
|
|
to ${ECHO} to see the progress messages.
|
|
|
|
WRAPPER_DEBUG
|
|
|
|
This variable can be set to yes (default) or no, depending on whether you
|
|
want additional information in the wrapper log file.
|
|
|
|
WRAPPER_UPDATE_CACHE
|
|
|
|
This variable can be set to yes or no, depending on whether the wrapper
|
|
should use its cache, which will improve the speed. The default value is
|
|
yes, but is forced to no if the platform does not support it.
|
|
|
|
WRAPPER_REORDER_CMDS
|
|
|
|
A list of reordering commands. A reordering command has the form reorder:l:
|
|
lib1:lib2. It ensures that that -llib1 occurs before -llib2.
|
|
|
|
WRAPPER_TRANSFORM_CMDS
|
|
|
|
A list of transformation commands. [TODO: investigate further]
|
|
|
|
17.11. The configure phase
|
|
|
|
Most pieces of software need information on the header files, system calls, and
|
|
library routines which are available on the platform they run on. The process
|
|
of determining this information is known as configuration, and is usually
|
|
automated. In most cases, a script is supplied with the distfiles, and its
|
|
invocation results in generation of header files, Makefiles, etc.
|
|
|
|
If the package contains a configure script, this can be invoked by setting
|
|
HAS_CONFIGURE to "yes". If the configure script is a GNU autoconf script, you
|
|
should set GNU_CONFIGURE to "yes" instead. What happens in the configure phase
|
|
is roughly:
|
|
|
|
.for d in ${CONFIGURE_DIRS}
|
|
cd ${WRKSRC} \
|
|
&& cd ${d} \
|
|
&& env ${CONFIGURE_ENV} ${CONFIGURE_SCRIPT} ${CONFIGURE_ARGS}
|
|
.endfor
|
|
|
|
CONFIGURE_DIRS (default: ".") is a list of pathnames relative to WRKSRC. In
|
|
each of these directories, the configure script is run with the environment
|
|
CONFIGURE_ENV and arguments CONFIGURE_ARGS. The variables CONFIGURE_ENV,
|
|
CONFIGURE_SCRIPT (default: "./configure") and CONFIGURE_ARGS may all be changed
|
|
by the package.
|
|
|
|
If the program uses an Imakefile for configuration, the appropriate steps can
|
|
be invoked by setting USE_IMAKE to "yes". (If you only want the package
|
|
installed in ${X11PREFIX} but xmkmf not being run, set USE_X11BASE instead.)
|
|
You can add variables to xmkmf's environment by adding them to the SCRIPTS_ENV
|
|
variable.
|
|
|
|
If the program uses cmake for configuration, the appropriate steps can be
|
|
invoked by setting USE_CMAKE to "yes". You can add variables to cmake's
|
|
environment by adding them to the CONFIGURE_ENV variable and arguments to cmake
|
|
by adding them to the CMAKE_ARGS variable. The top directory argument is given
|
|
by the CMAKE_ARG_PATH variable, that defaults to "." (relative to
|
|
CONFIGURE_DIRS)
|
|
|
|
If there is no configure step at all, set NO_CONFIGURE to "yes".
|
|
|
|
17.12. The build phase
|
|
|
|
For building a package, a rough equivalent of the following code is executed.
|
|
|
|
.for d in ${BUILD_DIRS}
|
|
cd ${WRKSRC} \
|
|
&& cd ${d} \
|
|
&& env ${MAKE_ENV} \
|
|
${MAKE_PROGRAM} ${BUILD_MAKE_FLAGS} \
|
|
-f ${MAKE_FILE} \
|
|
${BUILD_TARGET}
|
|
.endfor
|
|
|
|
BUILD_DIRS (default: ".") is a list of pathnames relative to WRKSRC. In each of
|
|
these directories, MAKE_PROGRAM is run with the environment MAKE_ENV and
|
|
arguments BUILD_MAKE_FLAGS. The variables MAKE_ENV, BUILD_MAKE_FLAGS, MAKE_FILE
|
|
and BUILD_TARGET may all be changed by the package.
|
|
|
|
The default value of MAKE_PROGRAM is "gmake" if USE_TOOLS contains "gmake",
|
|
"make" otherwise. The default value of MAKE_FILE is "Makefile", and
|
|
BUILD_TARGET defaults to "all".
|
|
|
|
If there is no build step at all, set NO_BUILD to "yes".
|
|
|
|
17.13. The test phase
|
|
|
|
[TODO]
|
|
|
|
17.14. The install phase
|
|
|
|
Once the build stage has completed, the final step is to install the software
|
|
in public directories, so users can access the programs and files.
|
|
|
|
In the install phase, a rough equivalent of the following code is executed.
|
|
Additionally, before and after this code, much magic is performed to do
|
|
consistency checks, registering the package, and so on.
|
|
|
|
.for d in ${INSTALL_DIRS}
|
|
cd ${WRKSRC} \
|
|
&& cd ${d} \
|
|
&& env ${MAKE_ENV} \
|
|
${MAKE_PROGRAM} ${INSTALL_MAKE_FLAGS} \
|
|
-f ${MAKE_FILE} \
|
|
${INSTALL_TARGET}
|
|
.endfor
|
|
|
|
The variable's meanings are analogous to the ones in the build phase.
|
|
INSTALL_DIRS defaults to BUILD_DIRS. INSTALL_TARGET is "install" by default,
|
|
plus "install.man" if USE_IMAKE is defined and NO_INSTALL_MANPAGES is not
|
|
defined.
|
|
|
|
In the install phase, the following variables are useful. They are all
|
|
variations of the install(1) command that have the owner, group and permissions
|
|
preset. INSTALL is the plain install command. The specialized variants,
|
|
together with their intended use, are:
|
|
|
|
INSTALL_PROGRAM_DIR
|
|
|
|
directories that contain binaries
|
|
|
|
INSTALL_SCRIPT_DIR
|
|
|
|
directories that contain scripts
|
|
|
|
INSTALL_LIB_DIR
|
|
|
|
directories that contain shared and static libraries
|
|
|
|
INSTALL_DATA_DIR
|
|
|
|
directories that contain data files
|
|
|
|
INSTALL_MAN_DIR
|
|
|
|
directories that contain man pages
|
|
|
|
INSTALL_PROGRAM
|
|
|
|
binaries that can be stripped from debugging symbols
|
|
|
|
INSTALL_SCRIPT
|
|
|
|
binaries that cannot be stripped
|
|
|
|
INSTALL_GAME
|
|
|
|
game binaries
|
|
|
|
INSTALL_LIB
|
|
|
|
shared and static libraries
|
|
|
|
INSTALL_DATA
|
|
|
|
data files
|
|
|
|
INSTALL_GAME_DATA
|
|
|
|
data files for games
|
|
|
|
INSTALL_MAN
|
|
|
|
man pages
|
|
|
|
Some other variables are:
|
|
|
|
INSTALLATION_DIRS
|
|
|
|
A list of directories relative to PREFIX that are created by pkgsrc at the
|
|
beginning of the install phase. The package is supposed to create all
|
|
needed directories itself before installing files to it and list all other
|
|
directories here.
|
|
|
|
In the rare cases that a package shouldn't install anything, set NO_INSTALL to
|
|
"yes". This is mostly relevant for packages in the regress category.
|
|
|
|
17.15. The package phase
|
|
|
|
Once the install stage has completed, a binary package of the installed files
|
|
can be built. These binary packages can be used for quick installation without
|
|
previous compilation, e.g. by the make bin-install or by using pkg_add.
|
|
|
|
By default, the binary packages are created in ${PACKAGES}/All and symlinks are
|
|
created in ${PACKAGES}/category, one for each category in the CATEGORIES
|
|
variable. PACKAGES defaults to pkgsrc/packages.
|
|
|
|
17.16. Cleaning up
|
|
|
|
Once you're finished with a package, you can clean the work directory by
|
|
running make clean. If you want to clean the work directories of all
|
|
dependencies too, use make clean-depends.
|
|
|
|
17.17. Other helpful targets
|
|
|
|
pre/post-*
|
|
|
|
For any of the main targets described in the previous section, two
|
|
auxiliary targets exist with "pre-" and "post-" used as a prefix for the
|
|
main target's name. These targets are invoked before and after the main
|
|
target is called, allowing extra configuration or installation steps be
|
|
performed from a package's Makefile, for example, which a program's
|
|
configure script or install target omitted.
|
|
|
|
do-*
|
|
|
|
Should one of the main targets do the wrong thing, and should there be no
|
|
variable to fix this, you can redefine it with the do-* target. (Note that
|
|
redefining the target itself instead of the do-* target is a bad idea, as
|
|
the pre-* and post-* targets won't be called anymore, etc.) You will not
|
|
usually need to do this.
|
|
|
|
reinstall
|
|
|
|
If you did a make install and you noticed some file was not installed
|
|
properly, you can repeat the installation with this target, which will
|
|
ignore the "already installed" flag.
|
|
|
|
This is the default value of DEPENDS_TARGET except in the case of make
|
|
update and make package, where the defaults are "package" and "update",
|
|
respectively.
|
|
|
|
deinstall
|
|
|
|
This target does a pkg_delete(1) in the current directory, effectively
|
|
de-installing the package. The following variables can be used to tune the
|
|
behaviour:
|
|
|
|
PKG_VERBOSE
|
|
|
|
Add a "-v" to the pkg_delete(1) command.
|
|
|
|
DEINSTALLDEPENDS
|
|
|
|
Remove all packages that require (depend on) the given package. This
|
|
can be used to remove any packages that may have been pulled in by a
|
|
given package, e.g. if make deinstall DEINSTALLDEPENDS=1 is done in
|
|
pkgsrc/x11/kde, this is likely to remove whole KDE. Works by adding
|
|
"-R" to the pkg_delete(1) command line.
|
|
|
|
bin-install
|
|
|
|
Install a binary package from local disk and via FTP from a list of sites
|
|
(see the BINPKG_SITES variable), and do a make package if no binary package
|
|
is available anywhere. The arguments given to pkg_add can be set via
|
|
BIN_INSTALL_FLAGS e.g., to do verbose operation, etc.
|
|
|
|
update
|
|
|
|
This target causes the current package to be updated to the latest version.
|
|
The package and all depending packages first get de-installed, then current
|
|
versions of the corresponding packages get compiled and installed. This is
|
|
similar to manually noting which packages are currently installed, then
|
|
performing a series of make deinstall and make install (or whatever
|
|
UPDATE_TARGET is set to) for these packages.
|
|
|
|
You can use the "update" target to resume package updating in case a
|
|
previous make update was interrupted for some reason. However, in this
|
|
case, make sure you don't call make clean or otherwise remove the list of
|
|
dependent packages in WRKDIR. Otherwise, you lose the ability to
|
|
automatically update the current package along with the dependent packages
|
|
you have installed.
|
|
|
|
Resuming an interrupted make update will only work as long as the package
|
|
tree remains unchanged. If the source code for one of the packages to be
|
|
updated has been changed, resuming make update will most certainly fail!
|
|
|
|
The following variables can be used either on the command line or in
|
|
mk.conf to alter the behaviour of make update:
|
|
|
|
UPDATE_TARGET
|
|
|
|
Install target to recursively use for the updated package and the
|
|
dependent packages. Defaults to DEPENDS_TARGET if set, "install"
|
|
otherwise for make update. Other good targets are "package" or
|
|
"bin-install". Do not set this to "update" or you will get stuck in an
|
|
endless loop!
|
|
|
|
NOCLEAN
|
|
|
|
Don't clean up after updating. Useful if you want to leave the work
|
|
sources of the updated packages around for inspection or other
|
|
purposes. Be sure you eventually clean up the source tree (see the
|
|
"clean-update" target below) or you may run into troubles with old
|
|
source code still lying around on your next make or make update.
|
|
|
|
REINSTALL
|
|
|
|
Deinstall each package before installing (making DEPENDS_TARGET). This
|
|
may be necessary if the "clean-update" target (see below) was called
|
|
after interrupting a running make update.
|
|
|
|
DEPENDS_TARGET
|
|
|
|
Allows you to disable recursion and hardcode the target for packages.
|
|
The default is "update" for the update target, facilitating a recursive
|
|
update of prerequisite packages. Only set DEPENDS_TARGET if you want to
|
|
disable recursive updates. Use UPDATE_TARGET instead to just set a
|
|
specific target for each package to be installed during make update
|
|
(see above).
|
|
|
|
clean-update
|
|
|
|
Clean the source tree for all packages that would get updated if make
|
|
update was called from the current directory. This target should not be
|
|
used if the current package (or any of its depending packages) have already
|
|
been de-installed (e.g., after calling make update) or you may lose some
|
|
packages you intended to update. As a rule of thumb: only use this target
|
|
before the first time you run make update and only if you have a dirty
|
|
package tree (e.g., if you used NOCLEAN).
|
|
|
|
If you are unsure about whether your tree is clean, you can either perform
|
|
a make clean at the top of the tree, or use the following sequence of
|
|
commands from the directory of the package you want to update (before
|
|
running make update for the first time, otherwise you lose all the packages
|
|
you wanted to update!):
|
|
|
|
# make clean-update
|
|
# make clean CLEANDEPENDS=YES
|
|
# make update
|
|
|
|
|
|
The following variables can be used either on the command line or in
|
|
mk.conf to alter the behaviour of make clean-update:
|
|
|
|
CLEAR_DIRLIST
|
|
|
|
After make clean, do not reconstruct the list of directories to update
|
|
for this package. Only use this if make update successfully installed
|
|
all packages you wanted to update. Normally, this is done automatically
|
|
on make update, but may have been suppressed by the NOCLEAN variable
|
|
(see above).
|
|
|
|
replace
|
|
|
|
Update the installation of the current package. This differs from update in
|
|
that it does not replace dependent packages. You will need to install
|
|
pkgtools/pkg_tarup for this target to work.
|
|
|
|
Be careful when using this target! There are no guarantees that dependent
|
|
packages will still work, in particular they will most certainly break if
|
|
you make replace a library package whose shared library major version
|
|
changed between your installed version and the new one. For this reason,
|
|
this target is not officially supported and only recommended for advanced
|
|
users.
|
|
|
|
info
|
|
|
|
This target invokes pkg_info(1) for the current package. You can use this
|
|
to check which version of a package is installed.
|
|
|
|
index
|
|
|
|
This is a top-level command, i.e. it should be used in the pkgsrc
|
|
directory. It creates a database of all packages in the local pkgsrc tree,
|
|
including dependencies, comment, maintainer, and some other useful
|
|
information. Individual entries are created by running make describe in the
|
|
packages' directories. This index file is saved as pkgsrc/INDEX. It can be
|
|
displayed in verbose format by running make print-index. You can search in
|
|
it with make search key=something. You can extract a list of all packages
|
|
that depend on a particular one by running make show-deps PKG=somepackage.
|
|
|
|
Running this command takes a very long time, some hours even on fast
|
|
machines!
|
|
|
|
readme
|
|
|
|
This target generates a README.html file, which can be viewed using a
|
|
browser such as www/firefox or www/links. The generated files contain
|
|
references to any packages which are in the PACKAGES directory on the local
|
|
host. The generated files can be made to refer to URLs based on
|
|
FTP_PKG_URL_HOST and FTP_PKG_URL_DIR. For example, if I wanted to generate
|
|
README.html files which pointed to binary packages on the local machine, in
|
|
the directory /usr/packages, set FTP_PKG_URL_HOST=file://localhost and
|
|
FTP_PKG_URL_DIR=/usr/packages. The ${PACKAGES} directory and its
|
|
subdirectories will be searched for all the binary packages.
|
|
|
|
The target can be run at the toplevel or in category directories, in which
|
|
case it descends recursively.
|
|
|
|
readme-all
|
|
|
|
This is a top-level command, run it in pkgsrc. Use this target to create a
|
|
file README-all.html which contains a list of all packages currently
|
|
available in the NetBSD Packages Collection, together with the category
|
|
they belong to and a short description. This file is compiled from the
|
|
pkgsrc/*/README.html files, so be sure to run this after a make readme.
|
|
|
|
cdrom-readme
|
|
|
|
This is very much the same as the "readme" target (see above), but is to be
|
|
used when generating a pkgsrc tree to be written to a CD-ROM. This target
|
|
also produces README.html files, and can be made to refer to URLs based on
|
|
CDROM_PKG_URL_HOST and CDROM_PKG_URL_DIR.
|
|
|
|
show-distfiles
|
|
|
|
This target shows which distfiles and patchfiles are needed to build the
|
|
package (ALLFILES, which contains all DISTFILES and PATCHFILES, but not
|
|
patches/*).
|
|
|
|
show-downlevel
|
|
|
|
This target shows nothing if the package is not installed. If a version of
|
|
this package is installed, but is not the version provided in this version
|
|
of pkgsrc, then a warning message is displayed. This target can be used to
|
|
show which of your installed packages are downlevel, and so the old
|
|
versions can be deleted, and the current ones added.
|
|
|
|
show-pkgsrc-dir
|
|
|
|
This target shows the directory in the pkgsrc hierarchy from which the
|
|
package can be built and installed. This may not be the same directory as
|
|
the one from which the package was installed. This target is intended to be
|
|
used by people who may wish to upgrade many packages on a single host, and
|
|
can be invoked from the top-level pkgsrc Makefile by using the
|
|
"show-host-specific-pkgs" target.
|
|
|
|
show-installed-depends
|
|
|
|
This target shows which installed packages match the current package's
|
|
DEPENDS. Useful if out of date dependencies are causing build problems.
|
|
|
|
check-shlibs
|
|
|
|
After a package is installed, check all its binaries and (on ELF platforms)
|
|
shared libraries to see if they find the shared libs they need. Run by
|
|
default if PKG_DEVELOPER is set in mk.conf.
|
|
|
|
print-PLIST
|
|
|
|
After a "make install" from a new or upgraded pkg, this prints out an
|
|
attempt to generate a new PLIST from a find -newer work/.extract_done. An
|
|
attempt is made to care for shared libs etc., but it is strongly
|
|
recommended to review the result before putting it into PLIST. On upgrades,
|
|
it's useful to diff the output of this command against an already existing
|
|
PLIST file.
|
|
|
|
If the package installs files via tar(1) or other methods that don't update
|
|
file access times, be sure to add these files manually to your PLIST, as
|
|
the "find -newer" command used by this target won't catch them!
|
|
|
|
See Section 13.3, "Tweaking output of make print-PLIST" for more
|
|
information on this target.
|
|
|
|
bulk-package
|
|
|
|
Used to do bulk builds. If an appropriate binary package already exists, no
|
|
action is taken. If not, this target will compile, install and package it
|
|
(and its depends, if PKG_DEPENDS is set properly. See Section 7.3.1,
|
|
"Configuration"). After creating the binary package, the sources, the
|
|
just-installed package and its required packages are removed, preserving
|
|
free disk space.
|
|
|
|
Beware that this target may deinstall all packages installed on a system!
|
|
|
|
bulk-install
|
|
|
|
Used during bulk-installs to install required packages. If an up-to-date
|
|
binary package is available, it will be installed via pkg_add(1). If not,
|
|
make bulk-package will be executed, but the installed binary won't be
|
|
removed.
|
|
|
|
A binary package is considered "up-to-date" to be installed via pkg_add(1)
|
|
if:
|
|
|
|
* None of the package's files (Makefile, ...) were modified since it was
|
|
built.
|
|
|
|
* None of the package's required (binary) packages were modified since it
|
|
was built.
|
|
|
|
Beware that this target may deinstall all packages installed on a system!
|
|
|
|
Chapter 18. Tools needed for building or running
|
|
|
|
Table of Contents
|
|
|
|
18.1. Tools for pkgsrc builds
|
|
18.2. Tools needed by packages
|
|
18.3. Tools provided by platforms
|
|
18.4. Questions regarding the tools
|
|
|
|
The USE_TOOLS definition is used both internally by pkgsrc and also for
|
|
individual packages to define what commands are needed for building a package
|
|
(like BUILD_DEPENDS) or for later run-time of an installed packaged (such as
|
|
DEPENDS). If the native system provides an adequate tool, then in many cases, a
|
|
pkgsrc package will not be used.
|
|
|
|
When building a package, the replacement tools are made available in a
|
|
directory (as symlinks or wrapper scripts) that is early in the executable
|
|
search path. Just like the buildlink system, this helps with consistent builds.
|
|
|
|
A tool may be needed to help build a specific package. For example, perl, GNU
|
|
make (gmake) or yacc may be needed.
|
|
|
|
Also a tool may be needed, for example, because the native system's supplied
|
|
tool may be inefficient for building a package with pkgsrc. For example, a
|
|
package may need GNU awk, bison (instead of yacc) or a better sed.
|
|
|
|
The tools used by a package can be listed by running make show-tools.
|
|
|
|
18.1. Tools for pkgsrc builds
|
|
|
|
The default set of tools used by pkgsrc is defined in bsd.pkg.mk. This includes
|
|
standard Unix tools, such as: cat, awk, chmod, test, and so on. These can be
|
|
seen by running: make show-var VARNAME=USE_TOOLS.
|
|
|
|
If a package needs a specific program to build then the USE_TOOLS variable can
|
|
be used to define the tools needed.
|
|
|
|
18.2. Tools needed by packages
|
|
|
|
In the following examples, the :pkgsrc means to use the pkgsrc version and not
|
|
the native version for a build dependency. And the :run means that it is used
|
|
for a run-time dependencies also (and becomes a DEPENDS). The default is a
|
|
build dependency which can be set with :build. (So in this example, it is the
|
|
same as gmake:build and pkg-config:build.)
|
|
|
|
USE_TOOLS+= mktemp:pkgsrc
|
|
USE_TOOLS+= gmake perl:run pkg-config
|
|
|
|
When using the tools framework, a TOOLS_PATH.foo variable is defined which
|
|
contains the full path to the appropriate tool. For example, TOOLS_PATH.bash
|
|
could be "/bin/bash" on Linux systems.
|
|
|
|
If you always need a pkgsrc version of the tool at run-time, then just use
|
|
DEPENDS instead.
|
|
|
|
18.3. Tools provided by platforms
|
|
|
|
When improving or porting pkgsrc to a new platform, have a look at (or create)
|
|
the corresponding platform specific make file fragment under pkgsrc/mk/tools/
|
|
tools.${OPSYS}.mk which defines the name of the common tools. For example:
|
|
|
|
.if exists(/usr/bin/bzcat)
|
|
TOOLS_PLATFORM.bzcat?= /usr/bin/bzcat
|
|
.elif exists(/usr/bin/bzip2)
|
|
TOOLS_PLATFORM.bzcat?= /usr/bin/bzip2 -cd
|
|
.endif
|
|
|
|
TOOLS_PLATFORM.true?= true # shell builtin
|
|
|
|
18.4. Questions regarding the tools
|
|
|
|
18.4.1. How do I add a new tool?
|
|
18.4.2. How do I get a list of all available tools?
|
|
18.4.3. How can I get a list of all the tools that a package is using while
|
|
being built? I want to know whether it uses sed or not.
|
|
|
|
18.4.1. How do I add a new tool?
|
|
|
|
TODO
|
|
|
|
18.4.2. How do I get a list of all available tools?
|
|
|
|
TODO
|
|
|
|
18.4.3. How can I get a list of all the tools that a package is using while
|
|
being built? I want to know whether it uses sed or not.
|
|
|
|
Currently, you can't. (TODO: But I want to be able to do it.)
|
|
|
|
Chapter 19. Making your package work
|
|
|
|
Table of Contents
|
|
|
|
19.1. General operation
|
|
|
|
19.1.1. Portability of packages
|
|
19.1.2. How to pull in user-settable variables from ???
|
|
19.1.3. User interaction
|
|
19.1.4. Handling licenses
|
|
19.1.5. Restricted packages
|
|
19.1.6. Handling dependencies
|
|
19.1.7. Handling conflicts with other packages
|
|
19.1.8. Packages that cannot or should not be built
|
|
19.1.9. Packages which should not be deleted, once installed
|
|
19.1.10. Handling packages with security problems
|
|
19.1.11. How to handle incrementing versions when fixing an existing
|
|
package
|
|
19.1.12. Substituting variable text in the package files (the SUBST
|
|
framework)
|
|
|
|
19.2. Fixing problems in the fetch phase
|
|
|
|
19.2.1. Packages whose distfiles aren't available for plain downloading
|
|
19.2.2. How to handle modified distfiles with the 'old' name
|
|
|
|
19.3. Fixing problems in the configure phase
|
|
|
|
19.3.1. Shared libraries - libtool
|
|
19.3.2. Using libtool on GNU packages that already support libtool
|
|
19.3.3. GNU Autoconf/Automake
|
|
|
|
19.4. Programming languages
|
|
|
|
19.4.1. C, C++, and Fortran
|
|
19.4.2. Java
|
|
19.4.3. Packages containing perl scripts
|
|
19.4.4. Other programming languages
|
|
|
|
19.5. Fixing problems in the build phase
|
|
|
|
19.5.1. Compiling C and C++ code conditionally
|
|
19.5.2. How to handle compiler bugs
|
|
19.5.3. Undefined reference to ...
|
|
19.5.4. Running out of memory
|
|
|
|
19.6. Fixing problems in the install phase
|
|
|
|
19.6.1. Creating needed directories
|
|
19.6.2. Where to install documentation
|
|
19.6.3. Installing highscore files
|
|
19.6.4. Adding DESTDIR support to packages
|
|
19.6.5. Packages with hardcoded paths to other interpreters
|
|
19.6.6. Packages installing perl modules
|
|
19.6.7. Packages installing info files
|
|
19.6.8. Packages installing man pages
|
|
19.6.9. Packages installing GConf data files
|
|
19.6.10. Packages installing scrollkeeper/rarian data files
|
|
19.6.11. Packages installing X11 fonts
|
|
19.6.12. Packages installing GTK2 modules
|
|
19.6.13. Packages installing SGML or XML data
|
|
19.6.14. Packages installing extensions to the MIME database
|
|
19.6.15. Packages using intltool
|
|
19.6.16. Packages installing startup scripts
|
|
19.6.17. Packages installing TeX modules
|
|
19.6.18. Packages supporting running binaries in emulation
|
|
19.6.19. Packages installing hicolor theme icons
|
|
19.6.20. Packages installing desktop files
|
|
|
|
19.7. Marking packages as having problems
|
|
|
|
19.1. General operation
|
|
|
|
19.1.1. Portability of packages
|
|
|
|
One appealing feature of pkgsrc is that it runs on many different platforms. As
|
|
a result, it is important to ensure, where possible, that packages in pkgsrc
|
|
are portable. This chapter mentions some particular details you should pay
|
|
attention to while working on pkgsrc.
|
|
|
|
19.1.2. How to pull in user-settable variables from mk.conf
|
|
|
|
The pkgsrc user can configure pkgsrc by overriding several variables in the
|
|
file pointed to by MAKECONF, which is mk.conf by default. When you want to use
|
|
those variables in the preprocessor directives of make(1) (for example .if or
|
|
.for), you need to include the file ../../mk/bsd.prefs.mk before, which in turn
|
|
loads the user preferences.
|
|
|
|
But note that some variables may not be completely defined after ../../mk/
|
|
bsd.prefs.mk has been included, as they may contain references to variables
|
|
that are not yet defined. In shell commands this is no problem, since variables
|
|
are actually macros, which are only expanded when they are used. But in the
|
|
preprocessor directives mentioned above and in dependency lines (of the form
|
|
target: dependencies) the variables are expanded at load time.
|
|
|
|
Note
|
|
|
|
Currently there is no exhaustive list of all variables that tells you whether
|
|
they can be used at load time or only at run time, but it is in preparation.
|
|
|
|
19.1.3. User interaction
|
|
|
|
Occasionally, packages require interaction from the user, and this can be in a
|
|
number of ways:
|
|
|
|
* When fetching the distfiles, some packages require user interaction such as
|
|
entering username/password or accepting a license on a web page.
|
|
|
|
* When extracting the distfiles, some packages may ask for passwords.
|
|
|
|
* help to configure the package before it is built
|
|
|
|
* help during the build process
|
|
|
|
* help during the installation of a package
|
|
|
|
The INTERACTIVE_STAGE definition is provided to notify the pkgsrc mechanism of
|
|
an interactive stage which will be needed, and this should be set in the
|
|
package's Makefile, e.g.:
|
|
|
|
INTERACTIVE_STAGE= build
|
|
|
|
|
|
Multiple interactive stages can be specified:
|
|
|
|
INTERACTIVE_STAGE= configure install
|
|
|
|
|
|
The user can then decide to skip this package by setting the BATCH variable.
|
|
|
|
19.1.4. Handling licenses
|
|
|
|
Authors of software can choose the licence under which software can be copied.
|
|
This is due to copyright law, and reasons for license choices are outside the
|
|
scope of pkgsrc. The pkgsrc system recognizes that there are a number of
|
|
licenses which some users may find objectionable or difficult or impossible to
|
|
comply with. The Free Software Foundation has declared some licenses "Free",
|
|
and the Open Source Initiative has a definition of "Open Source". The pkgsrc
|
|
system, as a policy choice, does not label packages which have licenses that
|
|
are Free or Open Source. However, packages without a license meeting either of
|
|
those tests are labeled with a license tag denoting the license. Note that a
|
|
package with no license to copy trivially does not meet either the Free or Open
|
|
Source test.
|
|
|
|
For packages which are not Free or Open Source, pkgsrc will not build the
|
|
package unless the user has indicated to pkgsrc that packages with that
|
|
particular license may be built. Note that this documentation avoids the term
|
|
"accepted the license". The pkgsrc system is merely providing a mechanism to
|
|
avoid accidentally building a package with a non-free license; judgement and
|
|
responsibility remain with the user. (Installation of binary packages are not
|
|
currently subject to this mechanism; this is a bug.)
|
|
|
|
One might want to only install packages with a BSD license, or the GPL, and not
|
|
the other. The free licenses are added to the default ACCEPTABLE_LICENSES
|
|
variable. The user can override the default by setting the ACCEPTABLE_LICENSES
|
|
variable with "=" instead of "+=". The licenses accepted by default are:
|
|
|
|
public-domain
|
|
gnu-gpl-v2 gnu-lgpl-v2
|
|
gnu-gpl-v3 gnu-lgpl-v3
|
|
original-bsd modified-bsd
|
|
x11
|
|
apache-2.0
|
|
cddl-1.0
|
|
open-font-license
|
|
|
|
|
|
The license tag mechanism is intended to address copyright-related issues
|
|
surrounding building, installing and using a package, and not to address
|
|
redistribution issues (see RESTRICTED and NO_SRC_ON_FTP, etc.). Packages with
|
|
redistribution restrictions should set these tags.
|
|
|
|
Denoting that a package may be copied according to a particular license is done
|
|
by placing the license in pkgsrc/licenses and setting the LICENSE variable to a
|
|
string identifying the license, e.g. in graphics/xv:
|
|
|
|
LICENSE= xv-license
|
|
|
|
|
|
When trying to build, the user will get a notice that the package is covered by
|
|
a license which has not been placed in the ACCEPTABLE_LICENSES variable:
|
|
|
|
% make
|
|
===> xv-3.10anb9 has an unacceptable license: xv-license.
|
|
===> To view the license, enter "/usr/bin/make show-license".
|
|
===> To indicate acceptance, add this line to your /etc/mk.conf:
|
|
===> ACCEPTABLE_LICENSES+=xv-license
|
|
*** Error code 1
|
|
|
|
|
|
The license can be viewed with make show-license, and if the user so chooses,
|
|
the line printed above can be added to mk.conf to convey to pkgsrc that it
|
|
should not in the future fail because of that license:
|
|
|
|
ACCEPTABLE_LICENSES+=xv-license
|
|
|
|
|
|
When adding a package with a new license, the license text should be added to
|
|
pkgsrc/licenses for displaying. A list of known licenses can be seen in this
|
|
directory.
|
|
|
|
When the license changes (in a way other than formatting), please make sure
|
|
that the new license has a different name (e.g., append the version number if
|
|
it exists, or the date). Just because a user told pkgsrc to build programs
|
|
under a previous version of a license does not mean that pkgsrc should build
|
|
programs under the new licenses. The higher-level point is that pkgsrc does not
|
|
evaluate licenses for reasonableness; the only test is a mechanistic test of
|
|
whether a particular text has been approved by either of two bodies.
|
|
|
|
The use of LICENSE=shareware, LICENSE=no-commercial-use, and similar language
|
|
is deprecated because it does not crisply refer to a particular license text.
|
|
Another problem with such usage is that it does not enable a user to tell
|
|
pkgsrc to proceed for a single package without also telling pkgsrc to proceed
|
|
for all packages with that tag.
|
|
|
|
19.1.5. Restricted packages
|
|
|
|
Some licenses restrict how software may be re-distributed. Because a license
|
|
tag is required unless the package is Free or Open Source, all packages with
|
|
restrictions should have license tags. By declaring the restrictions, package
|
|
tools can automatically refrain from e.g. placing binary packages on FTP sites.
|
|
|
|
There are four restrictions that may be encoded, which are the cross product of
|
|
sources (distfiles) and binaries not being placed on FTP sites and CD-ROMs.
|
|
Because this is rarely the exact language in any license, and because non-Free
|
|
licenses tend to be different from each other, pkgsrc adopts a definition of
|
|
FTP and CD-ROM. Pkgsrc uses "FTP" to mean that the source or binary file should
|
|
not be made available over the Internet at no charge. Pkgsrc uses "CD-ROM" to
|
|
mean that the source or binary may not be made available on some kind of media,
|
|
together with other source and binary packages, and which is sold for a
|
|
distribution charge.
|
|
|
|
In order to encode these restrictions, the package system defines five make
|
|
variables that can be set to note these restrictions:
|
|
|
|
* RESTRICTED
|
|
|
|
This variable should be set whenever a restriction exists (regardless of
|
|
its kind). Set this variable to a string containing the reason for the
|
|
restriction. It should be understood that those wanting to understand the
|
|
restriction will have to read the license, and perhaps seek advice of
|
|
counsel.
|
|
|
|
* NO_BIN_ON_CDROM
|
|
|
|
Binaries may not be placed on CD-ROM containing other binary packages, for
|
|
which a distribution charge may be made. In this case, set this variable to
|
|
${RESTRICTED}.
|
|
|
|
* NO_BIN_ON_FTP
|
|
|
|
Binaries may not made available on the Internet without charge. In this
|
|
case, set this variable to ${RESTRICTED}. If this variable is set, binary
|
|
packages will not be included on ftp.NetBSD.org.
|
|
|
|
* NO_SRC_ON_CDROM
|
|
|
|
Distfiles may not be placed on CD-ROM, together with other distfiles, for
|
|
which a fee may be charged. In this case, set this variable to $
|
|
{RESTRICTED}.
|
|
|
|
* NO_SRC_ON_FTP
|
|
|
|
Distfiles may not made available via FTP at no charge. In this case, set
|
|
this variable to ${RESTRICTED}. If this variable is set, the distfile(s)
|
|
will not be mirrored on ftp.NetBSD.org.
|
|
|
|
19.1.6. Handling dependencies
|
|
|
|
Your package may depend on some other package being present - and there are
|
|
various ways of expressing this dependency. pkgsrc supports the BUILD_DEPENDS
|
|
and DEPENDS definitions, the USE_TOOLS definition, as well as dependencies via
|
|
buildlink3.mk, which is the preferred way to handle dependencies, and which
|
|
uses the variables named above. See Chapter 14, Buildlink methodology for more
|
|
information.
|
|
|
|
The basic difference between the two variables is as follows: The DEPENDS
|
|
definition registers that pre-requisite in the binary package so it will be
|
|
pulled in when the binary package is later installed, whilst the BUILD_DEPENDS
|
|
definition does not, marking a dependency that is only needed for building the
|
|
package.
|
|
|
|
This means that if you only need a package present whilst you are building, it
|
|
should be noted as a BUILD_DEPENDS.
|
|
|
|
The format for a BUILD_DEPENDS and a DEPENDS definition is:
|
|
|
|
<pre-req-package-name>:../../<category>/<pre-req-package>
|
|
|
|
|
|
Please note that the "pre-req-package-name" may include any of the wildcard
|
|
version numbers recognized by pkg_info(1).
|
|
|
|
1. If your package needs another package's binaries or libraries to build or
|
|
run, and if that package has a buildlink3.mk file available, use it:
|
|
|
|
.include "../../graphics/jpeg/buildlink3.mk"
|
|
|
|
|
|
2. If your package needs to use another package to build itself and there is
|
|
no buildlink3.mk file available, use the BUILD_DEPENDS definition:
|
|
|
|
BUILD_DEPENDS+= autoconf-2.13:../../devel/autoconf
|
|
|
|
|
|
3. If your package needs a library with which to link and again there is no
|
|
buildlink3.mk file available, this is specified using the DEPENDS
|
|
definition. For example:
|
|
|
|
DEPENDS+= xpm-3.4j:../../graphics/xpm
|
|
|
|
|
|
You can also use wildcards in package dependencies:
|
|
|
|
DEPENDS+= xpm-[0-9]*:../../graphics/xpm
|
|
|
|
|
|
Note that such wildcard dependencies are retained when creating binary
|
|
packages. The dependency is checked when installing the binary package and
|
|
any package which matches the pattern will be used. Wildcard dependencies
|
|
should be used with care.
|
|
|
|
The "-[0-9]*" should be used instead of "-*" to avoid potentially ambiguous
|
|
matches such as "tk-postgresql" matching a "tk-*" DEPENDS.
|
|
|
|
Wildcards can also be used to specify that a package will only build
|
|
against a certain minimum version of a pre-requisite:
|
|
|
|
DEPENDS+= tiff>=3.5.4:../../graphics/tiff
|
|
|
|
|
|
This means that the package will build against version 3.5.4 of the tiff
|
|
library or newer. Such a dependency may be warranted if, for example, the
|
|
API of the library has changed with version 3.5.4 and a package would not
|
|
compile against an earlier version of tiff.
|
|
|
|
Please note that such dependencies should only be updated if a package
|
|
requires a newer pre-requisite, but not to denote recommendations such as
|
|
ABI changes that do not prevent a package from building correctly. Such
|
|
recommendations can be expressed using ABI_DEPENDS:
|
|
|
|
ABI_DEPENDS+= tiff>=3.6.1:../../graphics/tiff
|
|
|
|
|
|
In addition to the above DEPENDS line, this denotes that while a package
|
|
will build against tiff>=3.5.4, at least version 3.6.1 is recommended.
|
|
ABI_DEPENDS entries will be turned into dependencies unless explicitly
|
|
ignored (in which case a warning will be printed).
|
|
|
|
To ignore these ABI dependency recommendations and just use the required
|
|
DEPENDS, set USE_ABI_DEPENDS=NO. This may make it easier and faster to
|
|
update packages built using pkgsrc, since older compatible dependencies can
|
|
continue to be used. This is useful for people who watch their rebuilds
|
|
very carefully; it is not very good as a general-purpose hammer. If you use
|
|
it, you need to be mindful of possible ABI changes, including those from
|
|
the underlying OS.
|
|
|
|
Packages that are built with recommendations ignored may not be uploaded to
|
|
ftp.NetBSD.org by developers and should not be used across different
|
|
systems that may have different versions of binary packages installed.
|
|
|
|
For security fixes, please update the package vulnerabilities file. See
|
|
Section 19.1.10, "Handling packages with security problems" for more
|
|
information.
|
|
|
|
4. If your package needs some executable to be able to run correctly and if
|
|
there's no buildlink3.mk file, this is specified using the DEPENDS
|
|
variable. The print/lyx package needs to be able to execute the latex
|
|
binary from the teTeX package when it runs, and that is specified:
|
|
|
|
DEPENDS+= teTeX-[0-9]*:../../print/teTeX
|
|
|
|
|
|
The comment about wildcard dependencies from previous paragraph applies
|
|
here, too.
|
|
|
|
If your package needs files from another package to build, add the relevant
|
|
distribution files to DISTFILES, so they will be extracted automatically. See
|
|
the print/ghostscript package for an example. (It relies on the jpeg sources
|
|
being present in source form during the build.)
|
|
|
|
19.1.7. Handling conflicts with other packages
|
|
|
|
Your package may conflict with other packages a user might already have
|
|
installed on his system, e.g. if your package installs the same set of files as
|
|
another package in the pkgsrc tree.
|
|
|
|
In this case you can set CONFLICTS to a space-separated list of packages
|
|
(including version string) your package conflicts with.
|
|
|
|
For example, x11/Xaw3d and x11/Xaw-Xpm install the same shared library, thus
|
|
you set in pkgsrc/x11/Xaw3d/Makefile:
|
|
|
|
CONFLICTS= Xaw-Xpm-[0-9]*
|
|
|
|
|
|
and in pkgsrc/x11/Xaw-Xpm/Makefile:
|
|
|
|
CONFLICTS= Xaw3d-[0-9]*
|
|
|
|
|
|
Packages will automatically conflict with other packages with the name prefix
|
|
and a different version string. "Xaw3d-1.5" e.g. will automatically conflict
|
|
with the older version "Xaw3d-1.3".
|
|
|
|
19.1.8. Packages that cannot or should not be built
|
|
|
|
There are several reasons why a package might be instructed to not build under
|
|
certain circumstances. If the package builds and runs on most platforms, the
|
|
exceptions should be noted with NOT_FOR_PLATFORM. If the package builds and
|
|
runs on a small handful of platforms, set ONLY_FOR_PLATFORM instead. Both
|
|
ONLY_FOR_PLATFORM and NOT_FOR_PLATFORM are OS triples (OS-version-platform)
|
|
that can use glob-style wildcards.
|
|
|
|
Some packages are tightly bound to a specific version of an operating system,
|
|
e.g. LKMs or sysutils/lsof. Such binary packages are not backwards compatible
|
|
with other versions of the OS, and should be uploaded to a version specific
|
|
directory on the FTP server. Mark these packages by setting OSVERSION_SPECIFIC
|
|
to "yes". This variable is not currently used by any of the package system
|
|
internals, but may be used in the future.
|
|
|
|
If the package should be skipped (for example, because it provides
|
|
functionality already provided by the system), set PKG_SKIP_REASON to a
|
|
descriptive message. If the package should fail because some preconditions are
|
|
not met, set PKG_FAIL_REASON to a descriptive message.
|
|
|
|
19.1.9. Packages which should not be deleted, once installed
|
|
|
|
To ensure that a package may not be deleted, once it has been installed, the
|
|
PKG_PRESERVE definition should be set in the package Makefile. This will be
|
|
carried into any binary package that is made from this pkgsrc entry. A
|
|
"preserved" package will not be deleted using pkg_delete(1) unless the "-f"
|
|
option is used.
|
|
|
|
19.1.10. Handling packages with security problems
|
|
|
|
When a vulnerability is found, this should be noted in localsrc/security/
|
|
advisories/pkg-vulnerabilities, and after committing that file, use make upload
|
|
in the same directory to update the file on ftp.NetBSD.org.
|
|
|
|
After fixing the vulnerability by a patch, its PKGREVISION should be increased
|
|
(this is of course not necessary if the problem is fixed by using a newer
|
|
release of the software).
|
|
|
|
Also, if the fix should be applied to the stable pkgsrc branch, be sure to
|
|
submit a pullup request!
|
|
|
|
Binary packages already on ftp.NetBSD.org will be handled semi-automatically by
|
|
a weekly cron job.
|
|
|
|
19.1.11. How to handle incrementing versions when fixing an existing package
|
|
|
|
When making fixes to an existing package it can be useful to change the version
|
|
number in PKGNAME. To avoid conflicting with future versions by the original
|
|
author, a "nb1", "nb2", ... suffix can be used on package versions by setting
|
|
PKGREVISION=1 (2, ...). The "nb" is treated like a "." by the package tools.
|
|
e.g.
|
|
|
|
DISTNAME= foo-17.42
|
|
PKGREVISION= 9
|
|
|
|
|
|
will result in a PKGNAME of "foo-17.42nb9". If you want to use the original
|
|
value of PKGNAME without the "nbX" suffix, e.g. for setting DIST_SUBDIR, use
|
|
PKGNAME_NOREV.
|
|
|
|
When a new release of the package is released, the PKGREVISION should be
|
|
removed, e.g. on a new minor release of the above package, things should be
|
|
like:
|
|
|
|
DISTNAME= foo-17.43
|
|
|
|
|
|
PKGREVISION should be incremented for any non-trivial change in the resulting
|
|
binary package. Without a PKGREVISION bump, someone with the previous version
|
|
installed has no way of knowing that their package is out of date. Thus,
|
|
changes without increasing PKGREVISION are essentially labeled "this is so
|
|
trivial that no reasonable person would want to upgrade", and this is the rough
|
|
test for when increasing PKGREVISION is appropriate. Examples of changes that
|
|
do not merit increasing PKGREVISION are:
|
|
|
|
* Changing HOMEPAGE, MAINTAINER, OWNER, or comments in Makefile.
|
|
|
|
* Changing build variables if the resulting binary package is the same.
|
|
|
|
* Changing DESCR.
|
|
|
|
* Adding PKG_OPTIONS if the default options don't change.
|
|
|
|
Examples of changes that do merit an increase to PKGREVISION include:
|
|
|
|
* Security fixes
|
|
|
|
* Changes or additions to a patch file
|
|
|
|
* Changes to the PLIST
|
|
|
|
* A dependency is changed or renamed.
|
|
|
|
PKGREVISION must also be incremented when dependencies have ABI changes.
|
|
|
|
19.1.12. Substituting variable text in the package files (the SUBST framework)
|
|
|
|
When you want to replace the same text in multiple files or when the
|
|
replacement text varies, patches alone cannot help. This is where the SUBST
|
|
framework comes in. It provides an easy-to-use interface for replacing text in
|
|
files. Example:
|
|
|
|
SUBST_CLASSES+= fix-paths
|
|
SUBST_STAGE.fix-paths= pre-configure
|
|
SUBST_MESSAGE.fix-paths= Fixing absolute paths.
|
|
SUBST_FILES.fix-paths= src/*.c
|
|
SUBST_FILES.fix-paths+= scripts/*.sh
|
|
SUBST_SED.fix-paths= -e 's,"/usr/local,"${PREFIX},g'
|
|
SUBST_SED.fix-paths+= -e 's,"/var/log,"${VARBASE}/log,g'
|
|
|
|
|
|
SUBST_CLASSES is a list of identifiers that are used to identify the different
|
|
SUBST blocks that are defined. The SUBST framework is heavily used by pkgsrc,
|
|
so it is important to always use the += operator with this variable. Otherwise
|
|
some substitutions may be skipped.
|
|
|
|
The remaining variables of each SUBST block are parameterized with the
|
|
identifier from the first line (fix-paths in this case.) They can be seen as
|
|
parameters to a function call.
|
|
|
|
SUBST_STAGE.* specifies the stage at which the replacement will take place. All
|
|
combinations of pre-, do- and post- together with a phase name are possible,
|
|
though only few are actually used. Most commonly used are post-patch and
|
|
pre-configure. Of these two, pre-configure should be preferred because then it
|
|
is possible to run bmake patch and have the state after applying the patches
|
|
but before making any other changes. This is especially useful when you are
|
|
debugging a package in order to create new patches for it. Similarly,
|
|
post-build is preferred over pre-install, because the install phase should
|
|
generally be kept as simple as possible. When you use post-build, you have the
|
|
same files in the working directory that will be installed later, so you can
|
|
check if the substitution has succeeded.
|
|
|
|
SUBST_MESSAGE.* is an optional text that is printed just before the
|
|
substitution is done.
|
|
|
|
SUBST_FILES.* is the list of shell globbing patterns that specifies the files
|
|
in which the substitution will take place. The patterns are interpreted
|
|
relatively to the WRKSRC directory.
|
|
|
|
SUBST_SED.* is a list of arguments to sed(1) that specify the actual
|
|
substitution. Every sed command should be prefixed with -e, so that all SUBST
|
|
blocks look uniform.
|
|
|
|
There are some more variables, but they are so seldomly used that they are only
|
|
documented in the mk/subst.mk file.
|
|
|
|
19.2. Fixing problems in the fetch phase
|
|
|
|
19.2.1. Packages whose distfiles aren't available for plain downloading
|
|
|
|
If you need to download from a dynamic URL you can set DYNAMIC_MASTER_SITES and
|
|
a make fetch will call files/getsite.sh with the name of each file to download
|
|
as an argument, expecting it to output the URL of the directory from which to
|
|
download it. graphics/ns-cult3d is an example of this usage.
|
|
|
|
If the download can't be automated, because the user must submit personal
|
|
information to apply for a password, or must pay for the source, or whatever,
|
|
you can set FETCH_MESSAGE to a list of lines that are displayed to the user
|
|
before aborting the build. Example:
|
|
|
|
FETCH_MESSAGE= "Please download the files"
|
|
FETCH_MESSAGE+= " "${DISTFILES:Q}
|
|
FETCH_MESSAGE+= "manually from "${MASTER_SITES:Q}"."
|
|
|
|
|
|
19.2.2. How to handle modified distfiles with the 'old' name
|
|
|
|
Sometimes authors of a software package make some modifications after the
|
|
software was released, and they put up a new distfile without changing the
|
|
package's version number. If a package is already in pkgsrc at that time, the
|
|
checksum will no longer match. The contents of the new distfile should be
|
|
compared against the old one before changing anything, to make sure the
|
|
distfile was really updated on purpose, and that no trojan horse or so crept
|
|
in. Please mention that the distfiles were compared and what was found in your
|
|
commit message. Then, the correct way to work around this is to set DIST_SUBDIR
|
|
to a unique directory name, usually based on PKGNAME_NOREV. All DISTFILES and
|
|
PATCHFILES for this package will be put in that subdirectory of the local
|
|
distfiles directory. (See Section 19.1.11, "How to handle incrementing versions
|
|
when fixing an existing package" for more details.) In case this happens more
|
|
often, PKGNAME can be used (thus including the nbX suffix) or a date stamp can
|
|
be appended, like ${PKGNAME_NOREV}-YYYYMMDD. Do not forget regenerating the
|
|
distinfo file after that, since it contains the DIST_SUBDIR path in the
|
|
filenames. Also increase the PKGREVISION if the installed package is different.
|
|
Furthermore, a mail to the package's authors seems appropriate telling them
|
|
that changing distfiles after releases without changing the file names is not
|
|
good practice.
|
|
|
|
19.3. Fixing problems in the configure phase
|
|
|
|
19.3.1. Shared libraries - libtool
|
|
|
|
pkgsrc supports many different machines, with different object formats like
|
|
a.out and ELF, and varying abilities to do shared library and dynamic loading
|
|
at all. To accompany this, varying commands and options have to be passed to
|
|
the compiler, linker, etc. to get the Right Thing, which can be pretty annoying
|
|
especially if you don't have all the machines at your hand to test things. The
|
|
devel/libtool pkg can help here, as it just "knows" how to build both static
|
|
and dynamic libraries from a set of source files, thus being
|
|
platform-independent.
|
|
|
|
Here's how to use libtool in a package in seven simple steps:
|
|
|
|
1. Add USE_LIBTOOL=yes to the package Makefile.
|
|
|
|
2. For library objects, use "${LIBTOOL} --mode=compile ${CC}" in place of "$
|
|
{CC}". You could even add it to the definition of CC, if only libraries are
|
|
being built in a given Makefile. This one command will build both PIC and
|
|
non-PIC library objects, so you need not have separate shared and
|
|
non-shared library rules.
|
|
|
|
3. For the linking of the library, remove any "ar", "ranlib", and "ld
|
|
-Bshareable" commands, and instead use:
|
|
|
|
${LIBTOOL} --mode=link \
|
|
${CC} -o ${.TARGET:.a=.la} \
|
|
${OBJS:.o=.lo} \
|
|
-rpath ${PREFIX}/lib \
|
|
-version-info major:minor
|
|
|
|
|
|
Note that the library is changed to have a .la extension, and the objects
|
|
are changed to have a .lo extension. Change OBJS as necessary. This
|
|
automatically creates all of the .a, .so.major.minor, and ELF symlinks (if
|
|
necessary) in the build directory. Be sure to include "-version-info",
|
|
especially when major and minor are zero, as libtool will otherwise strip
|
|
off the shared library version.
|
|
|
|
From the libtool manual:
|
|
|
|
So, libtool library versions are described by three integers:
|
|
|
|
CURRENT
|
|
The most recent interface number that this library implements.
|
|
|
|
REVISION
|
|
The implementation number of the CURRENT interface.
|
|
|
|
AGE
|
|
The difference between the newest and oldest interfaces that
|
|
this library implements. In other words, the library implements
|
|
all the interface numbers in the range from number `CURRENT -
|
|
AGE' to `CURRENT'.
|
|
|
|
If two libraries have identical CURRENT and AGE numbers, then the
|
|
dynamic linker chooses the library with the greater REVISION number.
|
|
|
|
|
|
The "-release" option will produce different results for a.out and ELF
|
|
(excluding symlinks) in only one case. An ELF library of the form
|
|
"libfoo-release.so.x.y" will have a symlink of "libfoo.so.x.y" on an a.out
|
|
platform. This is handled automatically.
|
|
|
|
The "-rpath argument" is the install directory of the library being built.
|
|
|
|
In the PLIST, include only the .la file, the other files will be added
|
|
automatically.
|
|
|
|
4. When linking shared object (.so) files, i.e. files that are loaded via
|
|
dlopen(3), NOT shared libraries, use "-module -avoid-version" to prevent
|
|
them getting version tacked on.
|
|
|
|
The PLIST file gets the foo.so entry.
|
|
|
|
5. When linking programs that depend on these libraries before they are
|
|
installed, preface the cc(1) or ld(1) line with "${LIBTOOL} --mode=link",
|
|
and it will find the correct libraries (static or shared), but please be
|
|
aware that libtool will not allow you to specify a relative path in -L
|
|
(such as "-L../somelib"), because it expects you to change that argument to
|
|
be the .la file. e.g.
|
|
|
|
${LIBTOOL} --mode=link ${CC} -o someprog -L../somelib -lsomelib
|
|
|
|
|
|
should be changed to:
|
|
|
|
${LIBTOOL} --mode=link ${CC} -o someprog ../somelib/somelib.la
|
|
|
|
|
|
and it will do the right thing with the libraries.
|
|
|
|
6. When installing libraries, preface the install(1) or cp(1) command with "$
|
|
{LIBTOOL} --mode=install", and change the library name to .la. e.g.
|
|
|
|
${LIBTOOL} --mode=install ${BSD_INSTALL_DATA} ${SOMELIB:.a=.la} ${PREFIX}/lib
|
|
|
|
|
|
This will install the static .a, shared library, any needed symlinks, and
|
|
run ldconfig(8).
|
|
|
|
7. In your PLIST, include only the .la file (this is a change from previous
|
|
behaviour).
|
|
|
|
19.3.2. Using libtool on GNU packages that already support libtool
|
|
|
|
Add USE_LIBTOOL=yes to the package Makefile. This will override the package's
|
|
own libtool in most cases. For older libtool using packages, libtool is made by
|
|
ltconfig script during the do-configure step; you can check the libtool script
|
|
location by doing make configure; find work*/ -name libtool.
|
|
|
|
LIBTOOL_OVERRIDE specifies which libtool scripts, relative to WRKSRC, to
|
|
override. By default, it is set to "libtool */libtool */*/libtool". If this
|
|
does not match the location of the package's libtool script(s), set it as
|
|
appropriate.
|
|
|
|
If you do not need *.a static libraries built and installed, then use
|
|
SHLIBTOOL_OVERRIDE instead.
|
|
|
|
If your package makes use of the platform-independent library for loading
|
|
dynamic shared objects, that comes with libtool (libltdl), you should include
|
|
devel/libltdl/buildlink3.mk.
|
|
|
|
Some packages use libtool incorrectly so that the package may not work or build
|
|
in some circumstances. Some of the more common errors are:
|
|
|
|
* The inclusion of a shared object (-module) as a dependent library in an
|
|
executable or library. This in itself isn't a problem if one of two things
|
|
has been done:
|
|
|
|
1. The shared object is named correctly, i.e. libfoo.la, not foo.la
|
|
|
|
2. The -dlopen option is used when linking an executable.
|
|
|
|
* The use of libltdl without the correct calls to initialisation routines.
|
|
The function lt_dlinit() should be called and the macro
|
|
LTDL_SET_PRELOADED_SYMBOLS included in executables.
|
|
|
|
19.3.3. GNU Autoconf/Automake
|
|
|
|
If a package needs GNU autoconf or automake to be executed to regenerate the
|
|
configure script and Makefile.in makefile templates, then they should be
|
|
executed in a pre-configure target.
|
|
|
|
For packages that need only autoconf:
|
|
|
|
AUTOCONF_REQD= 2.50 # if default version is not good enough
|
|
USE_TOOLS+= autoconf # use "autoconf213" for autoconf-2.13
|
|
...
|
|
|
|
pre-configure:
|
|
cd ${WRKSRC} && autoconf
|
|
|
|
...
|
|
|
|
|
|
and for packages that need automake and autoconf:
|
|
|
|
AUTOMAKE_REQD= 1.7.1 # if default version is not good enough
|
|
USE_TOOLS+= automake # use "automake14" for automake-1.4
|
|
...
|
|
|
|
pre-configure:
|
|
set -e; cd ${WRKSRC}; \
|
|
aclocal; autoheader; automake -a --foreign -i; autoconf
|
|
|
|
...
|
|
|
|
|
|
Packages which use GNU Automake will almost certainly require GNU Make.
|
|
|
|
There are times when the configure process makes additional changes to the
|
|
generated files, which then causes the build process to try to re-execute the
|
|
automake sequence. This is prevented by touching various files in the configure
|
|
stage. If this causes problems with your package you can set AUTOMAKE_OVERRIDE=
|
|
NO in the package Makefile.
|
|
|
|
19.4. Programming languages
|
|
|
|
19.4.1. C, C++, and Fortran
|
|
|
|
Compilers for the C, C++, and Fortran languages comes with the NetBSD base
|
|
system. By default, pkgsrc assumes that a package is written in C and will hide
|
|
all other compilers (via the wrapper framework, see Chapter 14, Buildlink
|
|
methodology).
|
|
|
|
To declare which language's compiler a package needs, set the USE_LANGUAGES
|
|
variable. Allowed values currently are "c", "c++", and "fortran" (and any
|
|
combination). The default is "c". Packages using GNU configure scripts, even if
|
|
written in C++, usually need a C compiler for the configure phase.
|
|
|
|
19.4.2. Java
|
|
|
|
If a program is written in Java, use the Java framework in pkgsrc. The package
|
|
must include ../../mk/java-vm.mk. This Makefile fragment provides the following
|
|
variables:
|
|
|
|
* USE_JAVA defines if a build dependency on the JDK is added. If USE_JAVA is
|
|
set to "run", then there is only a runtime dependency on the JDK. The
|
|
default is "yes", which also adds a build dependency on the JDK.
|
|
|
|
* Set USE_JAVA2 to declare that a package needs a Java2 implementation. The
|
|
supported values are "yes", "1.4", and "1.5". "yes" accepts any Java2
|
|
implementation, "1.4" insists on versions 1.4 or above, and "1.5" only
|
|
accepts versions 1.5 or above. This variable is not set by default.
|
|
|
|
19.4.3. Packages containing perl scripts
|
|
|
|
If your package contains interpreted perl scripts, add "perl" to the USE_TOOLS
|
|
variable and set REPLACE_PERL to ensure that the proper interpreter path is
|
|
set. REPLACE_PERL should contain a list of scripts, relative to WRKSRC, that
|
|
you want adjusted. Every occurrence of */bin/perl will be replaced with the
|
|
full path to the perl executable.
|
|
|
|
If a particular version of perl is needed, set the PERL5_REQD variable to the
|
|
version number. The default is "5.0".
|
|
|
|
See Section 19.6.6, "Packages installing perl modules" for information about
|
|
handling perl modules.
|
|
|
|
19.4.4. Other programming languages
|
|
|
|
Currently, there is no special handling for other languages in pkgsrc. If a
|
|
compiler package provides a buildlink3.mk file, include that, otherwise just
|
|
add a (build) dependency on the appropriate compiler package.
|
|
|
|
19.5. Fixing problems in the build phase
|
|
|
|
The most common failures when building a package are that some platforms do not
|
|
provide certain header files, functions or libraries, or they provide the
|
|
functions in a library that the original package author didn't know. To work
|
|
around this, you can rewrite the source code in most cases so that it does not
|
|
use the missing functions or provides a replacement function.
|
|
|
|
19.5.1. Compiling C and C++ code conditionally
|
|
|
|
If a package already comes with a GNU configure script, the preferred way to
|
|
fix the build failure is to change the configure script, not the code. In the
|
|
other cases, you can utilize the C preprocessor, which defines certain macros
|
|
depending on the operating system and hardware architecture it compiles for.
|
|
These macros can be queried using for example #if defined(__i386). Almost every
|
|
operating system, hardware architecture and compiler has its own macro. For
|
|
example, if the macros __GNUC__, __i386__ and __NetBSD__ are all defined, you
|
|
know that you are using NetBSD on an i386 compatible CPU, and your compiler is
|
|
GCC.
|
|
|
|
The list of the following macros for hardware and operating system depends on
|
|
the compiler that is used. For example, if you want to conditionally compile
|
|
code on Solaris, don't use __sun__, as the SunPro compiler does not define it.
|
|
Use __sun instead.
|
|
|
|
19.5.1.1. C preprocessor macros to identify the operating system
|
|
|
|
To distinguish between 4.4 BSD-derived systems and the rest of the world, you
|
|
should use the following code.
|
|
|
|
#include <sys/param.h>
|
|
#if (defined(BSD) && BSD >= 199306)
|
|
/* BSD-specific code goes here */
|
|
#else
|
|
/* non-BSD-specific code goes here */
|
|
#endif
|
|
|
|
If this distinction is not fine enough, you can also test for the following
|
|
macros.
|
|
|
|
FreeBSD __FreeBSD__
|
|
DragonFly __DragonFly__
|
|
Interix __INTERIX
|
|
IRIX __sgi (TODO: get a definite source for this)
|
|
Linux linux, __linux, __linux__
|
|
NetBSD __NetBSD__
|
|
OpenBSD __OpenBSD__
|
|
Solaris sun, __sun
|
|
|
|
19.5.1.2. C preprocessor macros to identify the hardware architecture
|
|
|
|
i386 i386, __i386, __i386__
|
|
MIPS __mips
|
|
SPARC sparc, __sparc
|
|
|
|
19.5.1.3. C preprocessor macros to identify the compiler
|
|
|
|
GCC __GNUC__ (major version), __GNUC_MINOR__
|
|
MIPSpro _COMPILER_VERSION (0x741 for MIPSpro 7.41)
|
|
SunPro __SUNPRO_C (0x570 for Sun C 5.7)
|
|
SunPro C++ __SUNPRO_CC (0x580 for Sun C++ 5.8)
|
|
|
|
19.5.2. How to handle compiler bugs
|
|
|
|
Some source files trigger bugs in the compiler, based on combinations of
|
|
compiler version and architecture and almost always relation to optimisation
|
|
being enabled. Common symptoms are gcc internal errors or never finishing
|
|
compiling a file.
|
|
|
|
Typically, a workaround involves testing the MACHINE_ARCH and compiler version,
|
|
disabling optimisation for that combination of file, MACHINE_ARCH and compiler,
|
|
and documenting it in pkgsrc/doc/HACKS. See that file for a number of examples.
|
|
|
|
19.5.3. Undefined reference to "..."
|
|
|
|
This error message often means that a package did not link to a shared library
|
|
it needs. The following functions are known to cause this error message over
|
|
and over.
|
|
|
|
+-----------------------------------------------------+
|
|
| Function |Library |Affected platforms|
|
|
|-------------------------+--------+------------------|
|
|
|accept, bind, connect |-lsocket|Solaris |
|
|
|-------------------------+--------+------------------|
|
|
|crypt |-lcrypt |DragonFly, NetBSD |
|
|
|-------------------------+--------+------------------|
|
|
|dlopen, dlsym |-ldl |Linux |
|
|
|-------------------------+--------+------------------|
|
|
|gethost* |-lnsl |Solaris |
|
|
|-------------------------+--------+------------------|
|
|
|inet_aton |-lresolv|Solaris |
|
|
|-------------------------+--------+------------------|
|
|
|nanosleep, sem_*, timer_*|-lrt |Solaris |
|
|
|-------------------------+--------+------------------|
|
|
|openpty |-lutil |Linux |
|
|
+-----------------------------------------------------+
|
|
|
|
To fix these linker errors, it is often sufficient to say LIBS.OperatingSystem+
|
|
= -lfoo to the package Makefile and then say bmake clean; bmake.
|
|
|
|
19.5.3.1. Special issue: The SunPro compiler
|
|
|
|
When you are using the SunPro compiler, there is another possibility. That
|
|
compiler cannot handle the following code:
|
|
|
|
extern int extern_func(int);
|
|
|
|
static inline int
|
|
inline_func(int x)
|
|
{
|
|
return extern_func(x);
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
int main(void)
|
|
{
|
|
return 0;
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
It generates the code for inline_func even if that function is never used. This
|
|
code then refers to extern_func, which can usually not be resolved. To solve
|
|
this problem you can try to tell the package to disable inlining of functions.
|
|
|
|
19.5.4. Running out of memory
|
|
|
|
Sometimes packages fail to build because the compiler runs into an operating
|
|
system specific soft limit. With the UNLIMIT_RESOURCES variable pkgsrc can be
|
|
told to unlimit the resources. Currently, the allowed values are "datasize" and
|
|
"stacksize" (or both). Setting this variable is similar to running the shell
|
|
builtin ulimit command to raise the maximum data segment size or maximum stack
|
|
size of a process, respectively, to their hard limits.
|
|
|
|
19.6. Fixing problems in the install phase
|
|
|
|
19.6.1. Creating needed directories
|
|
|
|
The BSD-compatible install supplied with some operating systems cannot create
|
|
more than one directory at a time. As such, you should call ${INSTALL_*_DIR}
|
|
like this:
|
|
|
|
${INSTALL_DATA_DIR} ${PREFIX}/dir1
|
|
${INSTALL_DATA_DIR} ${PREFIX}/dir2
|
|
|
|
|
|
You can also just append "dir1 dir2" to the INSTALLATION_DIRS variable, which
|
|
will automatically do the right thing.
|
|
|
|
19.6.2. Where to install documentation
|
|
|
|
In general, documentation should be installed into ${PREFIX}/share/doc/$
|
|
{PKGBASE} or ${PREFIX}/share/doc/${PKGNAME} (the latter includes the version
|
|
number of the package).
|
|
|
|
Many modern packages using GNU autoconf allow to set the directory where HTML
|
|
documentation is installed with the "--with-html-dir" option. Sometimes using
|
|
this flag is needed because otherwise the documentation ends up in ${PREFIX}/
|
|
share/doc/html or other places.
|
|
|
|
An exception to the above is that library API documentation generated with the
|
|
textproc/gtk-doc tools, for use by special browsers (devhelp) should be left at
|
|
their default location, which is ${PREFIX}/share/gtk-doc. Such documentation
|
|
can be recognized from files ending in .devhelp or .devhelp2. (It is also
|
|
acceptable to install such files in ${PREFIX}/share/doc/${PKGBASE} or ${PREFIX}
|
|
/share/doc/${PKGNAME}; the .devhelp* file must be directly in that directory
|
|
then, no additional subdirectory level is allowed in this case. This is usually
|
|
achieved by using "--with-html-dir=${PREFIX}/share/doc". ${PREFIX}/share/
|
|
gtk-doc is preferred though.)
|
|
|
|
19.6.3. Installing highscore files
|
|
|
|
Certain packages, most of them in the games category, install a score file that
|
|
allows all users on the system to record their highscores. In order for this to
|
|
work, the binaries need to be installed setgid and the score files owned by the
|
|
appropriate group and/or owner (traditionally the "games" user/group). The
|
|
following variables, documented in more detail in mk/defaults/mk.conf, control
|
|
this behaviour: SETGIDGAME, GAMEDATAMODE, GAMEGRP, GAMEMODE, GAMEOWN.
|
|
|
|
Note that per default, setgid installation of games is disabled; setting
|
|
SETGIDGAME=YES will set all the other variables accordingly.
|
|
|
|
A package should therefore never hard code file ownership or access permissions
|
|
but rely on INSTALL_GAME and INSTALL_GAME_DATA to set these correctly.
|
|
|
|
19.6.4. Adding DESTDIR support to packages
|
|
|
|
DESTDIR support means that a package installs into a staging directory, not the
|
|
final location of the files. Then a binary package is created which can be used
|
|
for installation as usual. There are two ways: Either the package must install
|
|
as root ("destdir") or the package can install as non-root user
|
|
("user-destdir").
|
|
|
|
* PKG_DESTDIR_SUPPORT has to be set to "destdir" or "user-destdir". If
|
|
bsd.prefs.mk is included in the Makefile, PKG_DESTDIR_SUPPORT needs to be
|
|
set before the inclusion.
|
|
|
|
* All installation operations have to be prefixed with ${DESTDIR}.
|
|
|
|
* automake gets this DESTDIR mostly right automatically. Many manual rules
|
|
and pre/post-install often are incorrect; fix them.
|
|
|
|
* If files are installed with special owner/group use SPECIAL_PERMS.
|
|
|
|
* In general, packages should support UNPRIVILEGED to be able to use DESTDIR.
|
|
|
|
19.6.5. Packages with hardcoded paths to other interpreters
|
|
|
|
Your package may also contain scripts with hardcoded paths to other
|
|
interpreters besides (or as well as) perl. To correct the full pathname to the
|
|
script interpreter, you need to set the following definitions in your Makefile
|
|
(we shall use tclsh in this example):
|
|
|
|
REPLACE_INTERPRETER+= tcl
|
|
REPLACE.tcl.old= .*/bin/tclsh
|
|
REPLACE.tcl.new= ${PREFIX}/bin/tclsh
|
|
REPLACE_FILES.tcl= # list of tcl scripts which need to be fixed,
|
|
# relative to ${WRKSRC}, just as in REPLACE_PERL
|
|
|
|
|
|
Note
|
|
|
|
Before March 2006, these variables were called _REPLACE.* and _REPLACE_FILES.*.
|
|
|
|
19.6.6. Packages installing perl modules
|
|
|
|
Makefiles of packages providing perl5 modules should include the Makefile
|
|
fragment ../../lang/perl5/module.mk. It provides a do-configure target for the
|
|
standard perl configuration for such modules as well as various hooks to tune
|
|
this configuration. See comments in this file for details.
|
|
|
|
Perl5 modules will install into different places depending on the version of
|
|
perl used during the build process. To address this, pkgsrc will append lines
|
|
to the PLIST corresponding to the files listed in the installed .packlist file
|
|
generated by most perl5 modules. This is invoked by defining PERL5_PACKLIST to
|
|
a space-separated list of paths to packlist files, e.g.:
|
|
|
|
PERL5_PACKLIST= ${PERL5_SITEARCH}/auto/Pg/.packlist
|
|
|
|
|
|
The variables PERL5_SITELIB, PERL5_SITEARCH, and PERL5_ARCHLIB represent the
|
|
three locations in which perl5 modules may be installed, and may be used by
|
|
perl5 packages that don't have a packlist. These three variables are also
|
|
substituted for in the PLIST.
|
|
|
|
19.6.7. Packages installing info files
|
|
|
|
Some packages install info files or use the "makeinfo" or "install-info"
|
|
commands. INFO_FILES should be defined in the package Makefile so that INSTALL
|
|
and DEINSTALL scripts will be generated to handle registration of the info
|
|
files in the Info directory file. The "install-info" command used for the info
|
|
files registration is either provided by the system, or by a special purpose
|
|
package automatically added as dependency if needed.
|
|
|
|
PKGINFODIR is the directory under ${PREFIX} where info files are primarily
|
|
located. PKGINFODIR defaults to "info" and can be overridden by the user.
|
|
|
|
The info files for the package should be listed in the package PLIST; however
|
|
any split info files need not be listed.
|
|
|
|
A package which needs the "makeinfo" command at build time must add "makeinfo"
|
|
to USE_TOOLS in its Makefile. If a minimum version of the "makeinfo" command is
|
|
needed it should be noted with the TEXINFO_REQD variable in the package
|
|
Makefile. By default, a minimum version of 3.12 is required. If the system does
|
|
not provide a makeinfo command or if it does not match the required minimum, a
|
|
build dependency on the devel/gtexinfo package will be added automatically.
|
|
|
|
The build and installation process of the software provided by the package
|
|
should not use the install-info command as the registration of info files is
|
|
the task of the package INSTALL script, and it must use the appropriate
|
|
makeinfo command.
|
|
|
|
To achieve this goal, the pkgsrc infrastructure creates overriding scripts for
|
|
the install-info and makeinfo commands in a directory listed early in PATH.
|
|
|
|
The script overriding install-info has no effect except the logging of a
|
|
message. The script overriding makeinfo logs a message and according to the
|
|
value of TEXINFO_REQD either runs the appropriate makeinfo command or exit on
|
|
error.
|
|
|
|
19.6.8. Packages installing man pages
|
|
|
|
All packages that install manual pages should install them into the same
|
|
directory, so that there is one common place to look for them. In pkgsrc, this
|
|
place is ${PREFIX}/${PKGMANDIR}, and this expression should be used in
|
|
packages. The default for PKGMANDIR is "man". Another often-used value is
|
|
"share/man".
|
|
|
|
Note
|
|
|
|
The support for a custom PKGMANDIR is far from complete.
|
|
|
|
The PLIST files can just use man/ as the top level directory for the man page
|
|
file entries, and the pkgsrc framework will convert as needed. In all other
|
|
places, the correct PKGMANDIR must be used.
|
|
|
|
Packages that are configured with GNU_CONFIGURE set as "yes", by default will
|
|
use the ./configure --mandir switch to set where the man pages should be
|
|
installed. The path is GNU_CONFIGURE_MANDIR which defaults to ${PREFIX}/$
|
|
{PKGMANDIR}.
|
|
|
|
Packages that use GNU_CONFIGURE but do not use --mandir, can set
|
|
CONFIGURE_HAS_MANDIR to "no". Or if the ./configure script uses a non-standard
|
|
use of --mandir, you can set GNU_CONFIGURE_MANDIR as needed.
|
|
|
|
See Section 13.5, "Man page compression" for information on installation of
|
|
compressed manual pages.
|
|
|
|
19.6.9. Packages installing GConf data files
|
|
|
|
If a package installs .schemas or .entries files, used by GConf, you need to
|
|
take some extra steps to make sure they get registered in the database:
|
|
|
|
1. Include ../../devel/GConf/schemas.mk instead of its buildlink3.mk file.
|
|
This takes care of rebuilding the GConf database at installation and
|
|
deinstallation time, and tells the package where to install GConf data
|
|
files using some standard configure arguments. It also disallows any access
|
|
to the database directly from the package.
|
|
|
|
2. Ensure that the package installs its .schemas files under ${PREFIX}/share/
|
|
gconf/schemas. If they get installed under ${PREFIX}/etc, you will need to
|
|
manually patch the package.
|
|
|
|
3. Check the PLIST and remove any entries under the etc/gconf directory, as
|
|
they will be handled automatically. See Section 9.13, "How do I change the
|
|
location of configuration files?" for more information.
|
|
|
|
4. Define the GCONF_SCHEMAS variable in your Makefile with a list of all
|
|
.schemas files installed by the package, if any. Names must not contain any
|
|
directories in them.
|
|
|
|
5. Define the GCONF_ENTRIES variable in your Makefile with a list of all
|
|
.entries files installed by the package, if any. Names must not contain any
|
|
directories in them.
|
|
|
|
19.6.10. Packages installing scrollkeeper/rarian data files
|
|
|
|
If a package installs .omf files, used by scrollkeeper/rarian, you need to take
|
|
some extra steps to make sure they get registered in the database:
|
|
|
|
1. Include ../../mk/omf-scrollkeeper.mk instead of rarian's buildlink3.mk
|
|
file. This takes care of rebuilding the scrollkeeper database at
|
|
installation and deinstallation time, and disallows any access to it
|
|
directly from the package.
|
|
|
|
2. Check the PLIST and remove any entries under the libdata/scrollkeeper
|
|
directory, as they will be handled automatically.
|
|
|
|
3. Remove the share/omf directory from the PLIST. It will be handled by
|
|
rarian. (make print-PLIST does this automatically.)
|
|
|
|
19.6.11. Packages installing X11 fonts
|
|
|
|
If a package installs font files, you will need to rebuild the fonts database
|
|
in the directory where they get installed at installation and deinstallation
|
|
time. This can be automatically done by using the pkginstall framework.
|
|
|
|
You can list the directories where fonts are installed in the FONTS_DIRS.type
|
|
variables, where type can be one of "ttf", "type1" or "x11". Also make sure
|
|
that the database file fonts.dir is not listed in the PLIST.
|
|
|
|
Note that you should not create new directories for fonts; instead use the
|
|
standard ones to avoid that the user needs to manually configure his X server
|
|
to find them.
|
|
|
|
19.6.12. Packages installing GTK2 modules
|
|
|
|
If a package installs GTK2 immodules or loaders, you need to take some extra
|
|
steps to get them registered in the GTK2 database properly:
|
|
|
|
1. Include ../../x11/gtk2/modules.mk instead of its buildlink3.mk file. This
|
|
takes care of rebuilding the database at installation and deinstallation
|
|
time.
|
|
|
|
2. Set GTK2_IMMODULES=YES if your package installs GTK2 immodules.
|
|
|
|
3. Set GTK2_LOADERS=YES if your package installs GTK2 loaders.
|
|
|
|
4. Patch the package to not touch any of the GTK2 databases directly. These
|
|
are:
|
|
|
|
* libdata/gtk-2.0/gdk-pixbuf.loaders
|
|
|
|
* libdata/gtk-2.0/gtk.immodules
|
|
|
|
5. Check the PLIST and remove any entries under the libdata/gtk-2.0 directory,
|
|
as they will be handled automatically.
|
|
|
|
19.6.13. Packages installing SGML or XML data
|
|
|
|
If a package installs SGML or XML data files that need to be registered in
|
|
system-wide catalogs (like DTDs, sub-catalogs, etc.), you need to take some
|
|
extra steps:
|
|
|
|
1. Include ../../textproc/xmlcatmgr/catalogs.mk in your Makefile, which takes
|
|
care of registering those files in system-wide catalogs at installation and
|
|
deinstallation time.
|
|
|
|
2. Set SGML_CATALOGS to the full path of any SGML catalogs installed by the
|
|
package.
|
|
|
|
3. Set XML_CATALOGS to the full path of any XML catalogs installed by the
|
|
package.
|
|
|
|
4. Set SGML_ENTRIES to individual entries to be added to the SGML catalog.
|
|
These come in groups of three strings; see xmlcatmgr(1) for more
|
|
information (specifically, arguments recognized by the 'add' action). Note
|
|
that you will normally not use this variable.
|
|
|
|
5. Set XML_ENTRIES to individual entries to be added to the XML catalog. These
|
|
come in groups of three strings; see xmlcatmgr(1) for more information
|
|
(specifically, arguments recognized by the 'add' action). Note that you
|
|
will normally not use this variable.
|
|
|
|
19.6.14. Packages installing extensions to the MIME database
|
|
|
|
If a package provides extensions to the MIME database by installing .xml files
|
|
inside ${PREFIX}/share/mime/packages, you need to take some extra steps to
|
|
ensure that the database is kept consistent with respect to these new files:
|
|
|
|
1. Include ../../databases/shared-mime-info/mimedb.mk (avoid using the
|
|
buildlink3.mk file from this same directory, which is reserved for
|
|
inclusion from other buildlink3.mk files). It takes care of rebuilding the
|
|
MIME database at installation and deinstallation time, and disallows any
|
|
access to it directly from the package.
|
|
|
|
2. Check the PLIST and remove any entries under the share/mime directory,
|
|
except for files saved under share/mime/packages. The former are handled
|
|
automatically by the update-mime-database program, but the latter are
|
|
package-dependent and must be removed by the package that installed them in
|
|
the first place.
|
|
|
|
3. Remove any share/mime/* directories from the PLIST. They will be handled by
|
|
the shared-mime-info package.
|
|
|
|
19.6.15. Packages using intltool
|
|
|
|
If a package uses intltool during its build, add intltool to the USE_TOOLS,
|
|
which forces it to use the intltool package provided by pkgsrc, instead of the
|
|
one bundled with the distribution file.
|
|
|
|
This tracks intltool's build-time dependencies and uses the latest available
|
|
version; this way, the package benefits of any bug fixes that may have appeared
|
|
since it was released.
|
|
|
|
19.6.16. Packages installing startup scripts
|
|
|
|
If a package contains a rc.d script, it won't be copied into the startup
|
|
directory by default, but you can enable it, by adding the option
|
|
PKG_RCD_SCRIPTS=YES in mk.conf. This option will copy the scripts into /etc/
|
|
rc.d when a package is installed, and it will automatically remove the scripts
|
|
when the package is deinstalled.
|
|
|
|
19.6.17. Packages installing TeX modules
|
|
|
|
If a package installs TeX packages into the texmf tree, the ls-R database of
|
|
the tree needs to be updated.
|
|
|
|
Note
|
|
|
|
Except the main TeX packages such as teTeX-texmf, packages should install files
|
|
into PKG_LOCALTEXMFPREFIX, not PKG_TEXMFPREFIX.
|
|
|
|
1. Include ../../print/teTeX/module.mk instead of ../../mk/tex.buildlink3.mk.
|
|
This takes care of rebuilding the ls-R database at installation and
|
|
deinstallation time.
|
|
|
|
2. If your package installs files into a texmf tree other than the one at
|
|
PKG_LOCALTEXMFPREFIX, set TEXMFDIRS to the list of all texmf trees that
|
|
need database update.
|
|
|
|
If your package also installs font map files that need to be registered
|
|
using updmap, set TEX_FONTMAPS to the list of all such font map files. Then
|
|
updmap will be run automatically at installation/deinstallation to enable/
|
|
disable font map files for TeX output drivers.
|
|
|
|
3. Make sure that none of ls-R databases are included in PLIST, as they will
|
|
be removed only by the teTeX-bin package.
|
|
|
|
19.6.18. Packages supporting running binaries in emulation
|
|
|
|
There are some packages that provide libraries and executables for running
|
|
binaries from a one operating system on a different one (if the latter supports
|
|
it). One example is running Linux binaries on NetBSD.
|
|
|
|
The pkgtools/rpm2pkg helps in extracting and packaging Linux rpm packages.
|
|
|
|
The CHECK_SHLIBS can be set to no to avoid the check-shlibs target, which tests
|
|
if all libraries for each installed executable can be found by the dynamic
|
|
linker. Since the standard dynamic linker is run, this fails for emulation
|
|
packages, because the libraries used by the emulation are not in the standard
|
|
directories.
|
|
|
|
19.6.19. Packages installing hicolor theme icons
|
|
|
|
If a package installs images under the share/icons/hicolor and/or updates the
|
|
share/icons/hicolor/icon-theme.cache database, you need to take some extra
|
|
steps to make sure that the shared theme directory is handled appropriately and
|
|
that the cache database is rebuilt:
|
|
|
|
1. Include ../../graphics/hicolor-icon-theme/buildlink3.mk.
|
|
|
|
2. Check the PLIST and remove the entry that refers to the theme cache.
|
|
|
|
3. Ensure that the PLIST does not remove the shared icon directories from the
|
|
share/icons/hicolor hierarchy because they will be handled automatically.
|
|
|
|
The best way to verify that the PLIST is correct with respect to the last two
|
|
points is to regenerate it using make print-PLIST.
|
|
|
|
19.6.20. Packages installing desktop files
|
|
|
|
If a package installs .desktop files under share/applications and these include
|
|
MIME information, you need to take extra steps to ensure that they are
|
|
registered into the MIME database:
|
|
|
|
1. Include ../../sysutils/desktop-file-utils/desktopdb.mk.
|
|
|
|
2. Check the PLIST and remove the entry that refers to the share/applications/
|
|
mimeinfo.cache file. It will be handled automatically.
|
|
|
|
The best way to verify that the PLIST is correct with respect to the last point
|
|
is to regenerate it using make print-PLIST.
|
|
|
|
19.7. Marking packages as having problems
|
|
|
|
In some cases one does not have the time to solve a problem immediately. There
|
|
are currently two ways to declare that one knows that a package has problems.
|
|
|
|
* The first way is to plainly mark it as broken. For this, one just sets the
|
|
variable BROKEN to the reason why the package is broken (similar to the
|
|
RESTRICTED variable). A user trying to build the package will immediately
|
|
be shown this message, and the build will not be even tried.
|
|
|
|
* After each pkgsrc freeze period (a time when the tree is stabilized and a
|
|
new pkgsrc branch is cut), the packages that were not building in the
|
|
official branch build on the latest NetBSD release will be marked as broken
|
|
on that branch. This is done by setting the BROKEN_IN variable to the
|
|
branch name (or appending the branch name to it). If a user tries to build
|
|
such a package and the build fails, the user gets a message that says that
|
|
the package was broken on the respective branch(es).
|
|
|
|
Both types of packages are removed from pkgsrc in irregular intervals.
|
|
|
|
Chapter 20. Debugging
|
|
|
|
To check out all the gotchas when building a package, here are the steps that I
|
|
do in order to get a package working. Please note this is basically the same as
|
|
what was explained in the previous sections, only with some debugging aids.
|
|
|
|
* Be sure to set PKG_DEVELOPER=yes in mk.conf.
|
|
|
|
* Install pkgtools/url2pkg, create a directory for a new package, change into
|
|
it, then run url2pkg:
|
|
|
|
% mkdir /usr/pkgsrc/category/examplepkg
|
|
% cd /usr/pkgsrc/category/examplepkg
|
|
% url2pkg http://www.example.com/path/to/distfile.tar.gz
|
|
|
|
* Edit the Makefile as requested.
|
|
|
|
* Fill in the DESCR file
|
|
|
|
* Run make configure
|
|
|
|
* Add any dependencies glimpsed from documentation and the configure step to
|
|
the package's Makefile.
|
|
|
|
* Make the package compile, doing multiple rounds of
|
|
|
|
% make
|
|
% pkgvi ${WRKSRC}/some/file/that/does/not/compile
|
|
% mkpatches
|
|
% patchdiff
|
|
% mv ${WRKDIR}/.newpatches/* patches
|
|
% make mps
|
|
% make clean
|
|
|
|
Doing this step as non-root user will ensure that no files are modified
|
|
that shouldn't be, especially during the build phase. mkpatches, patchdiff
|
|
and pkgvi are from the pkgtools/pkgdiff package.
|
|
|
|
* Look at the Makefile, fix if necessary; see Section 11.1, "Makefile".
|
|
|
|
* Generate a PLIST:
|
|
|
|
# make install
|
|
# make print-PLIST >PLIST
|
|
# make deinstall
|
|
# make install
|
|
# make deinstall
|
|
|
|
You usually need to be root to do this. Look if there are any files left:
|
|
|
|
# make print-PLIST
|
|
|
|
If this reveals any files that are missing in PLIST, add them.
|
|
|
|
* Now that the PLIST is OK, install the package again and make a binary
|
|
package:
|
|
|
|
# make reinstall
|
|
# make package
|
|
|
|
* Delete the installed package:
|
|
|
|
# pkg_delete examplepkg
|
|
|
|
* Repeat the above make print-PLIST command, which shouldn't find anything
|
|
now:
|
|
|
|
# make print-PLIST
|
|
|
|
* Reinstall the binary package:
|
|
|
|
# pkg_add .../examplepkg.tgz
|
|
|
|
* Play with it. Make sure everything works.
|
|
|
|
* Run pkglint from pkgtools/pkglint, and fix the problems it reports:
|
|
|
|
# pkglint
|
|
|
|
* Submit (or commit, if you have cvs access); see Chapter 21, Submitting and
|
|
Committing.
|
|
|
|
Chapter 21. Submitting and Committing
|
|
|
|
Table of Contents
|
|
|
|
21.1. Submitting binary packages
|
|
21.2. Submitting source packages (for non-NetBSD-developers)
|
|
21.3. General notes when adding, updating, or removing packages
|
|
21.4. Committing: Importing a package into CVS
|
|
21.5. Updating a package to a newer version
|
|
21.6. Moving a package in pkgsrc
|
|
|
|
21.1. Submitting binary packages
|
|
|
|
Our policy is that we accept binaries only from pkgsrc developers to guarantee
|
|
that the packages don't contain any trojan horses etc. This is not to annoy
|
|
anyone but rather to protect our users! You're still free to put up your
|
|
home-made binary packages and tell the world where to get them. NetBSD
|
|
developers doing bulk builds and wanting to upload them please see
|
|
Section 7.3.8, "Uploading results of a bulk build".
|
|
|
|
21.2. Submitting source packages (for non-NetBSD-developers)
|
|
|
|
First, check that your package is complete, compiles and runs well; see
|
|
Chapter 20, Debugging and the rest of this document. Next, generate an
|
|
uuencoded gzipped tar(1) archive that contains all files that make up the
|
|
package. Finally, send this package to the pkgsrc bug tracking system, either
|
|
with the send-pr(1) command, or if you don't have that, go to the web page
|
|
http://www.NetBSD.org/support/send-pr.html, which contains some instructions
|
|
and a link to a form, where you can submit packages.
|
|
|
|
In the form of the problem report, the category should be "pkg", the synopsis
|
|
should include the package name and version number, and the description field
|
|
should contain a short description of your package (contents of the COMMENT
|
|
variable or DESCR file are OK). The uuencoded package data should go into the
|
|
"fix" field.
|
|
|
|
If you want to submit several packages, please send a separate PR for each one,
|
|
it's easier for us to track things that way.
|
|
|
|
Alternatively, you can also import new packages into pkgsrc-wip ("pkgsrc
|
|
work-in-progress"); see the homepage at http://pkgsrc-wip.sourceforge.net/ for
|
|
details.
|
|
|
|
21.3. General notes when adding, updating, or removing packages
|
|
|
|
Please note all package additions, updates, moves, and removals in pkgsrc/doc/
|
|
CHANGES-YYYY. It's very important to keep this file up to date and conforming
|
|
to the existing format, because it will be used by scripts to automatically
|
|
update pages on www.NetBSD.org and other sites. Additionally, check the pkgsrc/
|
|
doc/TODO file and remove the entry for the package you updated or removed, in
|
|
case it was mentioned there.
|
|
|
|
When the PKGREVISION of a package is bumped, the change should appear in pkgsrc
|
|
/doc/CHANGES-YYYY if it is security related or otherwise relevant. Mass bumps
|
|
that result from a dependency being updated should not be mentioned. In all
|
|
other cases it's the developer's decision.
|
|
|
|
There is a make target that helps in creating proper CHANGES-YYYY entries: make
|
|
changes-entry. It uses the optional CTYPE and NETBSD_LOGIN_NAME variables. The
|
|
general usage is to first make sure that your CHANGES-YYYY file is up-to-date
|
|
(to avoid having to resolve conflicts later-on) and then to cd to the package
|
|
directory. For package updates, make changes-entry is enough. For new packages,
|
|
or package moves or removals, set the CTYPE variable on the command line to
|
|
"Added", "Moved", or "Removed". You can set NETBSD_LOGIN_NAME in mk.conf if
|
|
your local login name is not the same as your NetBSD login name. Don't forget
|
|
to commit the changes to pkgsrc/doc/CHANGES-YYYY!
|
|
|
|
21.4. Committing: Importing a package into CVS
|
|
|
|
This section is only of interest for pkgsrc developers with write access to the
|
|
pkgsrc repository. Please remember that cvs imports files relative to the
|
|
current working directory, and that the pathname that you give the cvs import
|
|
command is so that it knows where to place the files in the repository. Newly
|
|
created packages should be imported with a vendor tag of "TNF" and a release
|
|
tag of "pkgsrc-base", e.g:
|
|
|
|
$ cd .../pkgsrc/category/pkgname
|
|
$ cvs import pkgsrc/category/pkgname TNF pkgsrc-base
|
|
|
|
Remember to move the directory from which you imported out of the way, or cvs
|
|
will complain the next time you "cvs update" your source tree. Also don't
|
|
forget to add the new package to the category's Makefile.
|
|
|
|
The commit message of the initial import should include part of the DESCR file,
|
|
so people reading the mailing lists know what the package is/does.
|
|
|
|
For new packages, "cvs import" is preferred to "cvs add" because the former
|
|
gets everything with a single command, and provides a consistent tag.
|
|
|
|
21.5. Updating a package to a newer version
|
|
|
|
Please always put a concise, appropriate and relevant summary of the changes
|
|
between old and new versions into the commit log when updating a package. There
|
|
are various reasons for this:
|
|
|
|
* A URL is volatile, and can change over time. It may go away completely or
|
|
its information may be overwritten by newer information.
|
|
|
|
* Having the change information between old and new versions in our CVS
|
|
repository is very useful for people who use either cvs or anoncvs.
|
|
|
|
* Having the change information between old and new versions in our CVS
|
|
repository is very useful for people who read the pkgsrc-changes mailing
|
|
list, so that they can make tactical decisions about when to upgrade the
|
|
package.
|
|
|
|
Please also recognize that, just because a new version of a package has been
|
|
released, it should not automatically be upgraded in the CVS repository. We
|
|
prefer to be conservative in the packages that are included in pkgsrc -
|
|
development or beta packages are not really the best thing for most places in
|
|
which pkgsrc is used. Please use your judgement about what should go into
|
|
pkgsrc, and bear in mind that stability is to be preferred above new and
|
|
possibly untested features.
|
|
|
|
21.6. Moving a package in pkgsrc
|
|
|
|
1. Make a copy of the directory somewhere else.
|
|
|
|
2. Remove all CVS dirs.
|
|
|
|
Alternatively to the first two steps you can also do:
|
|
|
|
% cvs -d user@cvs.NetBSD.org:/cvsroot export -D today pkgsrc/category/package
|
|
|
|
and use that for further work.
|
|
|
|
3. Fix CATEGORIES and any DEPENDS paths that just did "../package" instead of
|
|
"../../category/package".
|
|
|
|
4. cvs import the modified package in the new place.
|
|
|
|
5. Check if any package depends on it:
|
|
|
|
% cd /usr/pkgsrc
|
|
% grep /package */*/Makefile* */*/buildlink*
|
|
|
|
6. Fix paths in packages from step 5 to point to new location.
|
|
|
|
7. cvs rm (-f) the package at the old location.
|
|
|
|
8. Remove from oldcategory/Makefile.
|
|
|
|
9. Add to newcategory/Makefile.
|
|
|
|
10. Commit the changed and removed files:
|
|
|
|
% cvs commit oldcategory/package oldcategory/Makefile newcategory/Makefile
|
|
|
|
(and any packages from step 5, of course).
|
|
|
|
Chapter 22. Frequently Asked Questions
|
|
|
|
This section contains the answers to questions that may arise when you are
|
|
writing a package. If you don't find your question answered here, first have a
|
|
look in the other chapters, and if you still don't have the answer, ask on the
|
|
pkgsrc-users mailing list.
|
|
|
|
22.1. What is the difference between MAKEFLAGS, .MAKEFLAGS and MAKE_FLAGS?
|
|
22.2. What is the difference between MAKE, GMAKE and MAKE_PROGRAM?
|
|
22.3. What is the difference between CC, PKG_CC and PKGSRC_COMPILER?
|
|
22.4. What is the difference between BUILDLINK_LDFLAGS, BUILDLINK_LDADD and
|
|
BUILDLINK_LIBS?
|
|
22.5. Why does make show-var VARNAME=BUILDLINK_PREFIX.foo say it's empty?
|
|
22.6. What does ${MASTER_SITE_SOURCEFORGE:=package/} mean? I don't understand
|
|
the := inside it.
|
|
22.7. Which mailing lists are there for package developers?
|
|
22.8. Where is the pkgsrc documentation?
|
|
22.9. I have a little time to kill. What shall I do?
|
|
|
|
22.1. What is the difference between MAKEFLAGS, .MAKEFLAGS and MAKE_FLAGS?
|
|
|
|
MAKEFLAGS are the flags passed to the pkgsrc-internal invocations of make
|
|
(1), while MAKE_FLAGS are the flags that are passed to the MAKE_PROGRAM
|
|
when building the package. [FIXME: What is .MAKEFLAGS for?]
|
|
|
|
22.2. What is the difference between MAKE, GMAKE and MAKE_PROGRAM?
|
|
|
|
MAKE is the path to the make(1) program that is used in the pkgsrc
|
|
infrastructure. GMAKE is the path to GNU Make, but you need to say
|
|
USE_TOOLS+=gmake to use that. MAKE_PROGRAM is the path to the Make
|
|
program that is used for building the package.
|
|
|
|
22.3. What is the difference between CC, PKG_CC and PKGSRC_COMPILER?
|
|
|
|
CC is the path to the real C compiler, which can be configured by the
|
|
pkgsrc user. PKG_CC is the path to the compiler wrapper. PKGSRC_COMPILER
|
|
is not a path to a compiler, but the type of compiler that should be
|
|
used. See mk/compiler.mk for more information about the latter variable.
|
|
|
|
22.4. What is the difference between BUILDLINK_LDFLAGS, BUILDLINK_LDADD and
|
|
BUILDLINK_LIBS?
|
|
|
|
[FIXME]
|
|
|
|
22.5. Why does make show-var VARNAME=BUILDLINK_PREFIX.foo say it's empty?
|
|
|
|
For optimization reasons, some variables are only available in the
|
|
"wrapper" phase and later. To "simulate" the wrapper phase, append
|
|
PKG_PHASE=wrapper to the above command.
|
|
|
|
22.6. What does ${MASTER_SITE_SOURCEFORGE:=package/} mean? I don't understand
|
|
the := inside it.
|
|
|
|
The := is not really an assignment operator, like you might expect at
|
|
first sight. Instead, it is a degenerate form of ${LIST:old_string=
|
|
new_string}, which is documented in the make(1) man page and which you
|
|
may have seen as in ${SRCS:.c=.o}. In the case of MASTER_SITE_*,
|
|
old_string is the empty string and new_string is package/. That's where
|
|
the : and the = fall together.
|
|
|
|
22.7. Which mailing lists are there for package developers?
|
|
|
|
tech-pkg
|
|
|
|
This is a list for technical discussions related to pkgsrc
|
|
development, e.g. soliciting feedback for changes to pkgsrc
|
|
infrastructure, proposed new features, questions related to porting
|
|
pkgsrc to a new platform, advice for maintaining a package, patches
|
|
that affect many packages, help requests moved from pkgsrc-users when
|
|
an infrastructure bug is found, etc.
|
|
|
|
pkgsrc-bugs
|
|
|
|
All bug reports in category "pkg" sent with send-pr(1) appear here.
|
|
Please do not report your bugs here directly; use one of the other
|
|
mailing lists.
|
|
|
|
22.8. Where is the pkgsrc documentation?
|
|
|
|
There are many places where you can find documentation about pkgsrc:
|
|
|
|
* The pkgsrc guide (this document) is a collection of chapters that
|
|
explain large parts of pkgsrc, but some chapters tend to be outdated.
|
|
Which ones they are is hard to say.
|
|
|
|
* On the mailing list archives (see http://mail-index.NetBSD.org/), you
|
|
can find discussions about certain features, announcements of new
|
|
parts of the pkgsrc infrastructure and sometimes even announcements
|
|
that a certain feature has been marked as obsolete. The benefit here
|
|
is that each message has a date appended to it.
|
|
|
|
* Many of the files in the mk/ directory start with a comment that
|
|
describes the purpose of the file and how it can be used by the
|
|
pkgsrc user and package authors. An easy way to find this
|
|
documentation is to run bmake help.
|
|
|
|
* The CVS log messages are a rich source of information, but they tend
|
|
to be highly abbreviated, especially for actions that occur often.
|
|
Some contain a detailed description of what has changed, but they are
|
|
geared towards the other pkgsrc developers, not towards an average
|
|
pkgsrc user. They also only document changes, so if you don't know
|
|
what has been before, these messages may not be worth too much to
|
|
you.
|
|
|
|
* Some parts of pkgsrc are only "implicitly documented", that is the
|
|
documentation exists only in the mind of the developer who wrote the
|
|
code. To get this information, use the cvs annotate command to see
|
|
who has written it and ask on the tech-pkg mailing list, so that
|
|
others can find your questions later (see above). To be sure that the
|
|
developer in charge reads the mail, you may CC him or her.
|
|
|
|
22.9. I have a little time to kill. What shall I do?
|
|
|
|
This is not really an FAQ yet, but here's the answer anyway.
|
|
|
|
* Run pkg_chk -N (from the pkgtools/pkg_chk package). It will tell you
|
|
about newer versions of installed packages that are available, but
|
|
not yet updated in pkgsrc.
|
|
|
|
* Browse pkgsrc/doc/TODO ? it contains a list of suggested new packages
|
|
and a list of cleanups and enhancements for pkgsrc that would be nice
|
|
to have.
|
|
|
|
* Review packages for which review was requested on the pkgsrc-wip
|
|
review mailing list.
|
|
|
|
Chapter 23. GNOME packaging and porting
|
|
|
|
Table of Contents
|
|
|
|
23.1. Meta packages
|
|
23.2. Packaging a GNOME application
|
|
23.3. Updating GNOME to a newer version
|
|
23.4. Patching guidelines
|
|
|
|
Quoting GNOME's web site:
|
|
|
|
The GNOME project provides two things: The GNOME desktop environment, an
|
|
intuitive and attractive desktop for users, and the GNOME development
|
|
platform, an extensive framework for building applications that integrate
|
|
into the rest of the desktop.
|
|
|
|
pkgsrc provides a seamless way to automatically build and install a complete
|
|
GNOME environment under many different platforms. We can say with confidence
|
|
that pkgsrc is one of the most advanced build and packaging systems for GNOME
|
|
due to its included technologies buildlink3, the wrappers and tools framework
|
|
and automatic configuration file management. Lots of efforts are put into
|
|
achieving a completely clean deinstallation of installed software components.
|
|
|
|
Given that pkgsrc is NetBSD's official packaging system, the above also means
|
|
that great efforts are put into making GNOME work under this operating system.
|
|
Recently, DragonFly BSD also adopted pkgsrc as its preferred packaging system,
|
|
contributing lots of portability fixes to make GNOME build and install under
|
|
it.
|
|
|
|
This chapter is aimed at pkgsrc developers and other people interested in
|
|
helping our GNOME porting and packaging efforts. It provides instructions on
|
|
how to manage the existing packages and some important information regarding
|
|
their internals.
|
|
|
|
We need your help!
|
|
|
|
Should you have some spare cycles to devote to NetBSD, pkgsrc and GNOME and are
|
|
willing to learn new exciting stuff, please jump straight to the pending work
|
|
list! There is still a long way to go to get a fully-functional GNOME desktop
|
|
under NetBSD and we need your help to achieve it!
|
|
|
|
23.1. Meta packages
|
|
|
|
pkgsrc includes three GNOME-related meta packages:
|
|
|
|
* meta-pkgs/gnome-base: Provides the core GNOME desktop environment. It only
|
|
includes the necessary bits to get it to boot correctly, although it may
|
|
lack important functionality for daily operation. The idea behind this
|
|
package is to let end users build their own configurations on top of this
|
|
one, first installing this meta package to achieve a functional setup and
|
|
then adding individual applications.
|
|
|
|
* meta-pkgs/gnome: Provides a complete installation of the GNOME platform and
|
|
desktop as defined by the GNOME project; this is based on the components
|
|
distributed in the platform/x.y/x.y.z/sources and desktop/x.y/x.y.z/sources
|
|
directories of the official FTP server. Developer-only tools found in those
|
|
directories are not installed unless required by some other component to
|
|
work properly. Similarly, packages from the bindings set (bindings/x.y/
|
|
x.y.z/sources) are not pulled in unless required as a dependency for an
|
|
end-user component. This package "extends" meta-pkgs/gnome-base.
|
|
|
|
* meta-pkgs/gnome-devel: Installs all the tools required to build a GNOME
|
|
component when fetched from the CVS repository. These are required to let
|
|
the autogen.sh scripts work appropriately.
|
|
|
|
In all these packages, the DEPENDS lines are sorted in a way that eases
|
|
updates: a package may depend on other packages listed before it but not on any
|
|
listed after it. It is very important to keep this order to ease updates so...
|
|
do not change it to alphabetical sorting!
|
|
|
|
23.2. Packaging a GNOME application
|
|
|
|
Almost all GNOME applications are written in C and use a common set of tools as
|
|
their build system. Things get different with the new bindings to other
|
|
languages (such as Python), but the following will give you a general idea on
|
|
the minimum required tools:
|
|
|
|
* Almost all GNOME applications use the GNU Autotools as their build system.
|
|
As a general rule you will need to tell this to your package:
|
|
|
|
GNU_CONFIGURE=yes
|
|
USE_LIBTOOL=yes
|
|
USE_TOOLS+=gmake
|
|
|
|
* If the package uses pkg-config to detect dependencies, add this tool to the
|
|
list of required utilities:
|
|
|
|
USE_TOOLS+=pkg-config
|
|
|
|
Also use pkgtools/verifypc at the end of the build process to ensure that
|
|
you did not miss to specify any dependency in your package and that the
|
|
version requirements are all correct.
|
|
|
|
* If the package uses intltool, be sure to add intltool to the USE_TOOLS to
|
|
handle dependencies and to force the package to use the latest available
|
|
version.
|
|
|
|
* If the package uses gtk-doc (a documentation generation utility), do not
|
|
add a dependency on it. The tool is rather big and the distfile should come
|
|
with pregenerated documentation anyway; if it does not, it is a bug that
|
|
you ought to report. For such packages you should disable gtk-doc (unless
|
|
it is the default):
|
|
|
|
CONFIGURE_ARGS+=--disable-gtk-doc
|
|
|
|
The default location of installed HTML files (share/gtk-doc/<package-name>)
|
|
is correct and should not be changed unless the package insists on
|
|
installing them somewhere else. Otherwise programs as devhelp will not be
|
|
able to open them. You can do that with an entry similar to:
|
|
|
|
CONFIGURE_ARGS+=--with-html-dir=${PREFIX}/share/gtk-doc/...
|
|
|
|
GNOME uses multiple shared directories and files under the installation prefix
|
|
to maintain databases. In this context, shared means that those exact same
|
|
directories and files are used among several different packages, leading to
|
|
conflicts in the PLIST. pkgsrc currently includes functionality to handle the
|
|
most common cases, so you have to forget about using @unexec ${RMDIR} lines in
|
|
your file lists and omitting shared files from them. If you find yourself doing
|
|
those, your package is most likely incorrect.
|
|
|
|
The following table lists the common situations that result in using shared
|
|
directories or files. For each of them, the appropriate solution is given.
|
|
After applying the solution be sure to regenerate the package's file list with
|
|
make print-PLIST and ensure it is correct.
|
|
|
|
Table 23.1. PLIST handling for GNOME packages
|
|
|
|
+-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+
|
|
| If the package... | Then... |
|
|
|-------------------------------------------+---------------------------------|
|
|
| |See Section 19.6.10, "Packages |
|
|
|Installs OMF files under share/omf. |installing scrollkeeper/rarian |
|
|
| |data files". |
|
|
|-------------------------------------------+---------------------------------|
|
|
|Installs icons under the share/icons/ |See Section 19.6.19, "Packages |
|
|
|hicolor hierarchy or updates share/icons/ |installing hicolor theme icons". |
|
|
|hicolor/icon-theme.cache. | |
|
|
|-------------------------------------------+---------------------------------|
|
|
| |See Section 19.6.14, "Packages |
|
|
|Installs files under share/mime/packages. |installing extensions to the MIME|
|
|
| |database". |
|
|
|-------------------------------------------+---------------------------------|
|
|
|Installs .desktop files under share/ |See Section 19.6.20, "Packages |
|
|
|applications and these include MIME |installing desktop files". |
|
|
|information. | |
|
|
+-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+
|
|
|
|
|
|
23.3. Updating GNOME to a newer version
|
|
|
|
When seeing GNOME as a whole, there are two kinds of updates:
|
|
|
|
Major update
|
|
|
|
Given that there is still a very long way for GNOME 3 (if it ever appears),
|
|
we consider a major update one that goes from a 2.X version to a 2.Y one,
|
|
where Y is even and greater than X. These are hard to achieve because they
|
|
introduce lots of changes in the components' code and almost all GNOME
|
|
distfiles are updated to newer versions. Some of them can even break API
|
|
and ABI compatibility with the previous major version series. As a result,
|
|
the update needs to be done all at once to minimize breakage.
|
|
|
|
A major update typically consists of around 80 package updates and the
|
|
addition of some new ones.
|
|
|
|
Minor update
|
|
|
|
We consider a minor update one that goes from a 2.A.X version to a 2.A.Y
|
|
one where Y is greater than X. These are easy to achieve because they do
|
|
not update all GNOME components, can be done in an incremental way and do
|
|
not break API nor ABI compatibility.
|
|
|
|
A minor update typically consists of around 50 package updates, although
|
|
the numbers here may vary a lot.
|
|
|
|
In order to update the GNOME components in pkgsrc to a new stable release
|
|
(either major or minor), the following steps should be followed:
|
|
|
|
1. Get a list of all the tarballs that form the new release by using the
|
|
following commands. These will leave the full list of the components'
|
|
distfiles into the list.txt file:
|
|
|
|
% echo ls "*.tar.bz2" | \
|
|
ftp -V ftp://ftp.gnome.org/pub/gnome/platform/x.y/x.y.z/sources/ | \
|
|
awk '{ print $9 }' >list.txt
|
|
% echo ls "*.tar.bz2" | \
|
|
ftp -V ftp://ftp.gnome.org/pub/gnome/desktop/x.y/x.y.z/sources/ | \
|
|
awk '{ print $9 }' >>list.txt
|
|
|
|
2. Open each meta package's Makefile and bump their version to the release you
|
|
are updating them to. The three meta packages should be always consistent
|
|
with versioning. Obviously remove any PKGREVISIONs that might be in them.
|
|
|
|
3. For each meta package, update all its DEPENDS lines to match the latest
|
|
versions as shown by the above commands. Do not list any newer version
|
|
(even if found in the FTP) because the meta packages are supposed to list
|
|
the exact versions that form a specific GNOME release. Exceptions are
|
|
permitted here if a newer version solves a serious issue in the overall
|
|
desktop experience; these typically come in the form of a revision bump in
|
|
pkgsrc, not in newer versions from the developers.
|
|
|
|
Packages not listed in the list.txt file should be updated to the latest
|
|
version available (if found in pkgsrc). This is the case, for example, of
|
|
the dependencies on the GNU Autotools in the meta-pkgs/gnome-devel meta
|
|
package.
|
|
|
|
4. Generate a patch from the modified meta packages and extract the list of
|
|
"new" lines. This will provide you an outline on what packages need to be
|
|
updated in pkgsrc and in what order:
|
|
|
|
% cvs diff -u gnome-devel gnome-base gnome | grep '^+D' >todo.txt
|
|
|
|
5. For major desktop updates it is recommended to zap all your installed
|
|
packages and start over from scratch at this point.
|
|
|
|
6. Now comes the longest step by far: iterate over the contents of todo.txt
|
|
and update the packages listed in it in order. For major desktop updates
|
|
none of these should be committed until the entire set is completed because
|
|
there are chances of breaking not-yet-updated packages.
|
|
|
|
7. Once the packages are up to date and working, commit them to the tree one
|
|
by one with appropriate log messages. At the end, commit the three meta
|
|
package updates and all the corresponding changes to the doc/CHANGES-<YEAR>
|
|
and pkgsrc/doc/TODO files.
|
|
|
|
23.4. Patching guidelines
|
|
|
|
GNOME is a very big component in pkgsrc which approaches 100 packages. Please,
|
|
it is very important that you always, always, always feed back any portability
|
|
fixes you do to a GNOME package to the mainstream developers (see
|
|
Section 11.3.5, "Feedback to the author"). This is the only way to get their
|
|
attention on portability issues and to ensure that future versions can be built
|
|
out-of-the box on NetBSD. The less custom patches in pkgsrc, the easier further
|
|
updates are. Those developers in charge of issuing major GNOME updates will be
|
|
grateful if you do that.
|
|
|
|
The most common places to report bugs are the GNOME's Bugzilla and the
|
|
freedesktop.org's Bugzilla. Not all components use these to track bugs, but
|
|
most of them do. Do not be short on your reports: always provide detailed
|
|
explanations of the current failure, how it can be improved to achieve maximum
|
|
portability and, if at all possible, provide a patch against CVS head. The more
|
|
verbose you are, the higher chances of your patch being accepted.
|
|
|
|
Also, please avoid using preprocessor magic to fix portability issues. While
|
|
the FreeBSD GNOME people are doing a great job in porting GNOME to their
|
|
operating system, the official GNOME sources are now plagued by conditionals
|
|
that check for __FreeBSD__ and similar macros. This hurts portability. Please
|
|
see our patching guidelines (Section 11.3.4, "Patching guidelines") for more
|
|
details.
|
|
|
|
Part III. The pkgsrc infrastructure internals
|
|
|
|
This part of the guide deals with everything from the infrastructure that is
|
|
behind the interfaces described in the developer's guide. A casual package
|
|
maintainer should not need anything from this part.
|
|
|
|
Table of Contents
|
|
|
|
24. Design of the pkgsrc infrastructure
|
|
|
|
24.1. The meaning of variable definitions
|
|
24.2. Avoiding problems before they arise
|
|
24.3. Variable evaluation
|
|
|
|
24.3.1. At load time
|
|
24.3.2. At runtime
|
|
|
|
24.4. How can variables be specified?
|
|
24.5. Designing interfaces for Makefile fragments
|
|
|
|
24.5.1. Procedures with parameters
|
|
24.5.2. Actions taken on behalf of parameters
|
|
|
|
24.6. The order in which files are loaded
|
|
|
|
24.6.1. The order in bsd.prefs.mk
|
|
24.6.2. The order in bsd.pkg.mk
|
|
|
|
25. Regression tests
|
|
|
|
25.1. The regression tests framework
|
|
25.2. Running the regression tests
|
|
25.3. Adding a new regression test
|
|
|
|
25.3.1. Overridable functions
|
|
25.3.2. Helper functions
|
|
|
|
26. Porting pkgsrc
|
|
|
|
26.1. Porting pkgsrc to a new operating system
|
|
26.2. Adding support for a new compiler
|
|
|
|
Chapter 24. Design of the pkgsrc infrastructure
|
|
|
|
Table of Contents
|
|
|
|
24.1. The meaning of variable definitions
|
|
24.2. Avoiding problems before they arise
|
|
24.3. Variable evaluation
|
|
|
|
24.3.1. At load time
|
|
24.3.2. At runtime
|
|
|
|
24.4. How can variables be specified?
|
|
24.5. Designing interfaces for Makefile fragments
|
|
|
|
24.5.1. Procedures with parameters
|
|
24.5.2. Actions taken on behalf of parameters
|
|
|
|
24.6. The order in which files are loaded
|
|
|
|
24.6.1. The order in bsd.prefs.mk
|
|
24.6.2. The order in bsd.pkg.mk
|
|
|
|
The pkgsrc infrastructure consists of many small Makefile fragments. Each such
|
|
fragment needs a properly specified interface. This chapter explains how such
|
|
an interface looks like.
|
|
|
|
24.1. The meaning of variable definitions
|
|
|
|
Whenever a variable is defined in the pkgsrc infrastructure, the location and
|
|
the way of definition provide much information about the intended use of that
|
|
variable. Additionally, more documentation may be found in a header comment or
|
|
in this pkgsrc guide.
|
|
|
|
A special file is mk/defaults/mk.conf, which lists all variables that are
|
|
intended to be user-defined. They are either defined using the ?= operator or
|
|
they are left undefined because defining them to anything would effectively
|
|
mean "yes". All these variables may be overridden by the pkgsrc user in the
|
|
MAKECONF file.
|
|
|
|
Outside this file, the following conventions apply: Variables that are defined
|
|
using the ?= operator may be overridden by a package.
|
|
|
|
Variables that are defined using the = operator may be used read-only at
|
|
run-time.
|
|
|
|
Variables whose name starts with an underscore must not be accessed outside the
|
|
pkgsrc infrastructure at all. They may change without further notice.
|
|
|
|
Note
|
|
|
|
These conventions are currently not applied consistently to the complete pkgsrc
|
|
infrastructure.
|
|
|
|
24.2. Avoiding problems before they arise
|
|
|
|
All variables that contain lists of things should default to being empty. Two
|
|
examples that do not follow this rule are USE_LANGUAGES and DISTFILES. These
|
|
variables cannot simply be modified using the += operator in package Makefiles
|
|
(or other files included by them), since there is no guarantee whether the
|
|
variable is already set or not, and what its value is. In the case of
|
|
DISTFILES, the packages "know" the default value and just define it as in the
|
|
following example.
|
|
|
|
DISTFILES= ${DISTNAME}${EXTRACT_SUFX} additional-files.tar.gz
|
|
|
|
Because of the selection of this default value, the same value appears in many
|
|
package Makefiles. Similarly for USE_LANGUAGES, but in this case the default
|
|
value ("c") is so short that it doesn't stand out. Nevertheless it is mentioned
|
|
in many files.
|
|
|
|
24.3. Variable evaluation
|
|
|
|
24.3.1. At load time
|
|
|
|
Variable evaluation takes place either at load time or at runtime, depending on
|
|
the context in which they occur. The contexts where variables are evaluated at
|
|
load time are:
|
|
|
|
* The right hand side of the := and != operators,
|
|
|
|
* Make directives like .if or .for,
|
|
|
|
* Dependency lines.
|
|
|
|
A special exception are references to the iteration variables of .for loops,
|
|
which are expanded inline, no matter in which context they appear.
|
|
|
|
As the values of variables may change during load time, care must be taken not
|
|
to evaluate them by accident. Typical examples for variables that should not be
|
|
evaluated at load time are DEPENDS and CONFIGURE_ARGS. To make the effect more
|
|
clear, here is an example:
|
|
|
|
CONFIGURE_ARGS= # none
|
|
CFLAGS= -O
|
|
CONFIGURE_ARGS+= CFLAGS=${CFLAGS:Q}
|
|
|
|
CONFIGURE_ARGS:= ${CONFIGURE_ARGS}
|
|
|
|
CFLAGS+= -Wall
|
|
|
|
|
|
This code shows how the use of the := operator can quickly lead to unexpected
|
|
results. The first paragraph is fairly common code. The second paragraph
|
|
evaluates the CONFIGURE_ARGS variable, which results in CFLAGS=-O. In the third
|
|
paragraph, the -Wall is appended to the CFLAGS, but this addition will not
|
|
appear in CONFIGURE_ARGS. In actual code, the three paragraphs from above
|
|
typically occur in completely unrelated files.
|
|
|
|
24.3.2. At runtime
|
|
|
|
After all the files have been loaded, the values of the variables cannot be
|
|
changed anymore. Variables that are used in the shell commands are expanded at
|
|
this point.
|
|
|
|
24.4. How can variables be specified?
|
|
|
|
There are many ways in which the definition and use of a variable can be
|
|
restricted in order to detect bugs and violations of the (mostly unwritten)
|
|
policies. See the pkglint developer's documentation for further details.
|
|
|
|
24.5. Designing interfaces for Makefile fragments
|
|
|
|
Most of the .mk files fall into one of the following classes. Cases where a
|
|
file falls into more than one class should be avoided as it often leads to
|
|
subtle bugs.
|
|
|
|
24.5.1. Procedures with parameters
|
|
|
|
In a traditional imperative programming language some of the .mk files could be
|
|
described as procedures. They take some input parameters and?after inclusion?
|
|
provide a result in output parameters. Since all variables in Makefiles have
|
|
global scope care must be taken not to use parameter names that have already
|
|
another meaning. For example, PKGNAME is a bad choice for a parameter name.
|
|
|
|
Procedures are completely evaluated at preprocessing time. That is, when
|
|
calling a procedure all input parameters must be completely resolvable. For
|
|
example, CONFIGURE_ARGS should never be an input parameter since it is very
|
|
likely that further text will be added after calling the procedure, which would
|
|
effectively apply the procedure to only a part of the variable. Also,
|
|
references to other variables wit will be modified after calling the procedure.
|
|
|
|
A procedure can declare its output parameters either as suitable for use in
|
|
preprocessing directives or as only available at runtime. The latter
|
|
alternative is for variables that contain references to other runtime
|
|
variables.
|
|
|
|
Procedures shall be written such that it is possible to call the procedure more
|
|
than once. That is, the file must not contain multiple-inclusion guards.
|
|
|
|
Examples for procedures are mk/bsd.options.mk and mk/buildlink3/bsd.builtin.mk.
|
|
To express that the parameters are evaluated at load time, they should be
|
|
assigned using the := operator, which should be used only for this purpose.
|
|
|
|
24.5.2. Actions taken on behalf of parameters
|
|
|
|
Action files take some input parameters and may define runtime variables. They
|
|
shall not define loadtime variables. There are action files that are included
|
|
implicitly by the pkgsrc infrastructure, while other must be included
|
|
explicitly.
|
|
|
|
An example for action files is mk/subst.mk.
|
|
|
|
24.6. The order in which files are loaded
|
|
|
|
Package Makefiles usually consist of a set of variable definitions, and include
|
|
the file ../../mk/bsd.pkg.mk in the very last line. Before that, they may also
|
|
include various other *.mk files if they need to query the availability of
|
|
certain features like the type of compiler or the X11 implementation. Due to
|
|
the heavy use of preprocessor directives like .if and .for, the order in which
|
|
the files are loaded matters.
|
|
|
|
This section describes at which point the various files are loaded and gives
|
|
reasons for that order.
|
|
|
|
24.6.1. The order in bsd.prefs.mk
|
|
|
|
The very first action in bsd.prefs.mk is to define some essential variables
|
|
like OPSYS, OS_VERSION and MACHINE_ARCH.
|
|
|
|
Then, the user settings are loaded from the file specified in MAKECONF, which
|
|
is usually mk.conf. After that, those variables that have not been overridden
|
|
by the user are loaded from mk/defaults/mk.conf.
|
|
|
|
After the user settings, the system settings and platform settings are loaded,
|
|
which may override the user settings.
|
|
|
|
Then, the tool definitions are loaded. The tool wrappers are not yet in effect.
|
|
This only happens when building a package, so the proper variables must be used
|
|
instead of the direct tool names.
|
|
|
|
As the last steps, some essential variables from the wrapper and the package
|
|
system flavor are loaded, as well as the variables that have been cached in
|
|
earlier phases of a package build.
|
|
|
|
24.6.2. The order in bsd.pkg.mk
|
|
|
|
First, bsd.prefs.mk is loaded.
|
|
|
|
Then, the various *-vars.mk files are loaded, which fill default values for
|
|
those variables that have not been defined by the package. These variables may
|
|
later be used even in unrelated files.
|
|
|
|
Then, the file bsd.pkg.error.mk provides the target error-check that is added
|
|
as a special dependency to all other targets that use DELAYED_ERROR_MSG or
|
|
DELAYED_WARNING_MSG.
|
|
|
|
Then, the package-specific hacks from hacks.mk are included.
|
|
|
|
Then, various other files follow. Most of them don't have any dependencies on
|
|
what they need to have included before or after them, though some do.
|
|
|
|
The code to check PKG_FAIL_REASON and PKG_SKIP_REASON is then executed, which
|
|
restricts the use of these variables to all the files that have been included
|
|
before. Appearances in later files will be silently ignored.
|
|
|
|
Then, the files for the main targets are included, in the order of later
|
|
execution, though the actual order should not matter.
|
|
|
|
At last, some more files are included that don't set any interesting variables
|
|
but rather just define make targets to be executed.
|
|
|
|
Chapter 25. Regression tests
|
|
|
|
Table of Contents
|
|
|
|
25.1. The regression tests framework
|
|
25.2. Running the regression tests
|
|
25.3. Adding a new regression test
|
|
|
|
25.3.1. Overridable functions
|
|
25.3.2. Helper functions
|
|
|
|
The pkgsrc infrastructure consists of a large codebase, and there are many
|
|
corners where every little bit of a file is well thought out, making pkgsrc
|
|
likely to fail as soon as anything is changed near those parts. To prevent most
|
|
changes from breaking anything, a suite of regression tests should go along
|
|
with every important part of the pkgsrc infrastructure. This chapter describes
|
|
how regression tests work in pkgsrc and how you can add new tests.
|
|
|
|
25.1. The regression tests framework
|
|
|
|
25.2. Running the regression tests
|
|
|
|
You first need to install the pkgtools/pkg_regress package, which provides the
|
|
pkg_regress command. Then you can simply run that command, which will run all
|
|
tests in the regress category.
|
|
|
|
25.3. Adding a new regression test
|
|
|
|
Every directory in the regress category that contains a file called spec is
|
|
considered a regression test. This file is a shell program that is included by
|
|
the pkg_regress command. The following functions can be overridden to suit your
|
|
needs.
|
|
|
|
25.3.1. Overridable functions
|
|
|
|
These functions do not take any parameters. They are all called in "set -e"
|
|
mode, so you should be careful to check the exitcodes of any commands you run
|
|
in the test.
|
|
|
|
do_setup()
|
|
|
|
This function prepares the environment for the test. By default it does
|
|
nothing.
|
|
|
|
do_test()
|
|
|
|
This function runs the actual test. By default, it calls TEST_MAKE with the
|
|
arguments MAKEARGS_TEST and writes its output including error messages into
|
|
the file TEST_OUTFILE.
|
|
|
|
check_result()
|
|
|
|
This function is run after the test and is typically used to compare the
|
|
actual output from the one that is expected. It can make use of the various
|
|
helper functions from the next section.
|
|
|
|
do_cleanup()
|
|
|
|
This function cleans everything up after the test has been run. By default
|
|
it does nothing.
|
|
|
|
25.3.2. Helper functions
|
|
|
|
exit_status(expected)
|
|
|
|
This function compares the exitcode of the do_test() function with its
|
|
first parameter. If they differ, the test will fail.
|
|
|
|
output_require(regex...)
|
|
|
|
This function checks for each of its parameters if the output from do_test
|
|
() matches the extended regular expression. If it does not, the test will
|
|
fail.
|
|
|
|
output_prohibit(regex...)
|
|
|
|
This function checks for each of its parameters if the output from do_test
|
|
() does not match the extended regular expression. If any of the regular
|
|
expressions matches, the test will fail.
|
|
|
|
Chapter 26. Porting pkgsrc
|
|
|
|
Table of Contents
|
|
|
|
26.1. Porting pkgsrc to a new operating system
|
|
26.2. Adding support for a new compiler
|
|
|
|
The pkgsrc system has already been ported to many operating systems, hardware
|
|
architectures and compilers. This chapter explains the necessary steps to make
|
|
pkgsrc even more portable.
|
|
|
|
26.1. Porting pkgsrc to a new operating system
|
|
|
|
To port pkgsrc to a new operating system (called MyOS in this example), you
|
|
need to touch the following files:
|
|
|
|
pkgtools/bootstrap-mk-files/files/mods/MyOS.sys.mk
|
|
|
|
This file contains some basic definitions, for example the name of the C
|
|
compiler.
|
|
|
|
mk/bsd.prefs.mk
|
|
|
|
Insert code that defines the variables OPSYS, OS_VERSION, LOWER_OS_VERSION,
|
|
LOWER_VENDOR, MACHINE_ARCH, OBJECT_FMT, APPEND_ELF, and the other variables
|
|
that appear in this file.
|
|
|
|
mk/platform/MyOS.mk
|
|
|
|
This file contains the platform-specific definitions that are used by
|
|
pkgsrc. Start by copying one of the other files and edit it to your needs.
|
|
|
|
mk/platform/MyOS.pkg.dist
|
|
|
|
This file contains a list of directories, together with their permission
|
|
bits and ownership. These directories will be created automatically with
|
|
every package that explicitly sets USE_MTREE. This feature will be removed.
|
|
|
|
mk/platform/MyOS.x11.dist
|
|
|
|
Just copy one of the pre-existing x11.dist files to your MyOS.x11.dist.
|
|
|
|
mk/tools/bootstrap.mk
|
|
|
|
On some operating systems, the tools that are provided with the base system
|
|
are not good enough for pkgsrc. For example, there are many versions of sed
|
|
(1) that have a narrow limit on the line length they can process. Therefore
|
|
pkgsrc brings its own tools, which can be enabled here.
|
|
|
|
mk/tools/tools.MyOS.mk
|
|
|
|
This file defines the paths to all the tools that are needed by one or the
|
|
other package in pkgsrc, as well as by pkgsrc itself. Find out where these
|
|
tools are on your platform and add them.
|
|
|
|
Now, you should be able to build some basic packages, like lang/perl5, shells/
|
|
bash.
|
|
|
|
26.2. Adding support for a new compiler
|
|
|
|
TODO
|
|
|
|
Appendix A. A simple example package: bison
|
|
|
|
Table of Contents
|
|
|
|
A.1. files
|
|
|
|
A.1.1. Makefile
|
|
A.1.2. DESCR
|
|
A.1.3. PLIST
|
|
A.1.4. Checking a package with pkglint
|
|
|
|
A.2. Steps for building, installing, packaging
|
|
|
|
We checked to find a piece of software that wasn't in the packages collection,
|
|
and picked GNU bison. Quite why someone would want to have bison when Berkeley
|
|
yacc is already present in the tree is beyond us, but it's useful for the
|
|
purposes of this exercise.
|
|
|
|
A.1. files
|
|
|
|
A.1.1. Makefile
|
|
|
|
# $NetBSD$
|
|
#
|
|
|
|
DISTNAME= bison-1.25
|
|
CATEGORIES= devel
|
|
MASTER_SITES= ${MASTER_SITE_GNU}
|
|
|
|
MAINTAINER= thorpej@NetBSD.org
|
|
HOMEPAGE= http://www.gnu.org/software/bison/bison.html
|
|
COMMENT= GNU yacc clone
|
|
|
|
GNU_CONFIGURE= yes
|
|
INFO_FILES= bison.info
|
|
|
|
.include "../../mk/bsd.pkg.mk"
|
|
|
|
A.1.2. DESCR
|
|
|
|
GNU version of yacc. Can make re-entrant parsers, and numerous other
|
|
improvements. Why you would want this when Berkeley yacc(1) is part
|
|
of the NetBSD source tree is beyond me.
|
|
|
|
A.1.3. PLIST
|
|
|
|
@comment $NetBSD$
|
|
bin/bison
|
|
man/man1/bison.1.gz
|
|
share/bison.simple
|
|
share/bison.hairy
|
|
|
|
A.1.4. Checking a package with pkglint
|
|
|
|
The NetBSD package system comes with pkgtools/pkglint which helps to check the
|
|
contents of these files. After installation it is quite easy to use, just
|
|
change to the directory of the package you wish to examine and execute pkglint:
|
|
|
|
$ pkglint
|
|
looks fine.
|
|
|
|
Depending on the supplied command line arguments (see pkglint(1)), more checks
|
|
will be performed. Use e.g. pkglint -Call -Wall for a very thorough check.
|
|
|
|
A.2. Steps for building, installing, packaging
|
|
|
|
Create the directory where the package lives, plus any auxiliary directories:
|
|
|
|
# cd /usr/pkgsrc/lang
|
|
# mkdir bison
|
|
# cd bison
|
|
# mkdir patches
|
|
|
|
Create Makefile, DESCR and PLIST (see Chapter 11, Package components - files,
|
|
directories and contents) then continue with fetching the distfile:
|
|
|
|
# make fetch
|
|
>> bison-1.25.tar.gz doesn't seem to exist on this system.
|
|
>> Attempting to fetch from ftp://prep.ai.mit.edu/pub/gnu//.
|
|
Requesting ftp://prep.ai.mit.edu/pub/gnu//bison-1.25.tar.gz (via ftp://orpheus.amdahl.com:80/)
|
|
ftp: Error retrieving file: 500 Internal error
|
|
|
|
>> Attempting to fetch from ftp://wuarchive.wustl.edu/systems/gnu//.
|
|
Requesting ftp://wuarchive.wustl.edu/systems/gnu//bison-1.25.tar.gz (via ftp://orpheus.amdahl.com:80/)
|
|
ftp: Error retrieving file: 500 Internal error
|
|
|
|
>> Attempting to fetch from ftp://ftp.freebsd.org/pub/FreeBSD/distfiles//.
|
|
Requesting ftp://ftp.freebsd.org/pub/FreeBSD/distfiles//bison-1.25.tar.gz (via ftp://orpheus.amdahl.com:80/)
|
|
Successfully retrieved file.
|
|
|
|
Generate the checksum of the distfile into distinfo:
|
|
|
|
# make makedistinfo
|
|
|
|
Now compile:
|
|
|
|
# make
|
|
>> Checksum OK for bison-1.25.tar.gz.
|
|
===> Extracting for bison-1.25
|
|
===> Patching for bison-1.25
|
|
===> Ignoring empty patch directory
|
|
===> Configuring for bison-1.25
|
|
creating cache ./config.cache
|
|
checking for gcc... cc
|
|
checking whether we are using GNU C... yes
|
|
checking for a BSD compatible install... /usr/bin/install -c -o bin -g bin
|
|
checking how to run the C preprocessor... cc -E
|
|
checking for minix/config.h... no
|
|
checking for POSIXized ISC... no
|
|
checking whether cross-compiling... no
|
|
checking for ANSI C header files... yes
|
|
checking for string.h... yes
|
|
checking for stdlib.h... yes
|
|
checking for memory.h... yes
|
|
checking for working const... yes
|
|
checking for working alloca.h... no
|
|
checking for alloca... yes
|
|
checking for strerror... yes
|
|
updating cache ./config.cache
|
|
creating ./config.status
|
|
creating Makefile
|
|
===> Building for bison-1.25
|
|
cc -c -DSTDC_HEADERS=1 -DHAVE_STRING_H=1 -DHAVE_STDLIB_H=1 -DHAVE_MEMORY_H=1 -DHAVE_ALLOCA=1 -DHAVE_STRERROR=1 -I./../include -g LR0.c
|
|
cc -c -DSTDC_HEADERS=1 -DHAVE_STRING_H=1 -DHAVE_STDLIB_H=1 -DHAVE_MEMORY_H=1 -DHAVE_ALLOCA=1 -DHAVE_STRERROR=1 -I./../include -g allocate.c
|
|
cc -c -DSTDC_HEADERS=1 -DHAVE_STRING_H=1 -DHAVE_STDLIB_H=1 -DHAVE_MEMORY_H=1 -DHAVE_ALLOCA=1 -DHAVE_STRERROR=1 -I./../include -g closure.c
|
|
cc -c -DSTDC_HEADERS=1 -DHAVE_STRING_H=1 -DHAVE_STDLIB_H=1 -DHAVE_MEMORY_H=1 -DHAVE_ALLOCA=1 -DHAVE_STRERROR=1 -I./../include -g conflicts.c
|
|
cc -c -DSTDC_HEADERS=1 -DHAVE_STRING_H=1 -DHAVE_STDLIB_H=1 -DHAVE_MEMORY_H=1 -DHAVE_ALLOCA=1 -DHAVE_STRERROR=1 -I./../include -g derives.c
|
|
cc -c -DXPFILE=\"/usr/pkg/share/bison.simple\" -DXPFILE1=\"/usr/pkg/share/bison.hairy\" -DSTDC_HEADERS=1 -DHAVE_STRING_H=1 -DHAVE_STDLIB_H=1 -DHAVE_MEMORY_H=1 -DHAVE_ALLOCA=1 -DHAVE_STRERROR=1 -g ./files.c
|
|
cc -c -DSTDC_HEADERS=1 -DHAVE_STRING_H=1 -DHAVE_STDLIB_H=1 -DHAVE_MEMORY_H=1 -DHAVE_ALLOCA=1 -DHAVE_STRERROR=1 -I./../include -g getargs.c
|
|
cc -c -DSTDC_HEADERS=1 -DHAVE_STRING_H=1 -DHAVE_STDLIB_H=1 -DHAVE_MEMORY_H=1 -DHAVE_ALLOCA=1 -DHAVE_STRERROR=1 -I./../include -g gram.c
|
|
cc -c -DSTDC_HEADERS=1 -DHAVE_STRING_H=1 -DHAVE_STDLIB_H=1 -DHAVE_MEMORY_H=1 -DHAVE_ALLOCA=1 -DHAVE_STRERROR=1 -I./../include -g lalr.c
|
|
cc -c -DSTDC_HEADERS=1 -DHAVE_STRING_H=1 -DHAVE_STDLIB_H=1 -DHAVE_MEMORY_H=1 -DHAVE_ALLOCA=1 -DHAVE_STRERROR=1 -I./../include -g lex.c
|
|
cc -c -DSTDC_HEADERS=1 -DHAVE_STRING_H=1 -DHAVE_STDLIB_H=1 -DHAVE_MEMORY_H=1 -DHAVE_ALLOCA=1 -DHAVE_STRERROR=1 -I./../include -g main.c
|
|
cc -c -DSTDC_HEADERS=1 -DHAVE_STRING_H=1 -DHAVE_STDLIB_H=1 -DHAVE_MEMORY_H=1 -DHAVE_ALLOCA=1 -DHAVE_STRERROR=1 -I./../include -g nullable.c
|
|
cc -c -DSTDC_HEADERS=1 -DHAVE_STRING_H=1 -DHAVE_STDLIB_H=1 -DHAVE_MEMORY_H=1 -DHAVE_ALLOCA=1 -DHAVE_STRERROR=1 -I./../include -g output.c
|
|
cc -c -DSTDC_HEADERS=1 -DHAVE_STRING_H=1 -DHAVE_STDLIB_H=1 -DHAVE_MEMORY_H=1 -DHAVE_ALLOCA=1 -DHAVE_STRERROR=1 -I./../include -g print.c
|
|
cc -c -DSTDC_HEADERS=1 -DHAVE_STRING_H=1 -DHAVE_STDLIB_H=1 -DHAVE_MEMORY_H=1 -DHAVE_ALLOCA=1 -DHAVE_STRERROR=1 -I./../include -g reader.c
|
|
cc -c -DSTDC_HEADERS=1 -DHAVE_STRING_H=1 -DHAVE_STDLIB_H=1 -DHAVE_MEMORY_H=1 -DHAVE_ALLOCA=1 -DHAVE_STRERROR=1 -I./../include -g reduce.c
|
|
cc -c -DSTDC_HEADERS=1 -DHAVE_STRING_H=1 -DHAVE_STDLIB_H=1 -DHAVE_MEMORY_H=1 -DHAVE_ALLOCA=1 -DHAVE_STRERROR=1 -I./../include -g symtab.c
|
|
cc -c -DSTDC_HEADERS=1 -DHAVE_STRING_H=1 -DHAVE_STDLIB_H=1 -DHAVE_MEMORY_H=1 -DHAVE_ALLOCA=1 -DHAVE_STRERROR=1 -I./../include -g warshall.c
|
|
cc -c -DSTDC_HEADERS=1 -DHAVE_STRING_H=1 -DHAVE_STDLIB_H=1 -DHAVE_MEMORY_H=1 -DHAVE_ALLOCA=1 -DHAVE_STRERROR=1 -I./../include -g version.c
|
|
cc -c -DSTDC_HEADERS=1 -DHAVE_STRING_H=1 -DHAVE_STDLIB_H=1 -DHAVE_MEMORY_H=1 -DHAVE_ALLOCA=1 -DHAVE_STRERROR=1 -I./../include -g getopt.c
|
|
cc -c -DSTDC_HEADERS=1 -DHAVE_STRING_H=1 -DHAVE_STDLIB_H=1 -DHAVE_MEMORY_H=1 -DHAVE_ALLOCA=1 -DHAVE_STRERROR=1 -I./../include -g getopt1.c
|
|
cc -g -o bison LR0.o allocate.o closure.o conflicts.o derives.o files.o getargs.o gram.o lalr.o lex.o main.o nullable.o output.o print.o reader.o reduce.o symtab.o warshall.o version.o getopt.o getopt1.o
|
|
./files.c:240: warning: mktemp() possibly used unsafely, consider using mkstemp()
|
|
rm -f bison.s1
|
|
sed -e "/^#line/ s|bison|/usr/pkg/share/bison|" < ./bison.simple > bison.s1
|
|
|
|
Everything seems OK, so install the files:
|
|
|
|
# make install
|
|
>> Checksum OK for bison-1.25.tar.gz.
|
|
===> Installing for bison-1.25
|
|
sh ./mkinstalldirs /usr/pkg/bin /usr/pkg/share /usr/pkg/info /usr/pkg/man/man1
|
|
rm -f /usr/pkg/bin/bison
|
|
cd /usr/pkg/share; rm -f bison.simple bison.hairy
|
|
rm -f /usr/pkg/man/man1/bison.1 /usr/pkg/info/bison.info*
|
|
install -c -o bin -g bin -m 555 bison /usr/pkg/bin/bison
|
|
/usr/bin/install -c -o bin -g bin -m 644 bison.s1 /usr/pkg/share/bison.simple
|
|
/usr/bin/install -c -o bin -g bin -m 644 ./bison.hairy /usr/pkg/share/bison.hairy
|
|
cd .; for f in bison.info*; do /usr/bin/install -c -o bin -g bin -m 644 $f /usr/pkg/info/$f; done
|
|
/usr/bin/install -c -o bin -g bin -m 644 ./bison.1 /usr/pkg/man/man1/bison.1
|
|
===> Registering installation for bison-1.25
|
|
|
|
You can now use bison, and also - if you decide so - remove it with pkg_delete
|
|
bison. Should you decide that you want a binary package, do this now:
|
|
|
|
# make package
|
|
>> Checksum OK for bison-1.25.tar.gz.
|
|
===> Building package for bison-1.25
|
|
Creating package bison-1.25.tgz
|
|
Registering depends:.
|
|
Creating gzip'd tar ball in '/u/pkgsrc/lang/bison/bison-1.25.tgz'
|
|
|
|
Now that you don't need the source and object files any more, clean up:
|
|
|
|
# make clean
|
|
===> Cleaning for bison-1.25
|
|
|
|
Appendix B. Build logs
|
|
|
|
Table of Contents
|
|
|
|
B.1. Building figlet
|
|
B.2. Packaging figlet
|
|
|
|
B.1. Building figlet
|
|
|
|
# make
|
|
===> Checking for vulnerabilities in figlet-2.2.1nb2
|
|
=> figlet221.tar.gz doesn't seem to exist on this system.
|
|
=> Attempting to fetch figlet221.tar.gz from ftp://ftp.figlet.org/pub/figlet/program/unix/.
|
|
=> [172219 bytes]
|
|
Connected to ftp.plig.net.
|
|
220 ftp.plig.org NcFTPd Server (licensed copy) ready.
|
|
331 Guest login ok, send your complete e-mail address as password.
|
|
230-You are user #5 of 500 simultaneous users allowed.
|
|
230-
|
|
230- ___ _ _ _
|
|
230- | _| |_ ___ ___| |_|___ ___ ___ ___
|
|
230- | _| _| . |_| . | | | . |_| . | _| . |
|
|
230- |_| |_| | _|_| _|_|_|_ |_|___|_| |_ |
|
|
230- |_| |_| |___| |___|
|
|
230-
|
|
230-** Welcome to ftp.plig.org **
|
|
230-
|
|
230-Please note that all transfers from this FTP site are logged. If you
|
|
230-do not like this, please disconnect now.
|
|
230-
|
|
230-This archive is available via
|
|
230-
|
|
230-HTTP: http://ftp.plig.org/
|
|
230-FTP: ftp://ftp.plig.org/ (max 500 connections)
|
|
230-RSYNC: rsync://ftp.plig.org/ (max 30 connections)
|
|
230-
|
|
230-Please email comments, bug reports and requests for packages to be
|
|
230-mirrored to ftp-admin@plig.org.
|
|
230-
|
|
230-
|
|
230 Logged in anonymously.
|
|
Remote system type is UNIX.
|
|
Using binary mode to transfer files.
|
|
200 Type okay.
|
|
250 "/pub" is new cwd.
|
|
250-"/pub/figlet" is new cwd.
|
|
250-
|
|
250-Welcome to the figlet archive at ftp.figlet.org
|
|
250-
|
|
250- ftp://ftp.figlet.org/pub/figlet/
|
|
250-
|
|
250-The official FIGlet web page is:
|
|
250- http://www.figlet.org/
|
|
250-
|
|
250-If you have questions, please mailto:info@figlet.org. If you want to
|
|
250-contribute a font or something else, you can email us.
|
|
250
|
|
250 "/pub/figlet/program" is new cwd.
|
|
250 "/pub/figlet/program/unix" is new cwd.
|
|
local: figlet221.tar.gz remote: figlet221.tar.gz
|
|
502 Unimplemented command.
|
|
227 Entering Passive Mode (195,40,6,41,246,104)
|
|
150 Data connection accepted from 84.128.86.72:65131; transfer starting for figlet221.tar.gz (172219 bytes).
|
|
38% |************** | 65800 64.16 KB/s 00:01 ETA
|
|
226 Transfer completed.
|
|
172219 bytes received in 00:02 (75.99 KB/s)
|
|
221 Goodbye.
|
|
=> Checksum OK for figlet221.tar.gz.
|
|
===> Extracting for figlet-2.2.1nb2
|
|
===> Required installed package ccache-[0-9]*: ccache-2.3nb1 found
|
|
===> Patching for figlet-2.2.1nb2
|
|
===> Applying pkgsrc patches for figlet-2.2.1nb2
|
|
===> Overriding tools for figlet-2.2.1nb2
|
|
===> Creating toolchain wrappers for figlet-2.2.1nb2
|
|
===> Configuring for figlet-2.2.1nb2
|
|
===> Building for figlet-2.2.1nb2
|
|
gcc -O2 -DDEFAULTFONTDIR=\"/usr/pkg/share/figlet\" -DDEFAULTFONTFILE=\"standard.flf\" figlet.c zipio.c crc.c inflate.c -o figlet
|
|
chmod a+x figlet
|
|
gcc -O2 -o chkfont chkfont.c
|
|
=> Unwrapping files-to-be-installed.
|
|
#
|
|
# make install
|
|
===> Checking for vulnerabilities in figlet-2.2.1nb2
|
|
===> Installing for figlet-2.2.1nb2
|
|
install -d -o root -g wheel -m 755 /usr/pkg/bin
|
|
install -d -o root -g wheel -m 755 /usr/pkg/man/man6
|
|
mkdir -p /usr/pkg/share/figlet
|
|
cp figlet /usr/pkg/bin
|
|
cp chkfont /usr/pkg/bin
|
|
chmod 555 figlist showfigfonts
|
|
cp figlist /usr/pkg/bin
|
|
cp showfigfonts /usr/pkg/bin
|
|
cp fonts/*.flf /usr/pkg/share/figlet
|
|
cp fonts/*.flc /usr/pkg/share/figlet
|
|
cp figlet.6 /usr/pkg/man/man6
|
|
===> Registering installation for figlet-2.2.1nb2
|
|
#
|
|
|
|
B.2. Packaging figlet
|
|
|
|
# make package
|
|
===> Checking for vulnerabilities in figlet-2.2.1nb2
|
|
===> Packaging figlet-2.2.1nb2
|
|
===> Building binary package for figlet-2.2.1nb2
|
|
Creating package /home/cvs/pkgsrc/packages/i386/All/figlet-2.2.1nb2.tgz
|
|
Using SrcDir value of /usr/pkg
|
|
Registering depends:.
|
|
#
|
|
|
|
Appendix C. Directory layout of the pkgsrc FTP server
|
|
|
|
Table of Contents
|
|
|
|
C.1. bootstrap-pkgsrc: Bootstrap kits
|
|
C.2. distfiles: The distributed source files
|
|
C.3. iso: Currently empty
|
|
C.4. misc: Miscellaneous things
|
|
C.5. packages: Binary packages
|
|
C.6. reports: Bulk build reports
|
|
C.7. current, pkgsrc-200xQy: source packages
|
|
|
|
As in other big projects, the directory layout of pkgsrc is quite complex for
|
|
newbies. This chapter explains where you find things on the FTP server. The
|
|
base directory on ftp.NetBSD.org is /pub/pkgsrc/. On other servers it may be
|
|
different, but inside this directory, everything should look the same, no
|
|
matter on which server you are. This directory contains some subdirectories,
|
|
which are explained below.
|
|
|
|
C.1. bootstrap-pkgsrc: Bootstrap kits
|
|
|
|
This directory used to contain binary packages of the package management tools
|
|
for various platforms. For those package collections that need them, they are
|
|
now stored near the binary packages, so you should look in the packages
|
|
directory.
|
|
|
|
C.2. distfiles: The distributed source files
|
|
|
|
The directory distfiles contains lots of archive files from all pkgsrc
|
|
packages, which are mirrored here. The subdirectories are called after their
|
|
package names and are used when the distributed files have names that don't
|
|
explicitly contain a version number or are otherwise too generic (for example
|
|
release.tar.gz).
|
|
|
|
C.3. iso: Currently empty
|
|
|
|
This directory is currently not in use.
|
|
|
|
C.4. misc: Miscellaneous things
|
|
|
|
This directory contains things that individual pkgsrc developers find worth
|
|
publishing.
|
|
|
|
C.5. packages: Binary packages
|
|
|
|
This directory contains binary packages for the various platforms that are
|
|
supported by pkgsrc. Each subdirectory is of the form OPSYS/ARCH/OSVERSION_TAG.
|
|
The meaning of these variables is:
|
|
|
|
* OPSYS is the name of the operating system for which the packages have been
|
|
built. The name is taken from the output of the uname command, so it may
|
|
differ from the one you are used to hear.
|
|
|
|
* ARCH is the hardware architecture of the platform for which the packages
|
|
have been built. It also includes the ABI (Application Binary Interface)
|
|
for platforms that have several of them.
|
|
|
|
* OSVERSION is the version of the operating system. For version numbers that
|
|
change often (for example NetBSD-current), the often-changing part should
|
|
be replaced with an x, for example 4.99.x.
|
|
|
|
* TAG is either 200xQy for a stable branch, or head for packages built from
|
|
the HEAD branch. The latter should only be used when the packages are
|
|
updated on a regular basis. Otherwise the date from checking out pkgsrc
|
|
should be appended, for example head_20071015.
|
|
|
|
The rationale for exactly this scheme is that the pkgsrc users looking for
|
|
binary packages can quickly click through the directories on the server and
|
|
find the best binary packages for their machines. Since they usually know the
|
|
operating system and the hardware architecture, OPSYS and ARCH are placed
|
|
first. After these choices, they can select the best combination of OSVERSION
|
|
and TAG together, since it is usually the case that packages stay compatible
|
|
between different version of the operating system.
|
|
|
|
In each of these directories, there is a whole binary packages collection for a
|
|
specific platform. It has a directory called All which contains all binary
|
|
packages. Besides that, there are various category directories that contain
|
|
symbolic links to the real binary packages.
|
|
|
|
C.6. reports: Bulk build reports
|
|
|
|
Here are the reports from bulk builds, for those who want to fix packages that
|
|
didn't build on some of the platforms. The structure of subdirectories should
|
|
look like the one in Section C.5, "packages: Binary packages".
|
|
|
|
C.7. current, pkgsrc-200xQy: source packages
|
|
|
|
These directories contain the "real" pkgsrc, that is the files that define how
|
|
to create binary packages from source archives.
|
|
|
|
The directory pkgsrc contains a snapshot of the CVS repository, which is
|
|
updated regularly. The file pkgsrc.tar.gz contains the same as the directory,
|
|
ready to be downloaded as a whole.
|
|
|
|
In the directories for the quarterly branches, there is an additional file
|
|
called pkgsrc-200xQy.tar.gz, which contains the state of pkgsrc when it was
|
|
branched.
|
|
|
|
Appendix D. Editing guidelines for the pkgsrc guide
|
|
|
|
Table of Contents
|
|
|
|
D.1. Make targets
|
|
D.2. Procedure
|
|
|
|
This section contains information on editing the pkgsrc guide itself.
|
|
|
|
D.1. Make targets
|
|
|
|
The pkgsrc guide's source code is stored in pkgsrc/doc/guide/files, and several
|
|
files are created from it:
|
|
|
|
* pkgsrc/doc/pkgsrc.txt
|
|
|
|
* pkgsrc/doc/pkgsrc.html
|
|
|
|
* http://www.NetBSD.org/docs/pkgsrc/
|
|
|
|
* http://www.NetBSD.org/docs/pkgsrc/pkgsrc.pdf: The PDF version of the pkgsrc
|
|
guide.
|
|
|
|
* http://www.NetBSD.org/docs/pkgsrc/pkgsrc.ps: PostScript version of the
|
|
pkgsrc guide.
|
|
|
|
D.2. Procedure
|
|
|
|
The procedure to edit the pkgsrc guide is:
|
|
|
|
1. Make sure you have the packages needed to regenerate the pkgsrc guide (and
|
|
other XML-based NetBSD documentation) installed. These are meta-pkgs/
|
|
netbsd-doc for creating the ASCII and HTML versions, and meta-pkgs/
|
|
netbsd-doc-print for the PostScript and PDF versions. You will need both
|
|
packages installed, to make sure documentation is consistent across all
|
|
formats.
|
|
|
|
2. Run cd doc/guide to get to the right directory. All further steps will take
|
|
place here.
|
|
|
|
3. Edit the XML file(s) in files/.
|
|
|
|
4. Run bmake to check the pkgsrc guide for valid XML and to build the final
|
|
output files. If you get any errors at this stage, you can just edit the
|
|
files, as there are only symbolic links in the working directory, pointing
|
|
to the files in files/.
|
|
|
|
5. (cd files && cvs commit)
|
|
|
|
6. Run bmake clean && bmake to regenerate the output files with the proper RCS
|
|
Ids.
|
|
|
|
7. Run bmake regen to install and commit the files in both pkgsrc/doc and
|
|
htdocs.
|
|
|
|
Note
|
|
|
|
If you have added, removed or renamed some chapters, you need to
|
|
synchronize them using cvs add or cvs delete in the htdocs directory.
|
|
|